Natural History

r V'ft
OF
Toronto
I
i'
r.'-.PY
BSoflHDK
THE
American Museum
Journal
VOLUME
IX,
1909
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY THE
AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY

190
it
Committee
EDMUND
of Publication
OTIS HOVEY,
MARY CYNTHIA DICKERSOX,

FRANK
LOUIS
M.
P.
WILLIAM
Editor
Associate Editor
CHAPMAN
GRATACAP
K.
GREGORY
j-
Advisory Board
THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY

77th Street and Cf.xtkal Park, West, New York City
BOARD OF TRUSTEES
PRESIDENT
HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN

FIRST VICE-PRESIDENT
SECOND VICE-PRESIDENT
PIERPONT MORGAN
J.
CLEVELAND
TREASURER
DODGE
II.
SECRETA i;Y
CHARLES LANIER
.1.
HAMPDEN
EiOBB
Class of 1909
JOSEPH
II.
CHOATE
J.
HENRY
F.
PIERPONT MORGAN
OSBORX
Class of 1910
HAMPDEN ROBB
ARTHUR CURTISS JAMES
PERCY
PYNE
JOHN B. TREVOR
J.
|{.
Class of 1911
CHARLES LANIER
ANSON W. HARD
WILLIAM ROCKEFELLER
GUSTAV E. KISSEL
SETH LOW
Class of 1912
I).
O.
MILLS
ARCHIBALD ROGERS
ADRIAN
ALBERT S. BICKMORE
CORNELIUS C CUYLER*
ISELIN,
Jr.
Class of 1913
GEORGE
A.
1).
S.
BOWDOIN
JUILLIARD
CLEVELAND II. DODGE

ARCHER M. HUNTINGTON
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS
DIRECTOR
HERMON
*
leceased.
C.
BUMPUS
A SSIS TA N T-SEC RE TARY AND

ASSISTANT- Tin:. S 'RER
\
GEORGE
H.
SHERWOOD
Scientific Staff.
DIRECTOR.
Hermon
C.
Bumpus, Ph.D.,
Sc. D.
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION.

Prof
Albert S. Bickmore, B. S., Ph.D., LL.D., Curator Emeritus.

George H. Sherwood, A.B., A.M., Curator.
DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY AND INVERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY

Whitfield, A.M., Curator.
Otis Hovey, A.B., Ph.D., Associate Curator.
Prof. R. P.
Edmund
DEPARTMENT OF MAMMALOGY AND ORNITHOLOGY.

Prof. J. A.
Allen, Ph.D., Curator.
Frank M. Chapman, Curator of Ornithology.

Roy C. Andrews, A.B., Assistant in Mammalogy.
W. de W. Miller, Assistant in Ornithology.
DEPARTMENT OF VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY.

Prof.
Henry Fairfield Osborn,
A.B., Sc.D., LL.D., D.Sc, Curator.

Curator.
W. D. Matthew, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Associate

Walter Granger, Assistant.
Barnum Brown, A.B., Assistant.
DEPARTMENT OF ICHTHYOLOGY AND HERPETOLOGY.

Prof
Bashford Dean, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator
of Fishes
Louis Hussakof, B.S., Ph.D., Assistant Curator
and
Reptiles.
of Fossil Fishes.
DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY.
Clark Wissler, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator.
Harlan I. Smith, Assistant Curator.
Robert H. Lowie, A.B., Ph.D., Assistant Curator.
Charles W. Mead, Assistant.
Prof.
Marshall H. Saville, Honorary Curator
of
Mexican Archaeology.
DEPARTMENT OF MINERALOGY.
L. P. Gratacap, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Curator.
George F. Kunz, A.M., Ph.D., Honorary Curator of
Gems.
DEPARTMENT OF BOOKS AND PUBLICATIONS

Prof.
Ralph W. Tower,
A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator.
DEPARTMENT OF INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY.

Henry E. Crampton, A.B., Ph.D., Curator.
Roy W. Miner, A.B., Assistant Curator.
Prof.
Frank E. Lutz,
A.P...
Ph.D., Assistant Curator.
Gratacap, Ph.B., A.P>., A.M., Curator of Mollusca.

William Betjtenmuller, Associate Curator of Lepidoptera.
I..
Prof.
Prof.
I'.
William Morton Wheeler, Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Social Insects.

Alexander Petrunkevitch, Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Arachnida.
Aakon L. Treadwell, B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Annulates
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY.
Prof.
Ralph W. Tower, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator.
DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS.

A.
Woodward,
Ph.D., Curator.
CONTEXTS OF VOLUME
IX.
Page
Title-Page
(
loMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION
Offk ERS AM) TRUSTE]

Scientific Staff
ii
iii
iv
Contents
List of Illustb V.TIONS
vii
No.
JANUARY.
1,
The Duck Hawk, Hackensack Meadow

(Illustrated)
....
\\i>
Egret Groups
Two Noteworthy Foreign Museums

The International Tuberculosis Exhibition
An Ethnological Trip to Lake Athabas<
\.
B v R.
II.
Lowie
10
(Illustrated)
Museum News Notes
15
Lecture Announcemen
Meetings o] Sot eeties
16
rs
is
No.
FEBRUARY.
2,
A SUMMEB WITH THE PACIFIC COAST WHALERS.

Andrews. (Illustrated)
By Edmund
St. Pierre and Mt. Pele in 1908.
....
....
(Illustrated)
The
Indians of California
School Children at the Tuberculosis Exhib
Bj
Ro\ C
>TIS
IIm\ IA
21
(
33
40
(Illus
44
trated)
Museum News Notes

Lect u e A nnounc e \ \
Meetings <>i Societies
i
i :
47
is
rs
50
No.
The Darwix
Celebration.
MARCH.
::,
53
(Illustrated)
New Habitat Groups oi North Amerk w
Birds
Illustrated)
57
The Annual Meeting of the Trustees

The Stefansson-Anderson Arctic Expedition
65
Recent Purchases of Fossil Vertebrates

Museum News Notes
68
....
....
70
Scientific Publications i\ 1908
Lecture Announcements
Meetings of Societies
07
70
7:;
70
CONTENTS
No.
APRIL.
4,
Page
A Collection from the Andaman Islands.
Mead.
81
(Illustrated)
The Oldest Land

Matthew.
A Group
By Charles W.
Reptiles
North America.
in
By W.
1).
91
(Illustrated)
By
of Peculiar Mollusks.
trated)
Museum News Notes
L. P.
Gratacap.
(Illus-
.........
5,
The Seriesof Protozoan Models.
By Roy W. Miner.
(Illus-
103
New Marine Habitat Group
Model of the Goblin Shark. (Illustrated)

News from the Museum's Arctic Explorers.
The Fijian Collection. By Robert H. Lowie.
Dr. William Jones.
By Clark Wissler
The Earth and the Sun. (Illustrated)

The Philippine Exhibition. (Illustrated)
Museum News Notes
No.
6,
....
(Illustrated)
Lecti re Announcements
Indians of
........
........
Vicinity.
7,
Polak Exploration. (Illustrated)

of the Eskimo Hall. (Illustrated)
.
133
134
139
14()
199
211
227
228
8,
DECEMBER.
oi
Illustrated
126
NOVEMBER.
Ancient Sharks. By Bashford Dean

Experimental Work with Pomace Flies.
By F.
'
\'2'-l
124
143
The Giant
117
Rv Alanson
The Mural Decorations

Museum News Notes
No.
109
131
(Illustrated)
No.
in
106
108
OCTOBER.
Manhattan Island and
Skinner.
.....
.....
.....
(Illustrated)
The Enrichment of Our Collections from Arctic America

Museum News Notes
Achievement
100
MAY.
trated)
The
97
98
No.
95
E.
233
Lit/.
23
ILLUSTRA TIONS
Page
The Guffey, Colorado, Meteorite.
By Edmund
>tis
Hovey.
the Foyer.
(Illus-
<
(Illustrated)
Recent Additions to the Meteorites
in
trated)
A Trip
243
to Southern Mexico for Spiders.
Petrunkevitch.
By Alexander
(Illustrated)
249
Museum News Notes
257
........
260
261
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
The
The
The
The
Duck Hawk Habitat Group
Egret Habitat Group

Hackensack Meadow Habitat Group
"Grahame" on Lake Athabasca
Headman. "Old Catherine." Fullblooded Chipewyan
Tallest Chipewyan Measured
ChIPEWYAN Boys
The "Spout" of a Finback Whale
A Humpback Whale Emerging from Beneath the Steamer
The Tail of a Diving Humpba< k
The Whale Harpoon Gun, Ready to Fire
The Gun Harpoon in the Air
An Eighty-foot Sulphurbottom Whale on the Slip
Breast View of a Large Sulphurbottom Whale
Pierre, Martinique.
View Northward from
St.
Window. May, 1908
St. Pierre, Martinique.
Southern Part of the City. Mai
.
....
.
12
13
13
20
23
23
....
190S
St. Pierre,
St.
General View of Ruins.
Martinique.
Pierre, Martinique
May, 1908
Rue Victor Hugo, Looking South-
ward. May, 1908

Martinique. Ruins of the Theater. May, 1908
Mt. Pele, Martinique. The West Side of the Volcano in
35
St. Pierre,
May, 190S
Mt. Pele. Martinique.
37
Summit of
May, 1908
Mt. Pele. The Spine or Obelisk
New Cone Looking S. 60 \\

41
in
Mar*
h.
1903
41
ILLUSTRATIONS
Page
Public School Children Approaching the North and South

Entrances of the Museum to Visit the International
Tuberculosis Exhibition
The Memorial Bust
....
....
of Charles Darwin
Front View of Darwin Bust

Profile View of Darwin Bust
Boobies and Man-o'-War Birds on Cay Verde
A Klamath Lake Bird Colony
Arctic-Alpine Bird-Life in the Canadian Rockies
Sage Grouse in Wyoming
Grebes (upper figure) and Wild Goose (lower figure) on Crane
Lake, Saskatchewan
Andaman Islander Shooting Fish
The Meeting (right) and the Parting (left) of the Andamanese
An Andamanese Marriage Ceremony
Prepared Skulls and Bones Worn as Tokens of Respect for
the Dead
Andamanese Ornaments and Implements
Baskets, Mats and Household Implements
Turtle
Spearing
An Andamanese Dance
Implements of War and the Chase
.
45
52
.54
or>
58
59
60
63
04
80
83
S3
....
....
84
85
86
89
......
......
....
......
....
Spine-Backed Lizard Bimetrodon

Armored Amphibian Eryops. Skull and jaws
Armored Amphibian Diplocaulus
Skill of Armored Amphibian Diplocaulus
Skeletons of the Armored Amphibian Cricotus
A Group of Peculiar Mollusk Shells
.......
......
.........
The Protozoan, Auloceros elegans Hackei

Model ob Auloceros elegans Hackel
Glass Model of Skeleton of Protozoan,
Hackei
rOBLIN
\Uk
Map
of Arctic Alask
Sfl
Stencil Pattern.
Fijian
Model
Fijian
Bi
re oh
.)4
94
96
07
L02
101
105
I()7
ION
I
Cloth
L0
116
Clubs vnd Spears

oi
93
Gorgonetta mirabilis
Till:
01
92
Dale
A New Marine Habitat Group
Vermiculariat Nigricans
89
00
119
Temple
L'o
Cannibal Flesh Hangers, Cannibal Fork,

Kava Bowl and Cups
.
Pottery,
Fijian
.
ii'i
ILLUSTRATIONS
Samples of Fijian Craftsmanship
Model to Demonstrate the Cause of Day and Night and the
Change of Seasons
General View of the Philippine Exhibit
Igorot Group
I.wvooi) Rock-Shelter, Manhattan
....
.
Rock House
Diagram of a Typical Shell Deposit
Cross Section of a Shell Pit
Map Giving the Locations of Shell Deposits
Grave of Skeletons with Arrow Points
Bones Punctured by Arrow Points, from Skeletons Found
Finch's
....
....
on Staten Island
Vertical Section of Refuse
Midway of the Caye

Types of Arrow Points
Knives and Scrapers
Drills, Scrapers
in
L22
125
127
128
142
1
12
145
146
147
1
is
150
Finch's Rock House,
Abou
15]
153
155
and Other Objects
157
Types of Stone Axes and Celts

A IIafted Celt from a Pond at Thorndike, 1 )utchess '<>., X.Y
Pottery Forms of the Coastal Algonkin
Typical Algonkian Pottery Pipe and Fragment of an Effigy
Pipe from Port Washington, L. I.
Incised Designs from Pottery Vessels
Incised Designs from Algonkian Vessels
Map Showing the Location of the New York Coastal Algonkin and Their Neighbors
(
159
161
Ki7
168
169
170
17.")
Indian Burial, Manhattan

Location of Burials, Pits and Shell-Beds near Inwood
Floor Plan, Western End of the Hall of the Plains Indians
190
The Peary Arctic Club Exhibit

An Enplorer's Trail Left at the
198
192,
Ice Foot on the Coast of
Grinnell Land. Greeley Expedition, May, 1882

Pressure Ridge in North Polar Ice Showing One of the
Difficulties of Arctic Travel. Creeley Expedition
201
202
June, 1882
Part of the North Polar Regions, Showing Lines of Ap

proach from america and europe
Musk )x and Polar Bear
The "Morris K. Jesup," a Peary Sledge that Reached the
North Pole
....
191
205
207
208
ILLUSTRATIONS
Page
The Peary Caribou
(Rangifer pearyi
Allen)
Eskimo Goddess of the Sun

Eskimo Conception of the Moon, a Hunter
Sun
Polar Bear at Bay
Eskimo Stalking the Seal
210
212
in
Pursuit of
tiii
213
214
....
Late Autumn
Walrus Hunting in the Light oe the Aurora Borealis
Winter Scene at Peterawik on the Shore of Smith Sound
Reindeer Hunting in Summer
Eskimo ix Sealskin Canoe Harpooning a Narwhal
Scene at Cape York, a Summer Home oe the Eskimo
Restoration of the Jaws of the Fossil Shark, Carcharodoi
Eskimo Encampment
in
megalodon
.........
Fore Leg of a Male Pomace
Fly, Drosophila ampelophila
......
....
......
215
217
218
22]
222
223
226
232
235
A Wing of Drosophila ampelophila Showing Reduction of Vena

tion
Due to Selection
A Normal Wing of
\
Drosophila ampelophila
of Drosophila ampelophila Showing Increase of Vena

tion Die to Selection
n:
'
< ;
"
Front, or
Guffey Meteorite.
Guffey Meteorite.
Brustseite
"
....
.....
Petrunkevitch
Trap-door Spider, ('liorr.op.s- loricatus
Trap-door Spider, Ckorizops loricatus. Side View
Trap-door Spider, Chorizops loricatus. End of Abdomen, Dsei
\s the "Ti; \r Door"
Santa Lucrecia. A Native Village on -the [sthmus of Te
III
On
<
>\
tin
tiii-;
Tf.III
\\
.........
......
.......
VNTEPEC
Jaltepec River, [sthmus of Tehuantepec
Tfiii wtepec River
\
TR
WSI'ol;
'TloN
236
236
238
Rear Side, Protected During Its Jour

the
Air
ney Through
Upper
Edge of Mass as Exhibited
Guffey Meteorite.
Lower
Edge of Mass as Exhibited
Guffey Meteorite.
Photomicrograph
Guffey Meteorite.
Gibeon Iron Meteorite. General View
Gibeon [ron Meteorite. Great Namaqua Land, Africa
Gibeon Iron Meteorite. Polished and Etched Section
Map of Southeastern Mexico Showing Region Visited by De
236
239
240
241
242
244
24.")
246
249
250
250
250
251
256
THE
American Huseum
Journal
Volume
IX
January,
Number
1909
Published monthly from October to
May
inclusive
The American Museum of Natural History
New York
City
by
American Museum
Natural History
of
Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West,
New York
City
BOARD OF TRUSTEES
President
Henry Fairfield Osborn

First Vice-President
Second V ice-President
PlERPONT MORG
Cleveland H. Dodge
J.
\N
Secretary
Treasurer
Charles Lanier
Hampden Robb
J.
Class of 1908
H. O.
HAVEMEYER
A.
JUILLIARD
D.
CLEVELAND
H.
FREDERICK E. HYDE
GEORGE S. BOWDOIN
DODGE
Class of 1909
GEORGE
JOSEPH H. CHOATE
J. PIERPOXT MORGAN
HENRY
G.
F.
HAVEN
OSBORN
Class of 1910
PERCY R. PYNE
JOHN B. TREVOR
J. HAMPDEN ROBB
ARTHUR CURTISS JAMES
Class of 1911
CHARLES LANIER
ANSON W. HARD
SETH LOW
WILLIAM ROCKEFELLER
GUSTAV E. KISSEL
Class of 1912
D. O.
ALBERT
MILLS
ARCHIBALD ROGERS
S.
CORNELIUS
ADRIAN
ISELIN,
BICKMORE
C. CUYLER
Jr.
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS
Assistant-Secreta ry and
hi rector
HEBMON
C,
George
Limits
II.
ssistant- Treasurer
Sherwood
The American Mtjsei \i of Natural History was established in 1869 to promote

the Natural Sciences ami to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people, and
The Museum
the world.
it
is in cordial cooperation with all similar institutions throughout
authorities are dependenl upon private subscriptions and the dues from members for procuring Deeded additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America
and other pari - of the world.
The membership
fee- are,
Animal Meml-ers
Life Members
All
for de
money
received from
the educational
The Museum
is
open
10
100
membership fees is used

work of the Museum.
free to the public
s 500
Fellows
Patrons
on every day
L000
for increasing the collections
in
the year.
and
fc
The American Museum Journal

JANUARY,
IX
Vol.
No.
1909
THE DUCK HAWK, HACKENSACK MEADOW AND EGRET GROUPS.
THE
Journal
Habitat
presents this
Two
Groups.
month photographs
of these,
three
of
Bird
recently completed, are of
New York
special interest to residents of the vicinity of
City.
shows the Duck Hawk or Peregrine Falcon as it nests on

This Falcon is famed for its fearlessness and strength
of wing and talon.
Among falconers the Peregrine was rated second
and no person of lower rank than an earl was
Gyrfalcon
only to the
The
first
the Palisades.
permitted to
own and
found throughout
Near
ledges
New York
and
cliffs
the.
fly
one of these noble hawks.
greater part of the world but
City
it
is
known
of the Palisades
to nest only
is
riie
Peregrine
is
nowhere common.
on the
less accessible
and Hudson Highlands.
The second local group illustrates the bird-life of our Hackensack

Meadows in August. During this month, and in September, these
marshes are the home of myriads of birds which come to them to roost
and
to feed.
Swallows of several species are comparatively rare in the

late in the afternoon they stream in by the
marshes during the day, but
thousand, coming from every direction and steering their
flight
toward
some regularly frequented roost in the reeds. They

morning radiating to all points of the compass to scour the country for
Red-winged Blackbirds, Bobolinks, now called Reedbirds, and
food.
leave early in the
Carolina or Sora Rail are attracted to the marshes by the wild

ripens about this time; and the last two are
now
rice
killed in large
which
numbers.
In August the marshes are remarkable not only for their birds but also
Marsh mallows, cardinal flowers, jewel-weed, sagitfor their flowers.
taria,
pickerel weed, loose-strife, wild
gerardia and
many
sunflower,
hempweed,
vervain,
other species bloom so luxuriantly that one might
imagine that nature was holding
a flower
show.
shows part of a colony of the White Egret in a

This Habitat Group was
flooded cypress forest of South Carolina.
added to the series earlv in the year, in fact the history of the accunm-
The
third group
THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL
lation of Egret studies
Both the birds and
Journal
reported in the
is
December, 1907.
for
The nests
swamp through
haunt are singularly picturesque.
their
are high in the trees and look out over the waters of a
ragged cypress sprays and festoons of "Spanish moss." This is the

Egret that has been brought so near extermination by the plume-hunters.
matter for rejoicing that there
It is a
lina rookery and, moreover, that
still
exists this large
South Caro-
it
is
within the precincts of a
preserve where continued protection
is
assured.
game
TWO NOTEWORTHY FOREIGN MUSEUMS.
TWO
European museums
relatively recent
James L. Clark,
spent the
summer
result- of
methods
the
to
of Preparation
impressions of
Mr.
and
who
or
Installation,
The institutions in
Congo Museum, just outside
Museum
at Frankfurt;
and
their
question are the
and
of Brussels,
prominence
the
is
of installation, displaying objects in direct relation to
environment or
their
according
of 1908 abroad.
Musee de Tervueren,
the Senckenberg
is
Department
of the
nevertheless peculiarly
establishment, are
in
This
noteworthy.
and
natural history, rather small
of
to industry.
The Musee de Tervueren
is
an unpretentious one-story building
two main halls devoted to the zoology and ethnology, respectively,

Congo Free State. The hall of zoology contains many rare mammals, birds and fishes, several okapi of different ages making perhaps
with
its
of the
the most striking exhibit.
It
is
the hall of ethnology, however, that
claims emphatic admiration in Mr. Clark's opinion.
Each specimen
from above.
is
well
placed and
The
photographs illustrating action or use.

alcoves,
home
utensils of the
hut
life,
for instance, straw
are arranged on
lighting
is
accompanied by
general arrangement
where are shown various phases of every day
alcoves devoted to
and
is
The
life.
is
In
in
the
mats and implements
the walls as a
background;
large pieces, such as stone pestles, or models of the huts, are set on the
floor;
The
while
a life-sized
figures of these
family group
plaster, cleverly painted,

ot the natives.
The
is
made
to
occupy the central space.
groups are beautifully modeled and executed
and are clothed
in
people are represented
in
the genuine wearing apparel

in action,
grinding grain or
<
;.
TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION
as the case may be.

Finally, above the alcove
mural paintings of an entire settlement show the village life.
making ornaments,
exhibit,
Thus is told in a comparatively small space a complete story of Congo

home life in a manner highly instructive and artistic as well.
The Senckenberg Museum at Frankfurt is in connection with the
University.
The building is modern, well lighted and provided with a
large hall equipped for lectures
and study.
group of African antelope
with a painted background to show environment proclaims the enterprize of the institution and the tendency of
its
The
work.
large Diplo-
docus presented by the hue Mr. Morris K. Jesup, while president of the
American
Museum
The world
of Natural History, stands in the
to-day
demands
not only that the
main
foyer.
modern museum
shall
exhibit a multitude of rare and splendid specimens for the use of scientists
and students, but
make
will
also that
it
shall so install these
specimens that they
a vivid appeal to the ordinary observe]-, forcefully portraying
stages in the evolution of the material world and in the history of civilization.
THE INTERNATIONAL TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION.
UNDER
the auspices of the Charity Organization Society of the
City of
New
York, the International Tuberculosis Exhibition
opened November 30th
Museum.
It
immediately proved
new northwest wing of the

power to attract. By the close
the
in
its
day it had been visited by 05,000 people, and before the end
week by one-third of the half-million attendance expected by
of the fourth
of the
first
the society for the whole period of six weeks.
So admirably
is
comparative study.
the exhibition
organized
The
German
extensive
the auspices of the Imperial

for treatment
and
and
cure, as
Board of Health
do also the exhibits
that
it
display,
readily permits
prepared under
of Berlin, stands mainly

of Switzerland,
several other foreign nations, while Ireland's notable
Hungary
campaign
under the Women's National Health Association has been aimed toward
an education that would bring about prevention.
The keynote
of the
American exhibits
Pennsylvania and Rhode Island are
also
is
prevention.
Those
of
realistic in the presentation of actual
rooms
living
to contrast the conditions
conditions that should obtain.

disastrous effects
promoting tuberculosis and the
part of
New
comparing models of old tenements and those
and bringing
York"
light
and
air conditions,
under the new law
built
New
the striking features of the "Congestion of
mind
to
York's exhibit shows the
of over-crowding under adverse
exhibition held here last winter
and the Tuberculosis exhibition
Massachusetts gives a study of the industrial aspect
of three years ago.
showing photomicrographs of dust and dust-clogged lungs,

and making plain the need of efficient protection for workers in horn
and celluloid, steel, iron, felt and other materials.
A prominent place at the south entrance is occupied by the exhibit of
of the disease,
the
New York
Charity Organization Society's Committee on the Pre-
vention of Tuberculosis.
This Committee
at the recent International
Congress in Washington shared with Ireland the

the best evidence of effective work.
mass
mittee's
prize of $1 ,000 for
German and
comprehensive character of
its
English
Com-
Bohemian,
of free literature put forth in Yiddish, Italian,
Swedish, French,
New York
first
Just to glance through this
to gain a realization of the
is
work.
City has been fortunate in a cooperation of
any other
zation for the prevention of tuberculosis than
officials
and
Koch, has a better organi-
physicians, and, in the opinion of Dr. Robert
city in the world.
In 1S86, the death rate from tubercular diseases was 4.42 per 1,000;
1907,
was 2.42 per
it
more than 40 per
1,000, a decrease of
in
Of
cent.
the 14,000 free beds for tuberculosis patients in the United States, 25 per
cent are in
New York
City.
But, as was emphasized at the meeting
that formally opened the exhibition, conditions in
become
ideal,
forces at
work
New York
can never
and tuberculosis as rare as smallpox, until there is a trio of

Hence
officials, physicians and an enlightened public.
the value of the Tuberculosis Exhibit as
an educative force
counter-
in
acting habit, ignorance and prejudice; hence the place of the exhibition
within the walls of the American
Museum
of Natural
classification with other evidences of increased
progress, such as playgrounds
and
its
free baths, parks, schools,
museums
free public lectures.
A review
one
and
History and
knowledge and municipal
thai
of the
whole exhibit, or
tuberculosis
sacrificed to
York State
it
in
is
<>f
even
;i
pari of the whole, convinces
preventable disease, thai the 1,095,000 lives
each year (200,000
in
the United States,
1907) are an unnecessary loss.
It
is
the
1,406 in
human
New
interesl
TUBERO0LOSIS EXHIBITION
in this
in
stupendous
makes
it
fact that holds the visiting throngs of
study of alcove after alcove.
earnest
to
life
is
At the same time,
well on.
and
manner
that therefore the
interesting in
is
also
changes; both
in course;
may have
prevention of infec-
must be segregation.
compare tuberculosis and
of the warfare
connection
this
Both are caused by
leprosy.
bacilli
to
whose growth produces
a long period of latency;
local tissue
both are protracted
both lack evidence of hereditary predisposition.
expert discussions, this fact remains the
final
issue:
stamping out of the white plague can never take

advanced
cases.
This conclusion
that
Out
of
all
complete
place, no matter
how
made, except by segrega-
resistant to tubercle bacilli the populace can be

tion of
exhibition
suggests even more defi-
it
must be
nitely that the prevention of tuberculosis
It
whatever station
The
clear that, in most parts of the world at least, the fight against
tuberculosis
tion,
j>
reached not only by analogy
is
with diseases like leprosy, nor only by a study of the pathology of the
disease, nor only
by experimentation with cattle by which extermination

was effected in numerous herds in one generation by
segregation, but also by a comparison of the actual experience of various
of tuberculosis
This comparison shows
countries.
institutional care rather than
any con-
dition of living or industry, the influence that remains in constant relation
amount
to the
of tuberculosis existing; therefore this institutional care
must be the predominant
influence.
knowledge of
force to a prominent feature of the exhibit,
sanatoria, such as those designed for the
the
Henry Phipps
facts,
Institute,
new
adds new
buildings to be put up at
The
Philadelphia.
this
models of hospitals and
visitor
searches for
not merely of structure, but likewise of organization and main-
tenance of such institutions.
How many
will
be privately endowed?
How many should be erected and supported at the expense of state or

nation? These are questions that must have practical answers in the
near future.
state of
It is
New York
computed
that
if
every consumptive
now dying
in the
were given hospital care, the number would be about
one-half of the insane supported at public expense.
Man's
infection
from bovine tuberculosis
exhibits, particularly in the pathological
of
Animal Industry
in the
city's
and
is
given emphasis
in
various
work presented by the Bureau

Department of Agriculture,
of the United States
laws of the New York Department of Health with regard to the

milk supply, in a demonstration of the pasteurization of milk,
in the
equipment of a model dairy and model cowshed shown
in
10
just outside the north entrance to the exhibition.
temporary structures
It
among
must be conceded, however, that
physicians there exists a
difference of opinion, relatively unimportant in
its
practical bearings,
Many-
concerning the matter of man's infection from cow's milk.

believe that milk
is
minor vehicle
In
potent one in the case of children.
fact, the
at the Congress of 1901 as to the identity of

bacilli is still
an unsettled
though a
of infection for adults,
scientific question,
controversy that arose
human and bovine tubercle

with Dr. Koch maintaining
the distinct character of the two germs but allowing the possibility of
man's infection from bovine
The
of
bacilli.
International Tuberculosis Exhibition must be admitted to be
far-reaching
significance.
stands
It
knowledge of
increased
for
nature, of the relations between the hosts of the microscopic world
man; it stands for

means for the future a
the health of
happily,
and men
it
of affairs.
social
and economic progress;
to bring about, in general,
between men of science
closer union
Besides accomplishing
its
and
and,
main
more hygienic ways
object,
it is
certain
of living, broader ideas
of the work that should be done in health-control by city, state and

national governments,
and a more
practical recognition of the obligations
of mutual helpfulness.
The
exhibition will be open to the public until January 10.
Num-
erous mass meetings and special conferences are being held by physicians,
medical students, nurses, social
workers, labor unions, street
railway employees and others, with announcements in the daily papers

of the dates of these meetings and the
programmes
of speakers.
AN ETHNOLOGICAL TRIP TO LAKE ATHABASCA.
DURING
the
summer
Museum and
the
of
1908,
between
by arrangement
New York Academy
of Sciences,
the
undertook
an ethnological expedition to the Chipewyan Indians of Lake
Athabasca.
broughl
me
Leaving New York on the 5th

t<
Edmonton, probably the
of
May,
five
and the northernmost point thai can be reached by rail.

place, in the office of the Hudson's Bay Company, that
camping
outfit
and procured the two
days' travel
greatest fur-mart of the world

It
was
at this
completed
articles considered the
my
most essen-
AN ETHNOLOGICAL
TRIP TO LAKE ATHABASCA
11
parts of a Northland traveler's equipment, a mosquito bar for pro-
tial
tection at night
and
netting for day use.
two days' stage journey found me
at
After leaving
Edmonton
Athabasca Landing, the
office and the head of the Arctic inland water-route.
last post
Company, who
down stream with a fleet of seven scows hearing
the yearly provisions for all the Company's northern trading posts.
Each boat was manned by several oarsmen, who rowed after the fashion
Here,
joined Captain Kelly of the Hudson's Hay
was prepared
Roman
galley-slaves, rising
steersman
who manipulated
of the old
and by
to start
THE "GRAHAME
we
alternately
rowed and
breed crew whiling
away
drifted
from
their seats at each stroke,
heavy sweep.
For several days
ON LAKE ATHABASCA
down
the Athabasca River, our half-
leisure time with a
hand-game
similar to our
"button, button, who's got the button."
Bv
the 19th of
May we
were only a short distance above the Grand
Rapids of the Athabasca, and, owing

water and the numerous rocks
obliged to punt instead of row.
in
to the
extreme shallowness of the
the river-bed, the oarsmen
At the Grand Rapids, the
divided into two channels by an island nearly a half mile long.
Dr. Lowie's route
Journal
for
may
November, 190S.
l>e
traced by studying the
map on page
were
river is
The
102 of the
THE AM ERICA X MUSEUM JOURXAL
12
western of the two channels
is
wholly impassable, but the eastern channel
can be traversed, provided boats have been lightened of their cargoes.

Accordingly we removed our freight and baggage to the shore, transporting them the length of the island in hand-pushed carts or on our backs,
and steered the emptied scows through the shoals along the eastern bank.
Finally, at the far end of the island, we reloaded the boats, having con-
sumed
six
The
days in the tedious operation.
next hundred miles gave an almost continuous succession of
rapids, which, however, our scows passed without
damage.
We
reached
HEADMAN
"
a
OLD CATHARINE
Fullblooded Chipewyan.
Ft.
McMurray,
Here the
of
the
freight
the objective point of the scows, on the 28th of
was unloaded and
Hudson's
plies irregularly
Hay Company's steamer,
between
Kelly then turned back,
the
May.
to await the arrival
"Grahame," which
McMurray and Smith's Landing. Captain

leaving me and two half-breed watchmen with
care, since the
remainder of the
bank
Ft.
three days' supply of provisions
band with
piled on the
which
it
turned out we had to hus-
steamer did not appear
trip presented
for eight days.
The
no unusual features, and on the 8th of
AN ETHNOLOGICAL
June,
landed
TRIP TO LAKE ATHABASCA
L3
Chipewyan, on
at Ft.
the northwestern shore of Lake Atha-
Here
basca.
found good opportuni-
ty for the investigation

since this settlement
had planned,
one of the
is
rendezvous of the Chipewyan
chief
Indians.
These IndianAthabascan,
largest
are
embracing
the
stock,
family
linguistic
America,
branch of the
Dene
or
the
North
of
Hupa
of
Apache and Na-
California and the
vajo of the Southwest, as well as the

aborigines
of
the
They do
basin.
Mackenzie River
not live on reserva-
but hunt and
tions,
fashion around
the
fish
primitive
in
shores of
Lake
Athabasca, Lake Claire and the Slave

River.
Peltries
are
offered
Hudson's Bay Company and
to
the
TALLEST CHIPEWYAN MEASURED.
to rival
Height
t;
feel
in<
"free-traders" in exchange for cloth-
ing and provisions;

ship
is
but, even with these supplies, considerable hard-
often encountered during the long winters.
CHIPEWYAN BOYS.
14
valuable photographs were secured at Ft. Chipewyan and at
Many
Fond du Lac near

the Chipewyan
The physique
the eastern extremity of the Lake.
popular conceptions of Indian appearance are modeled.

bones
on the whole,
are,
less
Though
Their cheek-
prominent; and, as the hair of the face
common and
not plucked out, fairly heavy moustaches are

also occur.
of
from the Sioux prototype on which
differs considerably
is
whiskers
not averaging below five feet seven inches in height,
the natives of the Athabasca district are short as
compared with the
Plains Indians.
Ethnologically, the
traits of all their
and
zation
Thev do
Chipewyan were found
Athabascan congeners:
any elaborate ceremonials, nor
centralized executive power;
Shamanistic
esoteric fraternities
activity,
two fundamental
extraneous influences.
extraordinary susceptibility to
(2)
not practise
lacking.
to share
(1) great simplicity of organi-
is
there any strongly
and
however, flourished
age-societies are
until recent times,
and within the memory of men still living at the fort, there resided at
Fond du Lac a medicine-man, who, according to the belief of the natives,
could transform himself into a wolf and thus hunt the moose.
In their
mythology, the Chipewyan betray a strong family resemblance to their

northern congeners.
of
weird foundling
There are
who by
tales of giants, of the
man
in the
moon,
powers aided his people
his magical
in
shaman who avenged his father's

murder and destroyed all his enemies until the time when he himself
The receptivity of the Chipewyan is shown
perished by an accident.
by the strong influence exerted by the Catholic missions and the Hud-
times of famine, and of a powerful
son's
Bay Company, both
conditions.
which have profoundly modified primitive
)ther instances in point are the adoption of a complete
cycle into their mythology,

in the
of
and the imitation of
!ree
their southern neighbors
Cree tea-dance, a purely social diversion.
In July, an opportunity offered to return to civilization with a freetrader.
Our
little
172 miles of lake
craft
and
was towed
for three
days by
McMurray.
river to Ft.
a small
There the
the crew were harnessed to a tow-line to pnll the boat
265 miles of the Athabasca

obliged
several
trying
to
miles,
to
deadfalls,
out and
get
get
foot-hold
on
five-fool
slippery
in
men
of
np the remaining
commence an "obstacle-walk,"
and jumping across logs
eight
At each of the rapids,
River.
now clambering up
tug through
at
we were
times for
ledge of limestone,
now
earth-bank, dodging lodged
our way.
Every night we camped
MUSEUM NEWS XOTES

ashore, pitching our mosquito-bars on wet
be.
At
and
re-embarked,
to
sight
any moose, our
was
diet
whole, in relatively short time, covering the
mately sighted
From
there
it
was with
wharves and
the
we took
the stage to
miles'
As we were not fortunate

a
combination of bacon, bannocks and beans.

in seventeen days, but
Twenty
our journey.
continued
journey we considered a good day's work.
enough
or dry as the case might
each morning we rose, bundled up our bars and
five o'clock
bedding,
soil
15
well-nigh
uninterrupted
We made
the trip, as a
total
distance of 437 miles
a sense of great
relief that
Athabasca
of
buildings
Edmonton, and were again
we
ulti-
Landing.
railroad
in
connection with the outside world.

R.
MUSEUM NEWS
Lowie.
II.
NOTES.
MaSON MITCHELL, to whom the

thropology and Mammalogy are already
THE HON.
departments of Anindebted
for
valuable material from eastern Asia, presented to the
much
Museum
December an exceptional series of ethnological specimens from Tibet,

An extended
together with some choice things from China and India.
number
of
the
reserved
for
future
Journal.
a
notice of this acquisition is
in
The
Department
of
a guanaco
Townsend, who obtained it
Magellan. The guanaco is a
Anthropology has recently received
skin cape as a gift from Mr. Charles H.
some years ago
mammal
the adult
at
Punta Arena.
related to
is
Strait of
and somewhat larger than the llama.
coarse, so that old skins are not suitable for use
facture of garments, hut the hair of the

bly not
more than two weeks old
capes like the one just received.

ostrich sinew.
The
young
is fine,
The
in
the
hair of
manu-
and animals proba-
are slaughtered for skins to be used in
The
skins arc sewed together with
Tehuelches of the continental side of the
Strait
wear the robe with the hair next to the body, while the Onas across the
water from them, where the rainfall
is
much
greater, turn the fleece
side out, since the hair readily sheds water.
The
members have been elected since the last issue of the

Members, Messrs. George Shiras, 3d, James W.
following
Journal:
Life
16
Murray and Gordon Knox Bell and Mmes.

Emily H. Moir and William Church Osborn; Annual Members, Messrs. Walter E. Frew, George F.
Norton, Charles Scribner, Parker D. Handy, Edmund D. Randolph, Jefferson Clark, George L. Jewett, Marcus Mayer,
Jacques Ballin, Wm. R. Beal, Charles E. Herrmann, Antonio
Knauth, Charles W. McKelvey, Joseph Nathan, Robert Scoville, E. A. S. Clarke, Karl Bitter, Roswell Miller, Wm. Gordon
Ellsworth, Henry
Emma
A.
B. Auchincloss,
Fellows, Franklin Murphy, A. J. Sauter, Jos. H. Steinhardt,

Carl Dreier, Alphonse Montant, Ralph Pulitzer, G. H. Risley,
Wm. Fellowes Morgan, De Lancey Nicoll, Nathan Straus, Moses

Bijur, Rudolph E. Schirmer, George W. Jenkins, Robert M.
Gallaway, J. G. Taylor, Heinrich Schniewind, Jr., Henry B.
Barnes, W. J. Curtis, Eben Richards, Wm. Armistead Lane, S.
L. Schoonmaker, Isaac J. Bernheim, T. A. Havemeyer, John
Zimmermann, Samuel Moffitt and C. A. Tatum, Rev. W. R.
Huntington, Col. John Schuyler Crosby, Doctors Alfred K.
Hills, Charles McBurney, Elmer A. Sheets, Daniel M. Stimson,
Bert. A. Burns and Lyman Abbott, Mmes. John Wells, John
Hobart Warren, E. H. Harriman, R. Somers Hayes, T. B. Woolsey,
Mary A. Tuttle, Isaac

-G.
G.
N. Solis,
Wheelock and Florence
E. Spingarn, R. Dun Douglass,

Maxwell and Dr. Anna Bloomer.
J.
P.
LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS.
LEGAL HOLIDAY COURSE.

Fully illustrated.
Lectures begin
at
Open
3:15
P.
free to the
public
Doors Open
M.
at
No
2:45
Two
lectures remain to be given in this course:
New
Year's Day, January
"Florida Bird Life."
1,
tickets required.
P.
M.
1909.
(Moving pictures.)
By Frank M. Chapman.
Washington's Birthday, February 22, 1909.
"Some
of the
Food and
Game
Fishes of the Eastern United States.
Habits and Methods of Capture."
By Roy W. Miner.
LECTURES
17
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY COURSE.

Jesup Lectures.
Given in cooperation with Columbia

Wednesday evenings at <S:15 o'clock.
Continuation of
Maclatjrin
of
January
"The
5.
University.
course of lectures on light by Peofessok
Columbia
Richard C.
University.
exact
laws of
and
reflet lion
refraction
and
their
bearing on the construction of optical instruments."
January
January
13.
"Optical
"The
20.
properties of crystals."
principle of interference and
ous color phenomena.'
January
27.
"The
measurement
its
explanation of vari-
of light
waves and the theory
of dif-
fraction."
Februarv
3.
"Some relations between
light
ami
electricity."
PEOPLE'S COL USE.

Given in cooperation with the City Department of Education.
Tuesday evenings at S o'clock. Doors open at 7:30.
Ian C. Hannah,
Far East.
"The
January
.
a course of six lectures
on European relations with the
East and the West and Their Different Ideals."
"China's
Everlasting Empire."
"England's Eastern Empire."
"The
Russian March Across Asia."
"Japan's Transformation."
"America as an Asiatic Power."
Saturday evenings
at S o'clock.
Doors open
at 7:30.
Professor
Lafayette B. Mendel of Vale University,

"Development of the Milk Industry."
Hon. J. S. Whipple, "The Adirondack Forest."
Professor Lafayette B. Mendel, "Growth and Beauty
January
9.
January
January
23.
January
30.
William L. Hall, " Forests and Waters."
16.
of Children."
18
MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES.
New York Academy of Sciences and its Affiliated

Museum according to the following schedule:
Public meetings of the

Societies are held at the
On Monday evenings, The New York Academy
of Sciences:
Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy.

Second Mondays, Section of Biology.
Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry.
Fourth Mondays, Section of Anthropology and Psychology.
First
On Tuesday
evenings, as announced:
The Linnaean
Society of
New
York, The
New York
Entomological
Society and the Torrey Botanical Club.
On Wednesday evenings, as announced:

The New York Mineralogical Club.
<
)n
Friday evenings, as announced:
The New York

The programmes
Microscopical Society
of the meetings of the respective organizations are
published in the weekly Bulletin of the

sent to the
members
making request
New York Academy
of the several societies.
Members
and
of Sciences
of the
Museum
on
of the Director will be provided with the Bulletin as issued.
The American Huseum Journal

Edmund Otis Hoykv,
Frank M. Chapman,
Editor.
H is I'. Gratacap,
William K. Gregory,
l,i
Advisory Board.
Subscription, One Dollar per year.

Fifteen Cents per copy.
subscription to the Journal is included in the membership fees of all classes
hi'
>>f
Members
<
St.,
Gam-
Entered as second-class matter January
of
Museum.
Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boytston

bridge, Mass., or 77ih St.
Central Park West, New York City.
12, 1907. at the Post-office

Act of Congress, July 10. ISO I.
ai
Boston, Mass.
Scientific Staff.
DIRECTOR.
Hermon
C.
Btjmpus, Ph.D., Sc. D.
DEPARTMEN1 OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION.

Prof.
Albert S. Bickmore, B.S.,

George H. Sherwood,
Ph.D., LL.D., Curator Emeritus.

A.B., A.M., Curator.
DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY AND INVERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY

Prof. R. P.
Edmund
Whitfield. A.M.. Curator.
Otis Hovey, A.B., Ph.D., Associate Curator.
DEPARTMENT OF MAMMALOGY AND ORNITHOLOGY

Prof. J. A.
Allen. Ph.D., Curator.
Prank M. Chapman,
Curator of Ornithology.
DEPARTMENT OF VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY.

Prof.
W.
Henry Fairfield Osborn,

D.
Matthew.
A.B., ScD., LL.D., D.Sc, Curator.

Ph.B., A. P., A.M., Ph.D., Associate Curator.
Walter Granger, Assistant.

Barnum Brown, A.B., Assistant.
Prof.
Bashford Dean, A.B., A.M., Ph.D.. Curator of

Louis Hussakof, B.S., Ph.D., Assistant.
Fossil
Fishes.
DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY.
Cl\.rk Wissler, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator.
Harlan I. Smith. Assistant Curator.
George H. Pepper, Assistant.
Charles W. Mead,
Prof.
Marshall
II.
Assistant.
Sayille, Honorary Curator of Mexican Archaeology.
DEPARTMENT OF ENTOMOLOGY.
William Beutenmi ller, Curator.
DEPARTMENTS OF MINERALOGY AND CONCHOLOGY.

George
L. P. Gratacap, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Curator.

F. Ktjnz, A.M., Ph.D., Honorary Curatoi of
Gems.
DEPARTMENT OF BOOKS AND PUBLICATIONS.

Prof.
Ralph W. Tower,
DEPARTMENT OF INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY

Roy W. Miner,
A.B., Assistant Curator.
Dahlgren, D.M.D., Assistant Curator.

William Morton Wheeler, Ph.D., Honorary Curator of
B. E.
Prof.
Social
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY.
Prof.
Ralph W. Tower,
DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS.

A.
Woodward,
Ph.D., Curator.
Insects.
THE AMERICAN MUSEUM
NATURAL HISTORY
FOR
CO
o
o\
*
_.
<U

Vol.
IX
FEBRUARY,
1909
No. 2
A SUMMER WITH THE PACIFIC COAST WHALERS.
THE
recent
establishment
the coasts of
several
of
shore-whaling stations on
Vancouver Island and Alaska, has made possible
a study of certain species of the large whales inhabiting the
North Pacific Ocean.
With the exception
of a single work, "Marine

M. Scammon in 1874, these
animals have remained almost unknown scientifically, and their rela-
Mammalia,"
written
by Captain C.
tionship to the corresponding Atlantic forms, which have been carefully

investigated by Dr. F.
To
W. True,
has never been satisfactorily determined.
secure data for a comparative study of the external and osteologicaJ
characters of these whales,
left
Xew York
late in April
on a
Museum
expedition to the west coast whaling stations.
The
commonly taken
species
there are the
bottom and Finback, the first-named
known
the group
bone" and
in largest
Humpback, Sulphur-
numbers.
All
belong to
as Fin whales, having short, coarse baleen or "whale-
Before the invention of the harpoon gun in
thin blubber.
1864, they were seldom hunted, because the comparatively small yield
of
oil
and whalebone and the great speed of the animals
together with their tendency to sink
rum grata
to the
men
when
killed,
in the small boat.
in the
water,
rendered them persona
To-day, however, they are
being taken at a rate which threatens their speedy extinction.
The
study of whales
Their great
is
beset with
many and
size, alone, is a serious obstacle.
ordinarv thing as to turn over a
fin for
If
unusual
one wishes
to
difficulties.
do such an
observation of the color or mark-
ings of the other side, he must have the assistance of not only one
but several.
his studies
by
Thus
the naturalist
is
upon the men about him,

toward
their attitude
man
totally dependent for the success of

in fact,
they
make
or ruin his
work
it.
met with most courteous treatment from the owners

my thanks are due to the Pacific Whaling Company
and Dr. Rismuller of Victoria, B. C, and to Captain I. N. Hibbard of
Fortunately,
of the stations, and
21
22
Tyee Company, Alaska;
the
Messrs.
J.
Quinton,
S.
C.
Ruck and
factories,
These gentlemen,
V. H. Street.
their generous cooperation in extending the courtesies of their stations
by
and
vessels,
my stay pleasant as well

May and June were spent
couver Island,
of
at
Sechart, an old Indian
Although the weather was bad,
whenever a
fair
on the west coast of Van-
village site
Humpback
whales were plentiful, and

fog, the following
Humpbacks
floating breast-up
to find four or five
On
the end of the wharf.
such a day there was need for rapid work.
be done until the whales were drawn out of the water upon
the "slip," as the long inclined platform
called;
is
measurements and descriptions had
detailed
on Barclay Sound.
day broke the monotony of rain and
morning we were sure

Little could
as profitable.
rendered
The months
at
managers of the several
also to the
animal was denuded of
its
blubber covering.
to
then photographs,
be secured before the
The
ease and quickness
with which a large whale weighing, perhaps sixty or seventy tons, can
be handled by means of the steam winch

fifteen or
water,
is
remains of the blubber on the upper
little
within
almost incredible;
twenty minutes from the time the animal
is
taken from the

In order to
side.
determine the extent of individual variation in color and external characters,
each specimen was carefully described, a "standard"
set
of
measurements taken, and as much additional matter recorded as time

While the flesh was being stripped from
and circumstances permitted.

the bones, there
was possible
was opportunity
to obtain
many
for study of the fresh skeleton
and
it
facts relating to variations in the vertebral
column, pectoral limb, ribs and other parts.
many
Humpbacks
Later
of the bones
were
were measured and photographed.
Thirty
examined
at Sechart,
of an exceptionally line specimen,
including
its
and the skeleton
complete
set of
At the end of June,

the
station
located
in
baleen,
proceeded one hundred miles up the coast to
Kyuquot Sound, where Humpbacks, Sulphur-
The weather
bottoms and an occasional Finback were being taken.

enjoyed through the kindness of Mr.
to the
all
was secured.
conditons of the month of July were good, and the
were exceptional.
in
As the
result of
S.
facilities
C. Ruck, manager
for
study
of the station,
one day's hunting, the steamer towed
wharf two large Sulphurbottoms, one Finback and three
backs, a record catch which raised the total
number
to twenty-six
Humpwhales
for the week.
At
Kyuquol an opportunity offered
for
work upon
large
Sperm
HUMPBACK WHALE EMERGING FROM BENEATH THE STEAMER
The blowholes
or nostrils are open, since the animal
THE TAIL OF
A DIVING
1'3
is
HUMPBACK
drawing
in its breath.
THE WHALE HARPOON GUN, READY TO
FIRE.
THE GUN HARPOON IN THE AIR.

smoke and sparks of the
burning wadding and the back of the whale.
.Showing, besides harpoon and rope, the
25
discharge, hits of
AN EIGHTY-FOOT SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE ON THE SLIP
The animal
is
being drawn out of the water by means of a cable attached to
BREAST VIEW OF
LARGE SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE.

27
its tail.
PACIFIC COAST WHALERS.

Sperms are but
whale.
rarely taken at these shore stations,
delighted at the unexpected good fortune.

the slip early in the morning, and
plete set of
animal as
ample time was given
model
a basis for a life-sized
The Sperm whale
to lie
ceti,
head
which
is
was
to secure a
com-
Museum.
the
at
a strange-looking creature, the great square-
is
a size out of all proportion to the
body and giving
The whole upper
third
devoted to an "oil-tank" containing the valuable sperma-
lies in
a liquid state
and may he dipped out
after
an opening
Fifteen barrels of pure spermaceti were obtained
has been made.
the oil-tank in the head of this individual, and twenty-five barrels
were secured from the

oil,
a full description of the
prepared
the animal a peculiarly shapeless appearance.

of the
and
The whale was drawn upon
photographs and measurements, with
ended head having
29
The
surrounding the head.
fat
total
from
more
amount
of
including the spermaceti and that obtained from the meat, bone
and blubber, was ninety
barrels.
Finbacks were taken
at
such infrequent intervals
at
ancouver
Island, that I decided to go to the station at Tvee, Admiralty Island,
Alaska, where this species was said to be plentiful.

in
August,
Arriving there early
found that the reports had not been exaggerated, for Fin-
backs were being brought
in every day.
three weeks collecting a considerable
remained
amount
Tvee about
and
at
of valuable data,
receiving the most hospitable treatment.
At each of the
vessels,
stations,
studying and
some time was spent on board
students of the Cetacea have
with the camera.
the whaling
photographing the animals in the water.
The
made attempts
Few
to record their observations
discomforts of such work are many, and one
must be constantly on the
alert.
Nevertheless, the
stu< ly is
most
interest-
ing, for the momentary glimpses of phases of whale-life obtained while

the animals are above the water give fascinating hints of what may take
place below the surface.
The whaling
steamers which hunt from the shore stations are small
maximum
speed of ten or twelve knots per hour.
steel vessels,
having a
Mounted on
the bow, they carry a heavy cannon which shoots a harpoon
having an explosive head or point called the "bomb."
When
the
man
stationed in the "barrel" at the masthead sights a whale, the vessel
is
speed in pursuit, and stopped on the smooth patch of water

Then
called the "slick" which invariably follows the whale's dive.
sent at
full
begins a period of waiting until the animal re-appears.
If
the place has
30
been well judged, the whale may come to the surface almost under the
As the animal bursts into view, sending the spout" high
vessel's bow.
into the air, the captain swings the
gun about,
sights along the barrel
At times the
fires just as the dorsal fin appears above the water.
and
may
whale
rise actually
allowing
trips,
me
under the boat.
This happened on one of
to secure a picture of considerable interest,
my
showing
the nostrils or blowholes widely distended during the act of inspiration.
When
their
the whales were too far
movements with
mast-head.
of feeding.
away
for
good photographs,
watched
glasses from the bridge or the "barrel " at the
field
From the latter position on several occasions, I saw the act

The animals eat a small crustacean (a shrimp) about three
quarters of an inch in length, which at times floats at the surface of the
When
ocean.
the whale has taken in a mouthful of water containing
quantities of these minute animals,
mense under jaw
turns on
it
The
streams between the plates of whalebone.

flukes are thrust into the air
and even the
sometimes exposed, as the animal

I
while
was fortunate
it
"
diving.
home
in securing a
rolls
full
from side
fin
letting the
im-
and one lobe
is
to side.
photograph of a large Finback whale
Other pictures show both species
Thus many
of the
length of the body
was feeding, and of a Humpback which threw
of the water.
and
its side,
close over the upper, while the water spurts out in
itself entirely
in the acts of
interesting observations on
the
out
spouting
habits
and
strange animals were given indisputable record by
life" of these
the aid of the camera.
Roy
PORTION of the central Hall (Xo. 204) of the second
Museum
has been
fitted
up expressly
of subscribers to a special fund.
Room
are live animals
in
visitors.
The
The room
attendance
is
aquaria
under the
the
at
the features of the Children's
and growing plants, as well as
may
be handled by the juvenile
Mis. Agnes L. Roessler.
direct care of
Museum
during 1908 was
record attendance for one day being 63,256, on

International
persons from
Tuberculosis
November
30,
floor of tin-
for children, through the generosity
Among
hooks, pictures and specimens which
The
Andrews.
C.
Exhibition
1908, to
was
January
17,
1,043,562, the
December
visited
1909.
by
27,
1908.
753,954
ST.
PIERRE, MARTINIQUE.
Rue Victor Hugo, the main

ash and other debris.
ST.
\ iew looking
VIEW NORTHWARD FROM HOTEL WINDOW.
street of the city,
PIERRE, MARTINIQUE.
northward from the road
tion over the city.
which has Keen cleared of volcanic

is Mt. Pele.
May, 1908.
In the background
Mi.
Pele*
SOUTHERN PART OF THE CITY

to
in
Le Carbel showing growth of vegetaMay. L908.
the background,
MARTINIQUE EXPEDITION
ST.
READERS
Vincent
eruptions that
the
in
sent an
year famous
that
Museum
following year the
changes that had taken place
in
will
remember
expedition to Martinique and
beginning of the
19(52, directly after the
made
1908.
American Museum Journal
Museum
the
that
The
of
PIERRE AND MT. PELE IN
33
St.
series of
the annals of vulcanology.
in
sent a second expedition to observe the
the two volcanoes, particularly those
al
Mt. Pele, Martinique, through the extrusion of the greal "spine" that
surmounted its eruption cone for nearly a year. Five years passed;
the spine fell to pieces, entirely altering the form of the summit cone of
eruptions of debris entirely ceased
Mt. Pele;
while there had been none
at
the Soufriere of St.
vegetation was asserting
1903;
its
July,
in
1905,
al
Pele',
Vincent after March,
sway over the devastated
areas,
and
human occupation was advancing again toward the craters; hence it

was determined to send a third expedition to the region to bring observations
on the volcanoes up
Leaving
the
New York
Quebec Line,
to date.
April
this time
16,
1908, on the steamship
accompanied by
France, the capital of Martinique,

after this
we took
the ancient
little
my
wife,
Sunday, ten days

coasting steamer
"Guiana"
of
reached Fort de
later.
Two
"Diamant"
days
for
Le
south
Carbet, an important town on the leeward coast about two miles
of
the
most
Le Carbet occupies the site
of the mined city of St. Pierre.
important settlement of the aboriginal Carib inhabitants of the island,

and a shrine and cross within its borders mark the spot where Christopher Columbus
is
supposed
to
have
first
set foot
upon Martinique
in
June, 1502.
From Le
Carbet,
we made
the remainder of the journey by canoe,
belongings and
arriving at St. Pierre by ten o'clock with our various
the
Rue Victor
on
built
been
has
which
the little "hotel"
settling at
two guest
Hugo, the main street of old St. Pierre. This "hotel " boasts
where
store
a
harbors
rooms and a dining room of diminutive size, and
nevermalodorous salt cod fish and other viands are sold to passers-by;
one can stay several days very comfortably at the
makes convenient headquarters for excursions.
theless,
and
it
little
hostelry,
century
ruins of St. Pierre look like those of a place destroyed a
standing
were
that
walls
Many
ago, rather than only a few years since.
spring of 1903, have fallen,
the
in
visit,
second
my
of
occasion
the
on
The
34
and many
now
and buildings
streets
that
were plainly distinguishable then are

Earth has been
completely obliterated as to surface indications.
washed down abundantly from the denuded surrounding bluffs and

hill slopes, bringing grass and other seeds with it, and the whole city,
except for a few clearings, is covered with vegetation. The knotty bunch
characteristic of the
grass
Lesser Antilles
nourishing luxuriantly,
is
together with the castor-oil plant (Ricinus communis) and
strange to northern eyes.

lived through the terrible
of the city
struggling to recover from
is
many bushes
Here and there a mango or other tree that

eruption blasts and the consequent burning
its
injuries
and gives a
little
grate-
shade to the stray wanderer amid the ruins and

being pastured where once stood the cathedral, the hospital, the theatre,
the government buildings and the stores and residences of a wealthy city.
to the cattle that are
ful
The Rue
entire length
Victor
Hugo has been

to north
from south
cleared of ash and debris for
its
so too have been the streets connecting
Morne d'Orange and the southFond St. Denis and thence to Fort de France and with
the route to Morne Rouge and the rich sugar and other estates of the
northeastern parts of the island. The clearing of these streets was made
this old artery of travel
east,
with the road to
with that to
necessary to meet the requirements of the great agricultural district that
was
naturally tributary to St. Pierre and that
rum and
sugar,
now must
other produce by the old route.
ship out
To accommodate
its
this
between the region and Fort de France, a pier has

been built at Place Bertin near the hotel, and regular semi-weekly
steamboat service with Fort de France began in June. The Rue de
traffic
and the
travel
l'Hopital also has been cleared, giving access to the headquarters of the
police, established in the
Rue
massive ruins of the old bank building, and the
Hugo has been
Victor
cleared southward to give unobstructed
connection with the road to Le Carbet and beyond.
On May
Blanche
to
1, we embarked in a canoe for the mouth of the Riviere

camp in its gorge, down which came the first as well as all
the rest of the long series of incandescent dust-laden steam-clouds that
burst from the great crater and cone for

lishing
camp on
little
more than
three years.
twelve hundred feet above the sea,
turned
my
attention
neighboring fumaroles or steam vents that extended

a quarter of a mile or more toward the crater.
crater
Estab-
sand plain about two miles from the coast and
registered a temperature
of
581
degrees
in
The
first
to the
an irregular line
vents nearest the
Fahrenheit, while
.">()
ST.
PIERRE, MARTINIQUE
Looking south-southwest.
GENERAL VIEW OF RUINS
The prominent
MAY, 1908.
ruin in the foreground
part of the
is
military hospital.
ST. PIERRE,
MARTINIQUE.
RUE VICTOR HUGO, LOOKING SOUTHWARD.

35
MAY, 1908.
ST
PIERRE
MARTINIQUE
MT. PELE, MARTINIQUE.
The
line of knolls in
Claire.
RUINS OF THE THEATRE.
MAY. 1908.
THE WEST SIDE OF THE VOLCANO
the middle ground
The camp
site is
is
the
about 1200
37
IN
MAY, 1908.
fumarole area of the Riviere

feet
above the
sea.
MARTINIQUE EXPEDITION
39
yards from our tents were fumaroles that were just right for use in cook-
we employed one for the purpose. Our camp was a " dry " one,
we were four or five miles from the nearest source of Fresh water.
The western and southwestern sides of the mountain present a scene
utter desolation.
The sloping plain formed by the debris-filled gorge
ing and
since
of
of the Riviere
fragments of
sign of
life,
anywhere.
deeply by
Blanche
all sizes,
is
and angular rock-
thickly strewn with bowlders
with here and there a
little
not even a blade of grass or so
The surrounding
patch of sand
much
but not a
as an ant,
visible
is
were scored so often and so
hillsides
blasts from the crater that they too are barren of

As one goes away, however, from this zone of greatest
moss, grass and other vegetation gradually appear in protected
terrific
vegetation.
activity,
and otherwise favorable

tain
upon the other
spots, while
summit, and large vegetation
rapidly
is
making
its
moun-
sides of the
where the scoring did not take place the slopes are green
to the very
way back
into the
devastated area.
my work
Five days was enough for
mountain, and then we moved camp
on the southwest side of the
to the basin of the
Lac des Palmistes,
the old summit plateau of Mt. Pele, about 4,000 feet above the sea.
Here, in the midst of clouds and buffeted by the heavy trade winds,
set
to
up our
improve every moment while the summit might be
for the top of
The
we
tents for another stay of five days, with the idea of being able
Mt. Pele
is
free
from clouds,
densely veiled more than nine-tenths of the time.
recent eruption of the volcano
was remarkable partly through the
formation in the old crater of a vast new cone of solid rock (not
surmounted by
The new
a wonderful needle, or spine.
de"bris)
feature
was
formed by lava which welled up through the vent, but which was
such a viscous condition that
it
into the air instead of running
in
it came and therefore rose

Minor explosions blew away
solidified as
down
hill.
the southwest and northwest quarters of the top of this cone leaving the
At
great spine as a residue.
the point of this spine
The
was
its
maximum
brittle
through strains due to contraction.

fell
to pieces.
to sixty feet across,
valley between
it
now
and was
It
see the great
lying at the base of the
fell
1903,
rifted in every direction
could not maintain
One may
and the wall
the mountain top thus
May,
in
5304 feet above the level of the sea.
mass, however, was
and therefore
development
its
new cone
of the old crater.
position
fragments,
Nearly
away, and the present summit
fifty
in the spiral
!)00 feet of
is
4,444 feet
40
above sea
level, or
only sixteen feet higher than the old
Morne Lacroix
that once formed the highest part of the mountain, but which
was
largely
destroyed by the eruption.

It is
but
its
not a difficult matter

slope
is
fragments composing
hill,
now
to
climb the north side of the new cone,
37 to 40 degrees from the horizontal, so that the rock

are so loose that a slight jar starts
it
them down
rendering foothold uncertain and the advance of a party dangerous
to the lower
members
fissures within
them
my
of
electric
new
In the top of the
it.
which the temperature
is
high.
cone, there are great
In a branch of one of
pyrometer gave a reading of 515 degrees Celsius,

After a shower, steam issues abundantly
or 959 degrees Fahrenheit.
from the numerous fumaroles of the cone, but between times there
said to be
no cloud of vapor, and as
summer
out since the
of 1905.
far as
The
is
known no ash has been thrown
activity of the volcano
has been
gradually though intermittently decreasing since the great outburst of
August 30, 1902, which was the most severe of the whole
series,
and
there seems to be no present indication of another eruption.
Edmund Otis Hovey.

THE INDIANS OF CALIFORNIA.
THE
Department
of
Anthropology has arranged a new exhibit
North Amer-
in the series illustrating the chief culture types of
The
ica.
the Indians of California,
present exhibit, that of
makes the third of the series now in place, the other two, those
Eskimo and the Indians of the Plains, respectively, having been
The new
ously opened to the public.
exhibit
is to
Hall of North American Types (No. 102 of the
be found
Ground
of the
in the
previ-
West
Floor).
While the Indians of California are somewhat uniform
in their habits
and customs, they may nevertheless be divided into three groups: (1)
Those of central California, characteristic of the type and represented
in this exhibit
by the Maidu.
(2)
Several tribes in northern California,
represented in the exhibit by the Yurok.
These, while having most of
the characteristics peculiar to the Indians of California, have also cus-
toms and
habits
instance, the
borrowed
Yurok and
houses with gable roofs,
Washington.
(3)
from
Indian
tribes
farther
north.
For
several other northern tribes lived in rectangular

;i
Tribes
style
in
borrowed from the houses of Oregon and
the southern part of California, represented
MT. PELE*, MARTINIQUE.
SUMMIT OF NEW CONE LOOKING
S.
60 W.
on the siteof the Lacdes Palmistes, aboul 1,000 feel above tide. The
remains of Morne Lacroix are seen al therighl jusl above the tent. May, 1908.
The camp
is
MT
From
above the
THE SPINE OR OBELISK IN MARCH,

same spot as the picture above. The
PELE
practically the
sea, or
860
feet higher
1903.
.spine rose .5,304 feet
than the top of the present cone.
41
CALIFORNIA INDIANS
in this exhibit
making
the
These took over many
by the Mission Indians.
from the Pueblo and other Indians

of
pottery, an art
43
of the southwestern
practices
United States,
was unknown among other
that
fornian Indians, being an example of
Cali-
this.
While the above division can be made, we must understand that

the distinctions
are
not absolute;
three main culture types are
The
in
fact,
shown by
the
inter-relations
Shasta, represented in this exhibit, stand perhaps
of
mixed
the existence of
the
types.
midway between
the central and northern Californian types, emphasizing the fact that
no hard and
after all
fast classification is possible
where
occupy
tribes
adjacent geographical areas.
One
of the
most characteristic features of Californian Indian
the dependence upon vegetable food, the acorn in particular.
life is
Almost
every people, whatever the degree of culture, has some food article
which takes the place of bread and which

In California, a kind of bread
is
made
is
in reality the "staff of life."
The
of acorn meal.
various
stages of this acorn industry are illustrated by a series of small models

to
show the gathering
of hot water,
and
its
salmon are found,

fitted
up
of the acorn,
fishing
is
grinding,
its
its
leaching by means
In the northern part of California, where
drying.
an important industry.
to illustrate the native
methods
of catching
case
being
is
and treating
this
fish.
From
the artistic point of view, one of the most
concerning these Californian Indians

of baskets.
exhibit,
it
While basketry
is
is
fairly
prominent
their skill in the
well represented in the present
has been given special treatment in the hall above
second floor of the
Museum, where
facts
manufacture
will
this,
on the
be found a collection of baskets
from several parts of California as well as from other regions
in
North
America.
Dr. Hexry E. Cramptox has been appointed Curator
ment
of Invertebrate Zoology
in
the
Museum
to
fill
vacant by the resignation of Dr. William Morton Wheeler.

ton has published extensively and
is
now making
of the Depart-
made
Cramp-
the place
Dr.
researches in experi-
mental biology, under a grant provided by the Carnegie Institution.

He will retain an official connection with Columbia University, where
he has served as lecturer and tutor, instructor, adjunct professor and
professor.
44
SCHOOL CHILDREN AT THE TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION.
THE
two photographs on the opposite page show
children entering the north
and south entrances
Between January 4 and 15

received within
sand
its
school days)
(ten
doors six thousand children daily.
at a time, into the auditorium, they
lines of school
of the
it,
Museum
Ushered, a thou-
were given
tuberculosis and personal hygiene preventing
Museum.
the
facts concerning
and directions
for study
"When dismissed from the
of the International Tuberculosis Exhibition.
auditorium, giving place to a second set of a thousand, they were guided
through the exhibition, to watch the light

thirty-six seconds
that,
went out every two minutes
showing how often someone dies of tuberculosis
United States, to see dark, dirty rooms contrasted with

ones, to examine
amusing
to
many
light
inviting tents for out-of-door living
them because
it
in the
and clean
one very
allowed a person to sleep with his body in the
Then from the exhibition the

Group Halls and on to other parts of the
house and his head out of the window.

long lines
Museum.
work and
filed into
the Bird
There can be no doubt that the suspension

the unusual expedition, combined
impression received after reaching the

with
also
Museum, brought
unwonted importance not only the
many
of their school
with the serious force of the
matters of personal cleanliness and
*
*
work above
before them
social evil, tuberculosis,
home
but
sanitation.
The two
weeks' educative
the large ways in which the
beyond
its
more
specific
work
ticable for direct use in lesser
Museum
referred to illustrates one of
That the Museum
in science.
ways
also
is
is
Tests were
Douglas spruce was chosen
made
in
the
in the Forestry Hall,
and
examination of
five
after opportunity for
hundred North American woods.
prac-
continually demonstrated.
Recently inquiry came for a most resonant wood to be used

construction of violins.
and
serves the people above
Later another inquirer sought wood
absolutely non-resonant for use at the heart of a soundless typewriter.
His
tests in the Forestry
purpose.
Hall resulted in the choice of palmetto for his
Another instance concerns Peruvian
mummy
ably more than a thousand art students have visited the
cloths.
Museum
Probwithin
the past six years to copy patterns of these cloths or to study their coloring.
Many
of these students
have become successful designers, and
as a result numbers of our modern wall papers, rugs and other house-
PUBLIC SCHOOL CHILDREN APPROACHING THE NORTH AND SOUTH ENTRANCES OF

THE MUSEUM TO VISIT THE INTERNATIONAL TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION.
The average number was 6,000 per day
for
two weeks.
m:hs XOTES
47
furnishing goods show some sign of the color combinations and of the
fish,
bird and cat patterns peculiar to Peruvian
mummy
of such instances of direct influence on the art
country might be multiplied
Reports
cloth.
and industries
of the
sometimes the need entailing
indefinitely,
information about precious corals, or some tree advisable for planting

in a
an
commercial venture, or sometimes having
artist's
and unusual models
and
for pottery
do with materials
Museum
Waters
is
ethnological
of
comprises about
collection
and
his
and wood.
knowledge
Mr. Waters
of the people
and
from
it
represents the
acquainted with iron and
The
following
life
its
their
house-
of stone,
on the island,
customs enabled him

is
of the Fijians before they
to
bring
enhanced by
had become
uses.
members have been
elected since the last issue of the
Hugh Hill,
Jane X. Morgan
Journal: Life Members, Messrs.
Morgan,
J. S.
Jr.,
and
Morgan
Morgan, Misses
Pierpont Morgan, Jr., and Davies Coxe; Annual MemMessrs. A. Perry Osborn, A. F. Troescher, A. G. Vetter,
Henry
S.
Mmes.
J.
bers,
made
lived for forty years
The
Fiji.
L800 specimens, including
together this remarkable collection, the value of which

the fact that
John William
the
objects
hold utensils and implements of war and the chase,

turtle shell
for
or quaint
NOTES.
fortunate in having secured
collection
fish
glass.
MUSEUM NEWS
THE
to
sketch of a Sioux maiden, design of grotesque
and
F. T.
and
Trainor, Jacob Olesheimer, Wm. Edmund Curtis, James

W. Greene, R. J. Schaefer, George E. Chatillon, E. C. Klipstein,
B. G. Meyer, A. C. Bechstein, Washington L. Cooper, Frederick
A. Libbey, Charles H. Weigle, C. B. Isham, Edward H. FloydJones, Jesse Lantz and Alanson P. Lathrop, Dr. Charles K.
Briddon, General Horace Porter, Misses Louise D. van Bei ren
P.
S.
and E. Mabel Clark and Mrs. James A. Rumrill.

Dr. Frank E. Lutz has been appointed an assistant curator in the
Museum. Dr. Lutz lias been an investigator in the Carnegie Institution at Cold Spring Harbor and has published a score or more of
papers on the general subjects of Inheritance and Variation.
48
Mr.
spiders,
of
Alexander Petrunkevitch, an
has become
officially
authority
connected with the
Museum
American
on
in the capacity
This appointment was made by
Honorary Curator of Arachnida.
the Board of Trustees in appreciation of the invaluable service which
Mr. Petrunkevitch has rendered the
institution for several years
through
correspondence, exchange and the general enrichment of the collections.
MEMBERS' COURSE.
The second
members
course of lectures to
friends will begin February 25
Natural Resources.
and
Details will be
will
of the
Museum and
their
be devoted to the Conservation of
announced
in a special circular.
LEGAL HOLIDAY COURSE.

Washington's Birthday, February 22, 1909, at 3.15 o'clock
No
p.
M.
tickets required.
"Some
of the
Food and Game Fishes
of the Eastern
Habits and Methods of Capture."
United States.
By Roy W. Miner.
Fully illustrated with stereopticon views.
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY COURSE.

Jesup Lectures.
Given in cooperation with Columbia University.
Wednesday, February 3, at 8:15 o'clock p. M.
The last of a course of

Maclaurin of Columbia
"Some
relations
ten lectures on light
by Professor Richard C.
University.
between
light
and
electricity."
A COURSE IX BIOLOGY.
Arranged by the Biology Departments of the Normal College and the
Illustrated with stereopticon views.
of Manhattan.
High Schools
LECTURES
Thursday afternoons
January
at
49
3:30 o'clock.
"American Forests and Their Uses."
14.
By
EOR< E
i
II
Si i:ki
woon.
"Our
February
18.
March
18. "Public Health."
April
15.
By Dr. Hermox C. Bumpus.

By Dr. Thomas M. Darlington.
of Animals."
By Dr. Henry E.
Atlantic Fisheries."
"Natural
History
Crampton.
DARWIN MEMORIAL CELEBRATION.

Held
in
cooperation with the
New York Academy
Friday, February 12, 3:30 o'clock
Addresses
will
p.
of Sciences.
m.
be delivered as follows:
Presentation to the
Finney Cox, President
Museum
of the
Darwin by Charles
of a bronze bust of
Academy.
Acceptance on behalf of the Trustees of the
Museum by Henry
Fair-
Museum.
"Darwin and Geology," by Johx James Stevenson.
"Darwin and Botany," by Nathaxiel Lord Britton.
"Darwin and Zoology," by Hermox Carey Bumpus.
field Osborx, President
of the
PEOPLE'S COURSE.
Givex
in cooperation with the City
Department
of Education.
Illus-
trated with stereopticon views.
Tuesday evenings
February
2.
February
9.
February
16.
February
23.
at 8 o'clock.
Ian C. Hannah, "Japan's Transformation."

Ian C. Hannah, "America as an Asiatic Power."
Mrs. Lucia Ames Mead, "World Organization."
Isya Joseph, Ph.D., "Mohammed and Mohammedanism."
(Illustrated with costumes.)
Saturday evenings
February
6.
February
13.
February
20.
February
27.
at
8 o'clock.
H. A. Smith, "National Forest Policy."

Overton W. Price, "Conservation Natural Resources."
Professor H. E. Gregory, "The Life History of a Lake."
Cyrus C. Adams, "Earthquakes."
of
Children are admitted to these lectures only on presentation of
Members'
tickets.
Museum
.50

On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences:
First
Mondays, Section
of
Geology and Mineralogy.

On Tuesday
The Linnsean
Society of
New
York, The
New York
Entomological

On Friday evenings, as announced:
The New York Microscopical Society.
The programmes

sent to the
members
making request
New York Academy

Members
of Sciences
of the
and
on
Museum

Edmund
Otis Hovey, Editor.
Fhank M. Chapman,
Louis P. Gratacap,
William K. Gregory,
Advisory Board,

subscription to the Journal is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of
the Museum.
Subscriptions should be addressed id The American Museum Journal. 30 Boylston St., Cambridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City.
Entered as second-ela-- matter January
l',
1907,
Act of Congress, July
at
16,
the l'ost-iiflice
189 i.
at
Boston, Mass.
THE MEMORIAL BUST OF CHARLES DARWIN.

Presented by the
New York Academy
of Sciences,
February
L2,
L909.

Vol.
IX
MARCH,
No. 3
L909
THE DARWIN CELEBRATION.
THE
one hundredth anniversary of the birth of Charles Robert

and the fiftieth anniversary of the publication of
Darwin
"The
Academy
Origin of Species" were celebrated
of Sciences
on February twelfth
The
Natural History.
of a bronze bust of
occasion was
at the
by the
American
New York
Museum of
made memorable by the unveiling

gift to the Museum; also by
the Museum as "The Darwin Hall
Darwin, the Academy's
the dedication of the Synoptic Hall of
of Invertebrate Zoology," with the unveiling of bronze tablets thus in-
The
scribed at either side of the entrance from the Hall of Forestry.
bust was presented by the Academy's president, Charles Finney Cox,
and was accepted on behalf
Henry
The
by
bust
Museum
by President
pronounced by those who knew Darwin personally, and
is
his sons in
of the trustees of the
Osborn.
Fairfield
England, who have seen photographs
of the clay
model,
the best portrait in the round of the great naturalist ever made.
It is
work of William Couper, sculptured from photographs taken when

Darwin was fifty years old, at the time of the publication of "The Origin
of Species."
President Osborn 's acceptance of the bust, as a valuable
work of art and as an expression of appreciation by the New York
Academy of both the technical and the directly educational work of the
Museum, gives this impressive likeness of Darwin permanent place in
Here it will stand to testify
the Darwin Hall of Invertebrate Zoology.
to Charles Darwin's method of scientific study, namely, a humble and
the
direct
approach
thinking.
The
to nature, in
self-reliance
and with independence
of
speakers of the afternoon, representing Geology, Botany
and Zoology, and each claiming Darwin
as the inspiration to freedom of
thought in the given science, were Professors John James Stevenson,

Nathaniel Lord Britton and
Hermon Carey Bumpus.
But a few years ago, even
to consider the question of evolution
was
held to be irrational and immoral, not only by the world at large, but also
by the
intellectual world, with the exception of a small
53
body
of scientists.
THE AM ERIC AX MUSEUM JOURNAL
54
The change
in 1859,
has come since the appearance of
and
"The
Origin of Species"
outside of the scientific centers at Philadelphia,
"Washington,
New Haven and New
but the
has been cumulative, and to-day thinkers
effect
the fact of evolution.
In the
first
York,
it
Boston,
has seemed to come slowly;
ten years after 1859,
in all lines
many
accept
of the older
Even Agassiz remained
scientists ignored or fought the doctrine bitterly.
FRONT VIEW OF DARWIN BUST
on the side of the creation of each species as we find

ever,
"The
who knew Darwin
personally and
who had
it.
Asa
published
ray,
how-
review of
Origin of Species" before a copy reached America, stood firmly
not only for the theory of evolution,

signifies, the
lnt
also for that which
theory of Natural Selection as the
Darwinism
working process
of evolu-
THE DARWIN CELEBRATION
:,:,
tion.
He inspired the younger men in the Boston scientific center,
Shaler, Yen-ill, Packard, Morse, Hyatt, Allen and Scudder, and through
their influence enthusiasm for Darwinism grew until a climax was
reached
Since that date every biological worker in the country

1876.
has found his research an item to strengthen belief in evolution, and
in
PROFILE VIEW OF DARWIN BUST.
also,
it
is
true, often to
expose some weakness or
mend some
flaw in the
doctrine of Natural Selection.
Darwin, however, did not consider

plete.
In
his
established in
day the general theory
many
scientist-,'
such as Lamarck and Cuvier.
his
work
comwas already well

the work of anatomists
faultless, final or
of evolution
minds, due to
Darwin marshalled
the facts that the
56
world could then give, to formulate clearly and boldly a possible explanation of the
From
method by which evolution had produced existing life forms.

numbers due to the normal rate of repro-
the geometric increase in
duction of plants and animals, there resulted a struggle for existence, a
which not only brought
three-fold struggle (1) with the environment,
the animal the ordinary exigencies of
but also perhaps presented
life,
suddenly wholly new problems due to some geological change during
members
the earth's history, (2) with
homes and food and

birth, some were less
the
next generation,
for
with direct enemies.
killed
the best fitted for
unchanged
same
Since
many
new
in
life
and,
if
a given region became the parents of
variety or species, that
work done
Vries, proves
that species
remained
brought about a better
generations, heredity
to
is,
the important
is
and
a race different from
Darwinism, new species come
about through slow, minute and cumulative

strongest pieces of
they died
fitted survived.
the environmental conditions
Thus, according
the ancestral one.
forms vary at
all
by enemies; those better
adapted race, a "nature selected" race, and, what

contested point, a
species in search of
well fitted for the struggle than others;
were
for lack of food or
Thus
(3)
of the
One of the
Hugo de
changes.
Darwin's time, that of
since
may come
into existence abruptly also,
by
large changes or "mutations," de Vries holding that the mutation theory
supplements Natural Selection but does not supplant
Whether, however, Darwinism
it.
lives in the future, or fails
under the
army of working scientists and in the light of a

vast, aggregation of new facts, Darwin's position of eminence cannot be
assailed.
He stands for supreme service to mankind in that he forced
critical scrutiny of the
into the world of organized
practically
all
knowledge love
He was
slavery to tradition.
was new ground.
He was
botany, zoology, geology, has grown until
man
problem
is
is
come
mental vision?
more
difficult
known
it
facts in the various
seems that no one mind can
The
one of them.
is
that to-day
field of that
extremely limited, though
Will there
far
his
all
chosen problem, and often the
details of even
working on
of
Since his time each of these branches,
branches of natural science.
every
and abhorrence
a "naturalist," one' of the few
deserving the name, with masterly grasp of
comprehend the
of truth
a great seer in a scientific world where
it
result
involves weighty principles.
second Darwin, again
to
grasp
all
nature
in
clear
His task would be the same as was Darwin's, though
because of the larger body of knowledge,
to
accept
N EW
and organize
ing his
own
many
GRO UPS
accumulated information, while
all
"The
would
forced upon him
lie
who
all
same time holdThe work of
at the
theories.
banish
to the front or
tangled theories of the present, and
that there
own
opinions and formulating his
new Darwin would marshal]
the
of
1IABI T. IT
so clearly
to oblivion the
and convincingly
a repetition of
reads
Origin of Species," the conviction that, after
the
efi'eet
the task
all,
was
an easy one, for there could he no other conclusion.
An important
feature of the celebration
and groups
selected specimens
is
the special exhibition in
and the new Darwin Hall comprising carefully
the Hail of Forestry
specimens bearing upon the Darwinian
of
theory of Evolution through Natural Selection; also a valuable collection of
Darwiniana consisting
Darwin, as well as
The
exhibition
March
is
of letters, writings
a series of
open
and
portraits of Charles
photographs of Darwin's contemporaries.

public anil
free to the
remain
will
THE
is
unique
Rock Group
tion, the series
the Habitat
Museum
in
Groups
exhibition.
of the Gulf of St.
Begun
as to locality, flawlessly as to
in
1898 with the
of Ornithology,
Museum's
of
from
sixty to
then so to blend
and
inval-
taxidermists and artists.

in imitating,
accurately
workmanship, the snow or water, rocks

one hundred sixty square
the real
feet of a
given
foreground with a painted background
that, quite as in nature, the eye passes

at
the
has entailed a large amount of travel and study on the
Conceive the ingenuity and labor involved
and vegetation
in
North American Birds
of
Lawrence, and now nearing comple-
Mr. Frank M. Chapman, Curator
uable assistance on the part of the
region;
till
BIRDS.
high degree of realism and artistic effect achieved
installation of
part of
place
12.
NEW HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN
Bird
in
from the flowers and birds near
hand, to meadows that stretch to the horizon or to mountains and sky.
Group Hall has been previously opened to

was opened formally to Members of the
Museum on February 26 to mark the completion of six new groups,
T'ne east side of the Bird
the public.
The
demonstration
west
of
side
the
method
of construction
Cuthbert Rookery Group, only partly finished
at
being given by the

that time.
On
following day the gallery was thrown open to the general public.
the
l
r
pq
NE W
To
view the scene of the
a small coral
first
islet is of
from many migrating
War
from the
of the
due
o'
Two
birds.
War
light
water of
lies in
expanse of water, receives
species, the
numbers
shallow banks.
its
the line of migration,
in
Booby and
the
addition
in
it
Man
o'
and prickly pear cactus
have had no opportunity
in part to the fact that they
and
calls
March, the Boobies on the
birds in the sea grape
Boobies are particularly tame when on the nests.
islet.
man, but
it
in a large
bird, nest there in large
Man
new groups we must make the

Cay Verde. This is
there search ont
peculiar interest since
being the only landing place
ground, the
61
with no fresh water, and with the dark blue of great
islet
sea depths sharply separated
The
of these
Bahamas and
long journey to the
GROUPS
LIBIT. IT
This
is
to learn fear of
probably results from the strength of their
parental instinct, which so controls their fear that they do not leave their
nests
when an intruder walks among them and makes intimate acquain-
tance with family after family.
The male Man
o'
War
bird
ornamented with
is
of vivid red, which, inflated like a toy balloon,
a large throat-pouch
makes
the bird conspicu-
ous whatever
its
vantageous
the struggle for existence, furnishes an illustration for
in
This ornamentation, actually disad-
environment.
Darwin's Sexual Selection theory.

of ornamentation
among animals
To-day,
recognize the matter
all
as one of the most difficult of biological
problems, whether tentatively accounting for
on
it
this
theory of the
female's choice of the most attractive, or as a direct physiological and

structural result of the male's excessive energy, or
we move
If
to the
by
yet other theories.
second of the new groups, we are transported
thousands of miles across the continent and north to the California-
Oregon boundary
tains
many
Shasta
will
in the distance.
where the shallow water
and
is
of
surrounded by
Klamath Lake con-
treeless hills
much
a picturesque place, but
It is
with Mt.
of the region
be drained by a government reclamation project and converted into
orchards and
rants
fields of alfalfa.
The Klamath Lake group shows Cormo-
and Gulls, also Caspian Terns; but
Pelicans,
immense
There are
parent's throat.
It will
interest centers in the
is
illustrating its
One
Unlike
and
amusing method
in the
foreground
of fishing
down
its
adult shows the bill-knob of the nuptial season.
be a matter of regret
extinction.
White
birds with wing expanse of from eight to nine feet.
interesting studies of flying Pelicans,
one young bird
to
line,
islands of rushes
if
many
the
demands
birds,
to
of civilization
which advance
push
in
this bird
civilization
62
means merely more food and fewer enemies,

for survival;
it
can adapt
itself
only
the Pelican
is
too specialized
and an abundance of
government reservations
to insular life
must be saved through the creation of

An important step toward the protection of western
for the purpose.
water-fowl was taken by President Roosevelt in August, 1908, when he
It
fish.
set aside the
The
Lower Klamath Lake and Lake Malheur Reservations.
third
group carries us
Canadian Rockies
at
Ptarmigan
In the foreground are White-tailed Ptarmigans in mixed white
Lakes.
and brown plumage,
for
and the
plumage
birds' white
coat.
to the
it is
the height of the Alpine Spring (July 15)

of
Winter
nest of five spotted eggs
is set
giving place to the
is
among gray
summer
rocks and lichens,
only a few feet from the border of an unmelted snowfield, yet surrounded
by the
star-like flowers of
spirited attitudes.
life is
enhanced by what
and blue water
in
bloom and by anemones
is
to
be seen on
lifting the eyes
from the ground,
snow-covered mountain peaks and, far below, the
circle of austere
ice
Dryas, by heather
One Ptarmigan is shown with six downy chicks in

The apparent fragility but real endurance of this
two inches across.
of
The Ptarmigan
an opening
is
lake.
a boreal type.
It is
found as far south as
New
Mexico, but only at high altitudes, the species possibly having survived
in these Arctic- Alpine regions
when
striking- cases of coloration like the
an
left
stranded there by the retreating
Ptarmigans not only present one of the most
ice of the Glacial Period.
instance of gradation of color
environment of the season, nor onlv
from above downward
to counteract the
shadow gradation from below upward and produce the

stantiality,
instinct to
The
but they also have correlated with
remain motionless
in the face of the
effect of
unsub-
this color protection, the
enemy.
fourth group, showing the Sage Grouse, keeps us in the West,
descending from Alpine regions to the high sage-brush plains of

ming.
The Sage Grouse
is
the largest of North
with the exception of the Wild Turkey.
Wyo-
American game birds
The group
illustrates
some
of
the remarkable performances of the birds at the mating season.
The remaining two

the Wild Goose,
at
show
groups, representing the

the rolling treeless
Crane Lake, Saskatchewan.
such as always prove a lure

is
swimming
Western Grebe and
Western Canada,
plains of
The Grebe group
illustrates instincts
afield to the bird student.
One parent bird

warm cradle
in stately fashion, while, peeping from the
between her back and wings, four eager and contented voting birds are
\T, &
UJ
GREBES (UPPER FIGURE) AND WILD GOOSE (LOWER FIGURE) ON CRANE LAKE,
SASKATCHEWAN.
Backgrounds by Hobarl Nichols.
Birds by Herbert Lane.
ANNUAL MEETING OF THE TRUSTEES

taking a
sail
with her; another parent bird
preparatory to leaving
is
65
covering her nest of eggs
everywhere the birds swim with their long
it;
necks erect so that the perpendicular lines of black and white resemble
The Western Grebe is
the surrounding reeds an< reflections.

1
mercilessly by
in
market
in
plume hunters,
slaughtered
the birds' snow-white breasts appearing
capes and muffs and on hats.
The Museum acknowledges

Groups
of Bird Habitat
large indebtedness for this series
its
to the generosity of several of its
members, but
Mr. John L. Cadwalader and
particularly to the following:
to
Mrs.
Morris K. Jesup, Mrs. Philip Schuyler, Mrs. John B. Trevor, Mrs.
Robert Winthrop, Mr. F. Augustus Schermerhorn, Mr. H. B. Hollins,
Mr. Henry Clay Pierce, Mr. Henry W. Poor, Mr. Charles Lanier and
Mr. Courtenav Brandreth.
THE ANNUAL MEETING OF THE TRUSTEES.
AT
the
Annual Meeting
Pierpoxt Morgan,
Museum,
President;
Cleveland H. Dodge,
Hampdex Robb, Secretary, and Charles
First Vice-President;
Second Vice-President;
Laxier, Treasurer.
of Trustees of the
following officers were elected
S, the
Hexry Fairfield Osborx,
for the ensuing year:

J.
Board
of the
Monday, February
held on
J.
The
following abstract of the president's annual
report will be of interest to the
Members.
In point of growth the past year has been the most notable in the
Partly aided by the Jesup bequest, the total
history of the institution.
expenditures were 8275,419, or 825,000 more than the previous year.
Of
this the city contributed
In the past eight years the

its
8150,930.62 and the
Museum
explorations and collections.
Museum
$115,488.38.
has expended directly $932,008 on
The
estimated total value of the col-
by exploration, by purchase and by

more than 82,000,000. For every dollar which
lections secured during this period

gift to the
Museum
is
has been expended by the
city,
more than
a dollar has been
added
to the
enlargement of the collections.
The
present
President Jesup,
growth
endowment fund, including

is
of the city
education, an
82,048,156.01.
To
and the demands
endowment fund
it
the bequest of the late
keep pace with the very rapid

is
making
of 85,000,000
is
for public scientific
needed.
In even*
66
and commerce and the
part of the world the advance of agriculture
spread of
fire
arms
is
rendering more scarce the objects of natural history
of all kinds, including the
deemed
parts of the world, while
works
works
of the primitive races of
important to push the explorations of the
vitally
and
of nature
it is still
of primitive
men.
It is
Museum
in all
possible to secure these fast vanishing
man.
During the year 1908 and
present time the
Museum's
and the shores
of Beaufort Sea, to Alaska,
at the
explorations extend to the Mackenzie River
Vancouver, Alberta and
Saskatchewan, the west coast of Hudson Bay and western Labrador;

in the
United States parties have been spread
in
Wyoming, Montana,
Idaho, North Dakota, Nebraska, Colorado and Florida, also in Central
America, and
Corea;
in the south to
among
Bahama
Nicaragua, the West Indies and
working
in Asia special agents are
Islands;
in
Kashmir, China and
Museum is working in the

New Zealand, the South Shet-
the islands of the Pacific the
Philippines, the
Solomon
Islands, Tahiti,
land Islands and Kerguelen Island.
Popular education has been given a stronger impulse than ever
The Museum was open free to the public every clay of the year
and on 179 evenings. The gross attendance last year was 1,043,562, in
before.
large part
due
to the exceptional interest in the International
The
culosis Exhibition.
Tuber-
attendance at public afternoon and evening
The number of children visiting the

Museum in lecture classes was 10,325. The number of children who
were especially guided through the Tuberculosis Exhibition and who
lectures reached a total of 82,718.
listened to lectures
41,627.
on simple means of prevention of
These children came from
York and from many

city 575,801 children
all
and
distant towns
this disease
the high schools of Greater

cities.
was
New
In the schools of the
were reached by the system of the circulating nature
study collections.
During the coming year the principal new exhibitions which

developed are,
in particular, the Children's
the Blind, the Philippine Exhibition
by King Leopold
of Belgium.
outside of that which
As a
to
result of the
make a
isms
is
to
The
be seen
and the
last is the
in the
be
most complete collection
Congo Museum near
Brussels.
Tuberculosis Exhibition immediate steps will be taken
special exhibition of the life
in relation to
will
Museum, the Museum for

Congo Exhibition presented
health
and
disease.
and habits
of the smaller organ-
S TEFAXSSOX-.
XDERSOX ARC TIC EXPEDI TIOX
67
THE STEFANSSON-ANDERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITION.

February, a welcome
LATE
Yihljalmi Stefansson, who, together
letter
in
was
by the
sent
Museum
last
was received from Mr.
M. Anderson,
make ethnological,
with Dr. R.
summer
to
geograpical and biological studies along the arctic coast of North America
in the vicinity of the
mouth
Mackenzie River.
Mr. Stefansson
"Cape Hai.kett, Alaska,
Sept. 25th, l'JOS.
of the
writes as follows:
"On my way
east along the coast I
have just come upon
("apt.
William
Mogg's vessel, the "Olga," frozen in the ice off shore at Halkett. [Long.
152 W.] The captain will abandon his ship next Tuesday.
it is at our camp on shore and I am at
"I have not my diary with me
so I cannot give exact
Capt. Mogg's ship three miles off shore in the ice
We had head
dates, but Ave left Point Barrow about August 29th or 30th.
winds and foggy weather and finally froze in [at] Smith Bay September 0th
very bad luck; some years boating is good till October 1st or after. We
could do nothing but prepare safe caches on shore for our stuff until the ice
was strong enough for sled travel September 18th, when we started east.
We soon came to weaker ice, however, and had to delay and go slowly, so
we are only this far by now, but hope for better traveling.
"Dr. Anderson I suppose to be safe either at Barter Island or inland
from there, looking for deer and mountain sheep. I hope we shall be down
All we shall bring, however, is tobacco
to him in some 10 days from now.
and matches, for we had only four dogs with us, and succeeded in making
If we fail in hunting and fishing
only an indifferent sled out of driftwood.
retreat upon our
some of us at least
to the eastward we shall probably
cache in Smith's Bay and be able to turn a penny trapping while we eat up
the flour, etc.
for it is an excellent fox country, though there are no
*****
people, because there are no food animals.
"I expect I shall get to Herschel Island in time to write you by the police
and you should get the letter about as soon as this one, while I should
mail,
be able to give in
it
more information
one of our whaleboats

that
we can
is
as to ourselves.
Seeing, however, that
frozen in so far west, I hope,
get together a
good
collection
among
other things,
perhaps several hundred
skulls
of bones from the ancient graveyards along the sandspit between Point
Tangent and Point Barrow. I saw over a hundred (on top the ground)
walk through one of them when we were ashore in a calm coming east.
shall also almost certainly be able to do some good digging on the island
in a
We
just
68
Mouth from which
east of the Colville
I last
*****
year got a few specimens for
As to getting to Prince Albert Land

or Coronation Gulf, I think there is no reasonable doubt of it for next year
"barring accidents" and such unparalleled hard luck as everybody has
Peabody Museum,
the
had up here
this year.
"Near Point Tangent

them to take 27 sacks of
Mogg
Capt.
tells
me
and some other
stuff for
a map. which should enable
of the Colville
group
this
That
far.
nearer the Colville the better.
us, for the
"I met the other day an Eskimo who used to

I got
got
she probably did not get within some 60 miles of Barter
be well enough for
him
and
Dr. Anderson, but
certainly not farther than Flaxman and probably not so
Island
will
a trading schooner passed us going east

flour
winter
so
me
From
live in the Colville.
to locate at least three families
the Colville plans are
all
right, so
except their expensiveness, as previously confessed from Point Barrow.

% * * # *"
far,
RECENT PURCHASES OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES.
THE
Department
Vertebrate Palaeontology has recently
of
lector, a
number of important
fossils.
pur-
known
chased from Mr. Charles H. Sternberg, the well

Chief of these
is
col-
unique
specimen
a "mummied" Dinosaur, as President Osborn has aptly called
It is
a nearly complete skeleton of the Trachodon or Duck-billed
it.
Dinosaur,
in
which not only the bones but also the greater part of the
skin of the head,
body and limbs
is
preserved intact.
As found
in
a soft
sandstone stratum near Lance Creek, Wyoming, the skeleton lay on

its
back, the head turned to one side, the fore limbs stretched out, the
Over head, neck and limbs

down tight upon the bones and
hind limbs doubled up close to the body.

the thin curtain of skin, shrunk
lies
sunken
At
in over
first
most
of the
body cavity below the
ribs.
glance, the skin seems to have irregular rows of small spots
over the surface, the spots being about the size of a half dollar or
On
closer examination, each spot
little
polygonal plates,
smaller plates
filling
like
is
seen to be
the interspaces between the spots.
The
smooth or hairy skin

dinosaur skin
is
of
of a
the pieces of a mosaic, with
overlapping scales such as cover most modern

the
made up
mammals
sui generis,
reptiles,
less.
number
of
innumerable
There are no
nor anything like
or the feathered skin of birds.
completely unlike that of any modern
RECENT PURCHASES OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES

A
animal.
part of the
tail
same
of the
this skeleton,
now on exhibition in the

much like that of
species,
Dinosaur Hall, shows a considerable area
69
of skin,
but with larger plates and no distinct pattern of spots.
Traces of the skin are preserved in several other kinds of extinct reptiles,
found that compares with
but nothing has been
this
in
perfect
its
preservation.
To
appearances, the animal must have died on some dry, sandy
all
spot exposed to the sun, so that the carcass dried and shrank to a natural
mummy.
from a
Then
it
must have been suddenly buried by a Hood of sand
freshet, so rapidly
and deeply that the skin had no chance
and decay, but was preserved and
soften
petrified
with
This occurred three million years ago, on a moderate estimate
We
time.
think of the
as being of
old,
mummies
of Egypt, three or four
respectable antiquity.
mammoths which have been found

and Alaska, and
Siberia
their
of geologic
thousand years
more venerable are
Still
to
the bones.
the
buried in the frozen tundras of
outward appearance thus preserved
to
our
But even the mammoths, tens of thousands of years old though
day.
they be, are mere creatures of yesterday, modern upstarts, compared
with the hoary antiquity of this dinosaur

It will
of this
mummy.
be a matter of several months' work
complete the preparation
to
specimen for public exhibition, but, when finished,
it
will
do more
than any mere skeleton or pictured restoration to impress upon us the

reality of the ancient
Two
reptiles
world of the Dinosaurs.
other specimens purchased from Mr. Sternberg are marine
from the Kansas chalk beds, a
which the Trachodon was found.
older than the formation in
little
One
is
turtle To.vochelys, the other a fine skull of the
lizard Glidastes.
There are
a skeleton of the marine
Mosasaurian or swimming
two specimens
also
of comparatively recent
geological age, one a fine skull of the extinct long-horned bison, six feet
from
tip to tip of the horns,
and a lower jaw
both from the Pleistocene of Kansas.
Miocene beds
of
Kansas and the
of the Imperial
Two
huge
Mammoth,
tortoises
from the
skull of a small rodent related to the
beaver, but of burrowing habit, are likewise included in the collection.
Mr. Sternberg
is
a genuine enthusiast in searching for these memorials
of the former history of the world

to himself
we
than to the American
live in,
Museum
and
it is
a satisfaction
to see these fine
no
less
specimens
placed where they will be seen and appreciated by thousands of visitors
each year.
He has already contributed to our collection some

many fossils of much scientific interest.
specimens and
notable
M.
70
MUSEUM NEWS
THE
NOTES.
members have been elected since the last issue of

Mr. W. K. Vanderbilt; Life Members,
Messrs. Norman B. Ream, John S. Kennedy, Alexander
Walker and John J. Williams and Mrs. E. A. Slaven; Annual
Members, Messrs. Fitz Roy Carrington, Edwin Parsons, Percy
R. Pyne, 2d, Richard Sutro, D. S. Ramsay, F. S. Smithers, Alfred
G. Vanderbilt, George Hamilton Dean, William T. Hilles,
Charles E, Seitz, A. H. Wray, Adolph Riesenberg, L. William
Horr, James I. Barr, William B. Hornblower and Charles E.
Parsons, Doctors Hermann M. Biggs and Edgar S. Barney, Hon.
Hugh J. Grant and Mmes. C. C. Auchincloss, Thomas Kirkpatrick,
Helen C. Robbins and J. A. Vanderpoel.
following
the Journal: Patron,
The Museum
States
War
preparing a Philippine Exhibit for the United
is
Department.
It is
intended to cover the ethnology of the
Islands and also to give especial attention to Philippine agricultural and

industrial conditions since 1898, the date of
exhibit will
where
it is
to
be
set
up
at the
Museum and
American occupation.
The
then forwarded to Seattle,
be displayed at the Alaska-Yukon-Pacific Exposition.
Professor Aaron L. Treadwell,
of Vassar College,
has been
appointed Honorary Curator of Annulates.
SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS IN
THEXXIV
scientific publications of the
Museum
in
1908.
190S comprised Volume
and Volume XXV, Part I, of the Bulletin Volume X,

Part II, and Volume XIV, Part II, of the Memoirs and Volume I,
Parts IV, V and VI and Volume II, Part
of the new series of Anthropological Papers.
1
The
articles
contained
many
character, hut
of
in
these various publications are technical
them have general
their titles arc given in the following
of the activity of the
natural science.
volume,
may
The
Museum
stall'
articles are
list.
in
as well as scientific interest,
They
research
in
and
indicate in part, the scope

in
several departments of
published separately and, like the complete
be obtained from the librarian except as indicated.
S(
'IEN TIl-K
'
PUBLICA TIOXS
71
THE BULLETIN, Volume XXIV.

(Thirty-three plates and
Art.
1(17
text
figures.)
A List of the Genera and Subgenera of North American Birds,
I.
PAGE
with their Types, According to Article 30 of the International
Art.
II.
Code
of Zoological
By
Nomenclature.
J.
A.
Allen
Notes and Observations on Carboniferous Fossils and Semifossil Shells,
Brought
Home by Members of the Peary ExBy R. P. Whitfield. (Plates
pedition of 1905-1906.
51
I-IV.)
Fossil Insects from Florissant, Colorado. By T. D. A.

Cockerell. (Plate V.)
59
Art. IV. The Fossil Flora of Florissant, Colorado. By T. D. A.
Cockerell. (Plates VI-X.)
71
Art. V. Pennant's Indian Zoology." By
Ill
A. Allen
Art. VI. The Ants of Porto Rico and the Virgin Islands. By William
Morton Wheeler. (Plates XI-XII.)
.117
159
Art. VII. The Ants of Jamaica. By William Morton Wheeler
Art. VIII. Ants from Moorea, Society Islands. By William Morton
Wheeler
165
Art. IX. Ants from the Azores. By William Morton Wheeler
169
Art. N. Notes upon the External and Internal Anatomy of Balcena
Bonn. By Roy C. Andrews. (Six text
171
Art. XL A Four-horned Pelycosaurian from the Permian of Texas.
.183
By W. D. Matthew. (One text
Art. XII. The Ankylosaurida\ a New Family of Armored Dinosaurs
Art.
III.
"
J.
.........
glacialis
figures.)
figure.)
Art. XIII.
Art. XIV.
.......
from the Uppper Cretaceous. By Barnum Brown.

(Twenty text figures.)
Description of a New Species of Mesoplodon from Canterbury
Province,
New
XIII, and
five text figures.)
Notes
on
Two
By Roy
C.
Andrews.
(Plate
203
Porpoises Captured on a Voyage into the
Pacific Ocean.
XIV, and
Zealand.
187
By John Treadwell
three text figures.)
Nichols.
(Plate
...
A Revision of the American Eocene Horses. By Walter

text
Granger. (Plates XV-XVIII, and
Art. XVI. New Fossil Mammals from the Fayum Oligocene, Egypt.
By Henry Fairfield Osborn. (Six text
Art. XVII. Two Fossil Phoridse from the Miocene Shales of Florissant,
Colorado.
By Charles T. Brues. (Two text
By
near
Art. XVIII. The North Atlantic Right Whale and
A. Allen.
(Plates XIX-XXIV, and one text
Art. XIX. A Review of the Manakins of the Genus Chiroxiphia. By
217
Art. XV.
five
221
265
figures.)
273
figures.)
figures.)
its
Allies.
figure.)
J.
W. DeWitt Miller. (Plate XXV, colored.)

Honey Ants, with a Revision of the American Myrmecocysti.
By William Morton Wheeler. (Twenty-eight text
.
Art.
XX.
figures.)
Art. XXI.
..........
The Ants of Texas. New Mexico and Arizona.

Morton Wheeler.
(Plates
277
331
345
By William
.399
XXVI-XXVII.)
.
72
Page
The Peary Caribou (Rangifer pearyi Allen). By A. Allen

(Twelve text
A. Allen
Art. XXIII. Notes on Solenodon paradoxus Brandt. By
(Plates XXVIII-XXXIII, and nine text
A. Rohwer
Art. XXIV. A Fossil Larrid Wasp. By
A
Art. XXV. On the Tenthredinoidea of the Florissant Shales. By
Rohwer. (One text
Art. XXVI. Notes on the Skull of Lysoroplius tricarinatus Cope. By E
(Four text
C. Case.
Art. XXVII. Osteology of Blastomeryx and Phylogeny of the America!
Cervidse.
By W. D. Matthew. (Fifteen text
Art. XXVIII. Myriopoda from Porto Rico and Culebra. By Filippo Sil(Eleven text
vestri.
(Four
A. Allen.
Art. XXIX. Mammalogical Notes. I-VI. By
text
the Expedition
1908 to
Art. XXX. The Tertiary Tenthredinoidea
......
Art. XXII.
J.
figures.)
4S7
J.
figures.)
505
519
S.
.....
figure.)
S.
52
....
figures.)
531
535
figures.)
....
figures.)
563
........
J.
figures.)
By
Florissant, Colo.
Art. XXXI.
Art. XXXII.
A Fossil
New or
Mellinid
Little
Oligocene.
8.
Rohwer.
A.
By
Wasp.
S.
579
of
of
A.
(One text
Rohwer
591
figure.)
.
597
Known Titanotheres from the Eocene and

By Henry Fairfield O.sborn. (Twenty-
.599
one text figures.)
The Ants of Casco Bay, with Observations on two Races of
Formica sanguined Latreille. By William Morton
Art.
XXXIII.
Art.
Wheeler
XXXIV. Mammals from
figures.)
.619
..........
Nicaragua.
By
J.
A. Allen.
(Twelve text
647
THE BULLETIN, Volume XXV.

Catalogue of the Type and Figured
American Museum
Part I.
of
Fishes.
Natural History.
By L. Htjssakof.
Specimens of Fossil Vertebrates

(Plates
I-VL and
40 text figures.)
ANTHROPOLOGICAL PAPERS, Volume
in
1-103
I.
Ethnology of the Cos Ventre. By A. L. Kroeber. (Plates

VIII-XIII, and 44 text
Part V. The Hard Palate
Normal and Feeble-minded Individuals.
Part
the
IV.
HI
figures.)
in
By Walter Channing and Clark

XXII, 8 text
Part
VI.-
[roquois
figures
Silverwork.
and 19
By
XXIII XXIX, and 2 text
Wissler.
(PlatesXIV
283
tables)
M.
R.
Harrington.
351
figures.)
ANTHROPOLOGICAL PAPERS, Volume

Part
I.
.Mythology of the Blackfool Indians.

I).
C.
Duvali
(Plates
II.
By CLARK WlSSLEB and

1
164
LECTURES
73
MEMOIRS, Volume
Part
II.
Material
X.
Culture and Social Organization of the Koryak.
W. Jochelsox.
(Plates xiv-xl,
and 194
text figures.)
By
.
383-811
MEMOIRS. Volume XIV.

Part II. Haida
Texts.
By John
Swanton
R.
271-802
MEMBER'S COURSE.
Thursday evenings at 8:15 o'clock. Doors open at 7: 45 p. m.
The second course of illustrated lectures for the season 1908-1909 to
Members of the Museum and persons holding complimentary tickets given
them by Members will be given in March and April according to the following
programme:
March
4.
"Birds
in
Their Relation
max, Curator
of
to
By Mr. Frank M. Chap-
Man."
Ornithology
in
the
American Museum
of
Natural History.
What
The
the Bird does for the State.
fruit-grower;
bird
and the
forester; the bird
the bird and the citizen;
the bird and the farmer:
and the
the bird and the
nature-lover.
What
the State does for the Bird.
Bird destruction for pleasure and for profit
influence of increasing population on bird-life.
What
the State should do for the Bird.
Bird conservation by law and by creat-
ing favorable environmental conditions.
March
11.
"The
Conservation of Our Rivers and Lakes." By Mr.

Charles H. Townsend, Director of the New York Aquarium.
Mr. Townsend will speak on the importance of our fresh waters for fisheries,
town water supply, water power, irrigation, navigation and recreation; the dangers
which threaten them on account of pollution and deforestation; the remedies which
may be applied through sewage disposal, fish culture, impounding of waters, protection of the watersheds and the development of navigable waterways.
March
18.
"The
Mr.
Conservation of Natural Scenery

J.
Horace McFarland,
in
America."
By
President of the American
Civic Association for a Better and
More
Beautiful America.
The address will deal with the value of natural scenery in its effect on the human
mind, and with the danger of inconsideratelv destroying natural beauty in that
74
change of scenery which conies about from exploitation of our American resources.
Mr. McFarland will speak of the Grand Canyon of Arizona, of the Yosemite National
Park, of the Falls of Niagara, of the Panama Canal, and of other development and
conservation in which we have paid no attention to the beauty of our natural scenery.
March
25.
"Conservation
from the Palisades
Mr. Edward Hagaman Hall,
to the
Adirondacks."
By
Secretary of the American
Scenic and Historic Preservation Society.

According to the old style of reckoning, March 2f), 1909, will be the 300th AnniHudson from Amsterdam on the voyage which
This fact gives especial propriety to the subject
of conservation of the natural resources and landscape beauties of the famous river
which rises in the Adirondacks and flows past the Palisades to the sea.
versary of the departure of Henry
brought him to the Hudson River.
April
1.
"The Passing of Our
Great "Wild Animals and Means taken to

Them." By Dr. William T. Hornaday, Director
New York Zoological Park.
Restore
of the
Dr.
Hornaday
is
in
touch with the majority of the game regions of the world, and
for thirty years has carefully
that everywhere the larger
breed,
is
and that to-day the only hope
absolute protection in
ideal
game
life.
He will point out
much more rapidly than they
preservation of many important species
watched the decrease
mammals
game
of wild
are being killed

for the
preserves.
few illustrations
will
be shown of an
preserve very recently created in British Columbia for the sheep, goat, elk.
mule-deer and grizzly bear.
PUPILS' COURSE.
These
illustrated lectures arc
when accompanied by
Museum
open
their teachers
to the pupils of the public schools
and
to the children of
on the presentation of Membership
Lectures begin
Mch.
Monday,
Wednesday,
10
Members
of the
tickets.
at 4 p. M.
Moli.
29. "New York

31.
City
Colonial
in
Miner.
"Japan and Her People."
By R. W.
Days."
By Louis Hussakof.
Apr.
Friday,
Monday,
12
15
lb,
"The Panama
P.).
"Fai
Wednesday,
17
21.
Friday,
19
23.
Monday,
22
2(1.
is
Canal."
Rivers
of
By E. O. HOVEY.
the
World."
Granger.
"Natural Wonders of Our Country."
Miner.
"American Forests and their Uses."
Sherwood.
By
Walter
By
R.
W.
By
<i.
II.
"Mediterranean Countries, Ancienl and Modern.

"
By Walter
in
lnger.
'
MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES
Wednesday, 24
2N.
"The
American
Indian
75
By H.
To-day."
of
I.
Smith.
26
Friday,
30.
"Travels
the
in
Western
States."
By BARNUM
Brown.
LECTURES ON BIOLOGY.
Arranged by the Biology Departments of the Normal College and the
High Schools of Manhattan. Illustrated with stereopticon views.
Thursday afternoons at 3:30 o'clock.
Two
lectures remain to he given.
March 18. "Public Health."

April
15.
By Dr. Thomas M. Darlington.

By Dr. Henry E. Cramptox.
"Natural History of Animals."
PEOPLE'S COURSE.
Given* in cooperation with the City Department of Education.
Tuesday evenings at 8 o'clock. Doors open at 7: 30.

lectures by Professor A. D. F. Hamlin of Columbia University
Three
on
"The
March
March
March
March
Architecture of Great Cities."
10.
"Rome."
"Constantinople."
"Venice."
23.
"History
2.
9.
of Architecture as seen in
New York
By Mr. Joseph M. Tilden.

Three lectures by Professor A. D. F. Hamlin on "The
of Great Cities."
Buildings."
Architecture
March 30. "Paris."

0.
London
13. "New York."
April
"Florence."
. '
'
April
'
April
20.
April
27. "Berlin."
Saturday evenings
March
6, 13,
at
20 and 27.
By Mr. Francis M. Strickland.

By Mr. Henry Zick.
Doors open
8 o'clock.
A course
at 7:30.
of four lectures
by Mr. O. F. Lewis
on " Modern Methods of Charitable Help."

April
April
3.
" Child Labor."
10. "The
April 17.
April 24.
By Mr. Owen Loyejoy.

By Mr. E. K. Coulter.
Children's Court."
Subject and lecturer

"The City Beautiful."
to
be announced.
By Mr.
A. A. Stoughton.
Children are not admitted to the lectures of the People's Course, except
on presentation of
Museum Member's
Card.
76


On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences

Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy.
First
On Tuesday
The
Linnsean Society of
New
York, The
New York
Entomological

On
The New York
The programmes
Microscopical Society.

sent to the
members
making request
New York Academy of
Members
of the
Sciences and
Museum on
The American riuseum Journal
Edmund Otis Hovey,

Frank M. Chapman,
Louis P. Gratacap,
Editor.
Advisory Board.
William K. Gregory,

subscription to the Journal is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of
the Museum.
Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cambridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City.
12, I907i at the Post-office at Boston, Mass.

Act of Congress, July 16, L894.
Entered as second-class matter January
MUmUM
LEAFLETS
Guide Leaflets published by the
AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY.

For Sale at the Museum.
(Issued as supplements to The
No.
1.
of
No.
Mammalogy and
2. THE SAGINAW
Ornithology.
THE
F.
M. Chapman, Associate Curator
October, 1901.
VALLEY COLLECTION. By
December, 1901.
Curator of Archaeology.
No.
American Museum Journal.)
THE BIRD ROCK GROUP. By
H.
10 cents.
Smith, Assistant
I.
10 cents.
HALL OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W.
Ph. D., Assistant Curator of Vertebrate Palaeontology.
Out
No.
D. Matthew,
January, 1902.
of print.
4. THE COLLECTION OF MINERALS.

Curator of Mineralogy.
By Louis
February, 1902.
P.
Gratacap, A. M.,
Revised edition, May, 1904.
Price, 10 cents.
No.
5.
NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. By J. A. Allex, Ph. D.

of
Mammalogy and
February, 1904.
No.
6.
Ornithology.
March,
1902.
Curator
Revised
edition,
Price, 10 cents.
THE ANCIENT BASKET MAKERS OF SOUTHEASTERN UTAH.

By George H. Pepper,
Assistant in Anthropology.
April,
1902.
Price, 10 cents.
No.
THE
BUTTERFLIES OF THE VICINITY OF
By William Beutexmuller,
NEW YORK
CITY.
May, 1902.
Curator of Entomology.
Price, 15 cents.
No.
8. THE SEQUOIA. A Historical Review of Biological Science. By

George H. Sherwood, A. M., Assistant Curator. November, 1902.
No.
9. THE EVOLUTION OF
Price, 10 cents.
THE HORSE. By W.
Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palaeontology.
ond
No. 10.
edition,
May, 1905.
Price, 10 cents.
THE HAWK-MOTHS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK

By William Beutexmuller,
1903.
No.
D. Matthew, Ph. D.,

January, 1903. Sec-
CITY.
February,
Price, 10 cents.
1HE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE

Assistant in Archaeology.
July, 1903.
INCAS.
By
C.
W. Mead,
Price, 10 cents.
THE COLLECTION OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W.

thew, Ph.
ber, 1903.
D.
D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palaeontology.
MatOcto-
Price, 10 cents.
A GENERAL GUIDE TO THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL

HISTORY.
January, 1904.
BIRDS' NESTS AND EGGS.

Curator of Mammalogy and
February. 1905.
Out
of print.
By Fraxk M. Chapmax.
Ornithology.
April,
1904.
Price, 10 cents.
PRIMITIVE ART. July, 1904. Price, 15 cents.

THE INSECT-GALLS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW
By William Beutexmuller, Curator of Entomology.
Price, 15 cents.
Associate
Reprinted,
YORK
CITY.
October, 1904.
AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL
7S
Museum
(Reprinted from The American
No
17
Journal.)
THE
FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAMMALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY.
D. Matthew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate PalaeonJanuary, 1905. Price, 15 cents.
No. 18. THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W. D.
Matthew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palaeontology.
By W.
tology.
Out
April, 1905.
No. 19
THE
Raymond
L. Ditmars, Curator of Reptiles,
July, 1905.
No. 20.
Park.
October, 1905.
New York
January, 1906.
B.
E. Dahlgren,
Price, 10 cents.
THE BIRDS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK

April-July, 1906.
CITY.
Zoological
Price, 15 cents.

No. 23.
By
CITY.
Zoological Park.
Price, 15 cents.
THE DEVELOPMENT OF A MOLLUSK. By

D. M. D.
No. 22.
NEW YORK
New York
THE BATRACHIANS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK

By Raymond
No. 21.
of print.
REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF
of
CITY.
Mammalogy and
By Frank
Ornithology.
Priee, 15 cents.
THE SPONGE ALCOVE. By Roy W.

Invertebrate Zoology.
October, 1906.
Miner, Assistant Curator
ot
Price, 10 cents.
(Published as a separate series.)
No. 24.
PERUVIAN MUMMIES. By
nology.
No. 25.
March, 1907.
Charles W. Mead, Department
of
Eth-
Price, 10 cents.
PIONEERS OF AMERICAN SCIENCE.

whose busts are
in the
Memorials of the naturalists

Foyer of the Museum. April, 1907. Price, 15
cents.
No. 26
THE METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM

OF NATURAL HISTORY.
By Edmund Otis Hovey, Ph.D.,

December, 1907. Price 10 cents.
THE MALARIA MOSQUITO. By B. E. Dahlgren, D. M. D. AssisPrice, 15 cents.
April, 1908.
tant Curator of Invertebrate Zoology.
No. 28.
THE HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS. By
No. 27
Associate Curator of Geology.
Frank M. Chapman, Curator

15 cents.
of Ornithology.
February, 1909.
Price,
ANDAMAN ISLANDER SHOOTING

80
FISH.

IX
Vol.
APRIL, 1909
No. 4
A COLLECTION FROM THE ANDAMAN ISLANDS.
THE
Museum
collection
common
has
acquired
lately
considerable
from the Andaman Islands which
These
interest.
islands,
which
recent date were almost a terra incognita, are
still
until
ethnological
of
is
more than
a comparatively
practically
unknown
to
the general reader for the reason that the greater part of the literature
that has appeared concerning
lished
by
public.
scientific societies,
For
may
tants
them has been
in the
and has not been
form of papers pub-
easily accessible to the
few words about the islands and their inhabi-
this reason a
not be out of place before entering on a description of the
more notable objects
in the collection.
The Andamans form
narrow chain of
islands,
nowhere exceed-
ing twenty miles in width, extending nearly north and south in the
Bay
of Bengal.
The
three
main islands
of the group, North,
Middle and
South Andaman, together with some small islands, are known as Great
Andaman.
To
the south of these lies Little
established a penal settlement on South
years later removed
it
to
North Andaman.
The
Andaman.
Andaman
in
British
1789, but three
In February, 1796,
this
colony was abandoned and the prisoners removed to Penang, while the
free settlers
date the
The
and the troops were conveyed back
Andamans remained unoccupied by
British again
The Andamanese
color
From
formed a penal settlement on South Andaman
which has since been maintained
well
to Bengal.
for
from dark copper
in 1858,
East Indian criminals.
belong to the Negrito race.
formed people with short
this
aliens for sixty-two years.
frizzled hair,
to sooty black.
The
They
are small but
and with skin ranging
in
following table, prepared
by Mr. E. H. Man, gives a clearer idea of the stature and weight of

these people than could be gained by any lengthy description.
Maximum
height of males
82
Mr. Man's
inches, and
is
results give as the average height of the
of the
women
feet,
men 4
feet,
lOf
1\ inches, while their average weight
98^ pounds and 93J pounds, respectively.

It would probably be impossible, as Mr. C. Boden Kloss remarks,
purer descent, because ever since they peopled the
to find a people of
Age they have remained secluded from the outer

isolation, furthermore, is due the uniformity so marked
islands in the Stone
To
world.
this
in their physical
Many
Ptolemy
and mental
were the fabulous
is
characteristics.
stories told of these islanders in early times.
supposed to have referred to the Andamanese when he de-
scribes a people as "anthropophagi whose heads grew beneath their
shoulders."
It
was
had
also said that they
As
tails like horses.
re-
gards the charge of cannibalism, not a particle of evidence has been

discovered of such a practice
times.
The
belief that their
and that they had
among
the
Andamanese, even
in
remote
heads grew from below their shoulders
tails like horses,
may be
traced to their custom of
wearing the skulls of departed relatives suspended by a strap about the

neck, and a tail-like bunch of pandanus leaves attached to their belts
behind.
Clothes, as
we understand
Andamanese.
Circlets
the word, were
unknown among
the early
about the neck, arms and legs and a waist-
band with a pendant bunch
of leaves, shells, beads or other objects
were generally worn, but even these were dispensed with in some
calities.
Some time
lo-
after the establishment of the penal settlement at
Port Blair, the aborigines in the vicinity were required, by law, to wear
a sort of frock, but the idea in the minds of the islanders, concerning
the purpose of this regulation
related
is
by an amusing incident
well illustrated
by Dr. G. E. Dobson, who
Andamans
visited the
the purpose of collecting zoological specimens.
ceived by the wife of the chief,

vided by the
Government
who had
lie says,
hastily
in 1872 for
"We
were
re-
donned the frock pro-
to receive visitors in, but very
soon afterwards
perceiving that no ladies were in our boat, she got rid of that unnecessary encumbrance, and presented herself
single leaf,
in
nature's garb, adorned by a
a garter tied below one knee, and
erally practiced
throughout the islands.
necklace composed of
Tattooing
the finger and toe-bones of her ancestors."
The
is
very gen-
instrument formerly in
use for incising the designs was a Hake of quartz, but since the advent
of the whites, a piece of glass has
become the
favorite tool.
THE MEETING 'RIGHT) AND THE PARTING iLEFT, OF THE ANDAMANESE.
AN ANDAMANESE MARRIAGE CEREMONY.

83
ANDAMANESE ORNAMENTS AND IMPLEMENTS.

85
COLLECTION FROM THE AX DAM AX ISLANDS
87
Since the establishment of the penal settlement at Port Blair, on
South Andaman, the race, as
is
shown by government
statistics,
has
been rapidly approaching extinction.
Description of Illustrations and Specimens.
The illustration on page 80 shows a man shooting fish, a pursuit in

which the natives are very expert. As he stands in the edge of the water
with drawn bow, every line of his supple body is full of grace. Note the
bow
which is generally made of a kind

"Chai" (Alphonsea ventricosa). The
arrows used for shooting fish are made of a reeddike variety of bamboo
(Bambusa nana) and have a very short foreshaft of wood, to which is bound
an iron point and one or more barbs of iron.
peculiar shape of the

of
wood known
in his hand,
in the islands
as
In the upper figure on page 83 are illustrated the customs in vogue

at
meeting and parting.
Unlike most peoples, the Andamanese
joy at meeting by excessive weeping.
When
testify their
meet after an absence of a few weeks, they sit together with their arms around each other's
necks and indulge in loud wailings until nearly exhausted. At parting,
the guest takes the hand of his host and blows on it.
The compliment
being returned, the guest takes his leave, shouting out invitations and promises of future
relatives
meetings until out of earshot.
The marriage ceremony
is
shown
in the
lower figure of page 83.
consists in the chief of the tribe leading the bashful
bashful bride, and seating
the meantime held
him
in position
groom up
This
to the equally
in her lap, the prospective wife being in
by the women of the
tribe.
The
chief
then gives the young couple some advice as to their future conduct, and
the ceremony
The
is
ended.
on page 84 shows objects connected with some of the

most curious customs of the Andamanese. Figs. 1 and 5 show prepared
human skulls, already referred to, which are worn as a token of respect
for lost members of the family.
These are carefully cleaned and painted;
after which pendants with shells or fringe are attached, and a strap is put
on by which they are suspended around the neck of the wearer. There
illustration
no obligation to wear this sign of mourning for any great length of time,
and it is passed from one to another of the relatives. Figs. 2 and 4 are
human jaws which are prepared and worn in the same way and for the
is
same purpose
man
by friends
fetish
as the skulls just described.
bones with pendant fringe and
is
of a sick person, as a cure.
shells.
When
Fig. 3
This
is
shows a band of hua fetish, and is worn
a person
frequently placed over the affected part.
is
suffering pain, the
AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL
88
Several objects, mostly ornaments, are grouped in the illustration forming page 85.
tection
Fig.
1 is
from sun and
palm
rain.
leaf,
used as a sleeping mat, and as a pro-
Figs. 2
and 3 are waist-bands. Fig. 4 is a

This is suspended from trees
fringe of cane leaves, attached to a stick.
where death has occurred. Fig. 5 is a sling for carrying infants. Figs. 6,
7, 8, 9 and 12 represent bands with bones, shells and fringes, worn around
Fig. 10 is a waist-belt made of the leaves
the neck or arms by both sexes.
of the young screw pine (Pandanus andamanensium), the bunch of leaves
being worn behind. This is the ornament that is supposed to have given
rise, in
11
former times, to the idea that the natives had
tails like
a waist-belt of shells (Dentalium, octagonum).
is
resin,
night.
wrapped
in
palm
leaves,
used when
Fig. 13
horses.
is
fishing, traveling or
Fig. 14 represents a sounding board or drum.
It is
Fig.
a torch of
dancing by
supported at
an angle by a stick driven into the ground, as shown on page 89, and is
sounded by striking with the foot or a spear.
On page 86 a group of household articles is depicted, such as bamboo
buckets, baskets, mats, tongs and other things. Many of the native baskets
are beautifully ornamented by weaving into them strands of an orchid root
(De7idrobium sp.). The root is split lengthwise, and the inner substance is
scraped away with a Cyrena shell. The skin is then cleaned and dried,
when it turns brilliant metallic yellow in color.

The upper figure on page 89 shows the manner
The spear used has a bamboo shaft 18 feet or more
which
stout line, to
is
of capturing a turtle.
in length,
attached a barbed iron point.
and a long
on page
(See Fig. 2
end of the shaft. When the point

from it and floats upon the water. The
man grasps the spear with both hands about midway of its length and
springs with it into the water, thus adding the force of his weight to that
This point
90).
fits
loosely into the
enters the turtle, the shaft separates
of the blow.
The Andamanese dance is illustrated in the lower figure on page 89.

The dance is usually accompanied by a song and chorus, the composer
acting as leader, and beating the sounding board or drum.
of the
drum
is
given in Fig. 14 on page 85.
women marking
rhythm by clapping the hands or
the
Another view
All join in the chorus, the

striking their crossed
legs.
90.
Some of the implements used

The use of most of them
mention.
Fig. 2
arrows used
The
to
in
is
it
is
hunting and fishing are shown on page

self-evident, but
a turtle spear like that
its
barb,
fits
shown
in
few
require special
use on page 89.
The
and 3a) are worthy of notice.

loosely into the hollow end of the shaft,
shooting the wild pig (Figs.
iron point, with
which
in
is
''>
attached by a cord about eight inches
in length.
When
the
SPEARING
TURTLE
AN ANDAMANESE DANCE.
89
IMPLEMENTS OF WAR AND THE CHASE

90
OLDEST LAND REPTILES OE XORTII AMERICA

pig
is
struck the arrow-head
91
pulled out, and the shaft, trailing along on
is
making the capture of

and 9a) with the crook on one end
Fig. 11 is a wooden fish
are used for capturing crabs among the rocks.
spear.
It only remains to notice the two very curious sigmoid bows shown
The former is used by the tribes of North Andaman;
in Figs. 7 and 8.
the latter by those of South and Middle Andaman.
the ground quickly becomes entangled in the brush,
The
the animal easy.
sticks (Figs. 9
Charles W. Mead.
FIG.
From
I.
SPINE-BACKED LIZARD DIMETRODON.
the Permian of Texas.
Skeleton discovered by Dr. E. C. Case in 1906.
THE OLDEST LAND REPTILES OF NORTH AMERICA.
EIGHTEEN
years ago, in 1891, the American
to gather together its
the
Age
of
Mammals,
Museum began
collections of the extinct
the ancestors
quadrupeds
and predecessors
of
of the living
work was enlarged so as
quadrupeds.
Six years later, the scope of the
to include the
animals of the Age of Reptiles, which preceded the Age
92
of
Mammals, more
especially the Dinosaurs, those gigantic, long-legged
land reptiles, as strange to our eyes as though from another planet.

Finallv, within the last few years, the
tion of the vertebrate
Age
of Reptiles
With
geologv.
life
of the
Age
Museum
of
has begun the representa-
Amphibians, which preceded the
and includes the Carboniferous and Permian Periods of

this era we pass into a world as remote from the world
of the Dinosaurs as that
is
from our own.
Its
dominant land animals
were amphibians, remotely related to the modern salamanders, and

peculiar types of primitive reptiles wholly different from the reptiles of
Less gigantic than the

the Dinosaur era and from any living kinds.
Dinosaurs or the great quadrupeds of the Age of Mammals, they are
FIG.
2.
ARMORED AMPHIBIAN ERYOPS.
Cope Permian
often
and
most grotesque and

in their
Collection, presented
peculiar.
They
SKULL AND JAWS.
by Morris K. Jesup.
are the
first
of land vertebrates,
clumsy and awkward proportions and construction, they
impress one at every point with their imperfect adaptation to terrestrial

life.
The
itself to
the
great vertebrate
more
active
tion into higher types
life
phylum was then but beginning

of the land, with
its
and more varied and complex modes
were afforded by an aquatic habitat.
to
adapt
opportunities for evoluof life than
Probably most of these primitive
we know were so.

came the opportunity for a more active life and continually higher development, as we see
it in the successive geological periods down to the present time.
land vertebrates were more or less amphibious; sonic
But with
the assumption of a terrestrial environment
OLDEST LAX J) REPTILES OF XORTII AMERICA

The purpose
is
of this notice
is
being done by the American
to call attention to
Museum
93
what has been and
towards exhibiting this ancient
and wonderful Permian fauna which flourished during the later part
the Age of Amphibians.
The first step was taken some years ago,
the purchase, through the generosity of the late President
of
in
Morris K.
Jesup, of the Cope Collection of Fossil Reptiles, which included the
and
largest
finest series of
specimens
are
Permian
fossil
vertebrates in the world.
The
from
chiefly
Northern Texas, the only
re-
gion in which these rare fossils
have been found
in
any consid-
erable number. Professor
Cope
early realized the importance of
the finds
first
made
there in
1878, and had employed
many
lectors there for
Owing
to the difficulty
col-
years.
and ex-
pense of preparation, the speci-
mens
had
been
very
little
worked up for scientific study

and still less for exhibition.
In addition to presenting
the collection to the
Museum,
Mr. Jesup provided a

preparation
made
it
fund
possible to keep two
skilled preparators at
this
special
which has
work on
and other parts of the Cope
FIG.
collection for several years past.
As a
3.
ARMORED AMPHIBIAN DIPLOCAU LUS.
Cope Permian
principal
specimens
Cope Permian
of
the
Collection have been extracted from the flinty concre-
tionary matrix in which they occur, and a considerable
already been
Dinosaur Hall.
the
placed
The
on exhibition
series includes
Naosaurus or Ship-lizard
a previous
by
Morris K. Jesup.
result of their labors, the
number
of the
(a
in
the
number have
southeast corner of
the
a more or less composite skeleton of
photograph of which has appeared
in
Journal), parts of the skeletons and skulls
of other Spine-backed Lizards, a large
number
of skulls
and two skeletons
94
Armored Amphibians, Eryops (Fig. 2), Diplocaulus (Figs. 3, 4),

Cricotus (Fig. 5), and others, and a series of skulls and other parts of
of the
the Solid-skulled Reptiles or Cotylosaurians.

It
soon became evident that
this
wonderful fauna would well repay
an energetic search for additional
and
more complete specimens,
therefore
sent
1902 the
in
Museum
Mr. C. H. Sternberg, and
in
1906 and 190S Dr. E. C. Case,

into the
Texas
expeditions
made
valuable addi-
Permian
tions to the
These
fossil field.
collections.
In particular, Dr. Case succeeded

in
1906
in obtaining skeletons of
Dime-
the Spine-Backed Lizard

FIG.
SKULL OF ARMORED AMPHIBIAN

DIPLOCAULUS.
Cope Permian
Morris K. Jesup.
by
trodon (Fig.
skulled
1)
and the large
(Cotylosaurian)
solid-
reptile
much more complete

The
than any previously known
Diadectes,
first
is
specimen has been placed on exhibition as a panel mount, the other
now under
Dr. Case
last
FIG.
preparation.
The most important specimen obtained by

By persistent and
year was a fine skull of Diadectes.
5.
SKELETONS OF THE ARMORED AMPHIBIAN CRICOTUS.
Cope Permian
thorough exploration of
this
by Morris K. Jesup.
and other Permian
fossil
fields
we may
ex-
pect to obtain a large series of skeletons of these strangest and least
known of all our fossil vertebrates.

The scientific value of these specimens can hardly be
overrated.
CROUP OF PECULIAR MOLLUSKS
95
Very little is known, even to scientific men, about Permian vertebrates.

There are not half a dozen scientific men in this country who have any
considerable first-hand knowledge of them, or half a dozen
museums
in
the world that possess any considerable collections, and nowhere else
have the specimens been so carefully prepared for study and exhibition
as in the American Museum.
The skulls and skeletons recently prepared here have not yet been thoroughly studied, but they will supply
most important evidence regarding the early history

brates, the maimer, the conditions, and the causes of
their relations to the
modern
reptiles,
of the land vertetheir
development,
Upon
amphibians and mammals.
the imperfect evidence hitherto available have been built various theories
and hypotheses
of relationship
and modified
revised
in
many
and development, which
cases, in
will
have
to
be
view of the new evidence already
at hand.
W. D. Matthew.
A GROUP OF PECULIAR MOLLUSKS.
R. A. de Costa
D'Orb.,
mass
Gomez
has presented
Conchology an interesting group of
to the
Department of
shells of the
mollusk Ver-
micular i a'! nigricans Dall (old nomenclature Vermetus variant

var.
The specimen
irregularis D'Orb.).
of tubes, a gorgon-like
like the cases of
the
maze
of tortuous pipes
is
a tightly coiled
which look so
annelid genus Serpula that they
much
appear rather
incongruously referred to mollusks.
These anomalous mollusks were separated by Cuvier in 1830, and

by him erected into an order. They are true prosobranchs, though in
their shelly covering they
shell design.
The
have widely departed from any conventional
shells are usually attached to other shells or to corals,
or they live in sponges, or again, as in this example, they unite to form

large colonies.
They
are unisexual, oviparous, or viviparous,
eggs are often found in the tubes.

in color
with reddish dots.
rock" of West Florida.
The animals
are dark purple-brown
This species makes the so-called
The masses
of tubes are
like coral reefs, to boats in shallow water.
and the
"worm
sometimes dangerous,
Dall has observed patches 20
or 30 feet in diameter with the top nearly level and barely dry at ordi-
nary low water.
GROUP OF PECULIAR MOLLUSK SHELLS.

(Vermicularia? nigricans Dall.)
96
NEWS XOTES
The specimen
is
97
interestingly varied in color, the tubes ranging
hyaline whites to soft sienna browns.
from
Gasse's description of Serpida
applies very well to these shells, "great and small heaps of contorted
tubes, that look as
if
a batch of tobacco pipes
had become agglutinated
VERMICULARIA'? NIGRICANS DALL.
Two
together and strangely twisted in the baking."
2)
The
shell
which relax as the tube
close striated spine, the whorls of
the [later growth
small shells from the group figured on p. 96.
becoming continually more
erect.
begins in a
prolonged,
is
The specimen
is
from Clear Water Bay, Dunedin, Florida.

L. P. G.
MUSEUM NEWS
SINCE the
last issue of the
NOTES.
Journal
the following persons have
been elected members of the Museum: Life Members, Mr.
Charles Lyman Brinsmade and Mrs. John E. Parsons;

Annual Members, Messrs. Edward B. Amend, J. Sanford Barnes,
Jr., I). M. Barringer, S. R. Bertron, E. D. Bird, Horatio J.
Brewer, C. T. Church, Hubert Cillis, Everett Colby, Edward
Livingston Coster, Lawrence Godkin, George L. Harrison, Jr.,
Hancke Hencken, Theodore Lyman, H. Fairfield Osborn, Jr.,

H. F. Osborn Sanger, Ralph Sanger and G. W. Wilder; Mmes.
Hamilton Fish Kean, H. Fairfield Osborn, M. Grace Richardson,
Ralph Sanger and Edward Thomas; Misses Gertrude L. Hoyt,
Beatrix Jones, Kautz-Eulenburg and Josephine A. Osborn.
The Museum
has recently acquired through purchase from Mr.
G. R. Cassedy, of Canon City, Colo., an iron meteorite that

a valuable addition to the
series
of meteorites in
will
form
the Fover of the
98
The specimen, which weighs 682 pounds, was found Novem-
Museum.
ber 11, 1907, in Fremont County, Colorado, about 20 miles southwest
of Cripple Creek.
complete description of the meteorite
of
The thirteenth
New York, was
3:30
m.,
p.
Henry
annual meeting of the Audubon Society of the State
American
held at the
March
The
18, 1909.
wood, secretary-treasurer of the
Museum
of Natural History at
president of the society, Professor
The report
Osborn, presided.
Fairfield
reserved
is
Journal.
for a later issue of the
society,
of
Miss
Emma
showed that the
H. Lock-
activities of
the organization in protecting the birds of the State and in supplying
material for the use of teachers

ble funds.
ciation of
and
was limited only by
others,
Mr. William Dutcher, the president
Audubon
Societies
and chairman
of the National Asso-
of the
New York
Committees on Legislation, presented a report on current

matters with particular reference to a
Legislature, the passage of
the
plumage
Dutcher asked
tives at
all
Albany
to
the
now
members
support this
their music,
New York
sale of
State birds for millinery purposes.
Mr.
of the Society to urge their representabill.
Following Mr. Dutcher's report,
Mr. Louis Agassiz Fuertes, the well-known bird

on birds and
before the
societies'
legislative
which would practically prohibit the
New York
of all
bill
availa-
which he
artist,
made an
address
illustrated with chalk sketches of the
birds and whistled imitations of their songs.
In connection with this
meeting there was an exhibition of paintings of birds by Mr. Fuertes,
which continued during the succeeding week.
LECTURE ANNOUNCEMNNTS.
MEMBER'S COURSE.
Thursday
evenings
at
8:15 o'clock.
Doors open
at
7:45
p.
m.
One
lecture remains to be given.
April
1.
"The
Our Great Wild Animals and Means taken to

Them." By Dr. William T. Hornaday, Director
passing of
Restore
of the
New York
Zoological Park.
Illustrated with lantern slides.
LECTURES
99
PUPILS' COURSE.
These
illustrated lectures are
when accompanied by
Museum on
the presentation of
Lectures begin
and to the children

Membership tickets.
of
Members
of the
at 4 p. m.
Friday,
April 16.
Monday,
April 19.
Wednesday, April
open
their teachers
21.
"The Panama Canal." By E. O. Hovey.

"Famous Rivers the World." By Walter
Granger.
"Natural Wonders our Country." Bv R. W.
of
of
Mixer.
"American Forests and
Sherwood.
Friday,
April 23.
Monday,
April 26.
"Mediterranean Countries, Ancient and Modern."
Wednesday, April
28.
By G. H.
their Uses."
By Walter Granger.
"The American Indian of To-day."
By H.
I.
Smith.
Friday,
April 30.
"Travels
in
the Western States."
By
Barmm
Brown.
LECTURES OX BIOLOGY.
Arranged by
High Schools
of
the Biology
Manhattan.
Thursday afternoons
One
Departments of the Normal College and the

at 3:30 o'clock.
lecture remains to be given.
April 15.
"Natural History of Animals."
By Dr. Henry
E.
Crampton.
PEOPLE'S COURSE.
Given
in
cooperation with the City Department of Education.
Tuesday evenings
Two
lectures
Greal Cities."
April
April
at 8'oclock.
Doors open
at 7:30.
by Professor A. D. F. Hamlin on "The Architecture of

0. "London."
13. "New York."
April 20.
"Florence,
Cradle of the Renaissance."
By Mr. Francis M.
Strickland.
April 27.
"Berlin, and Military Life
in
Germany."
By Dr. Henry
Zick.
100
April
April
Doors open
at 8 o'clock.
Saturday evenings
at 7:30.
3.
"Child Labor in America." By Mr. Owen R. Lovejoy.
10. "The Children's Court." By Mr. Ernest K. Coulter.
April 17.
April 24.
Subject and lecturer

"The City Beautiful,
to
be announced.
or the Planning and Embellishment of
By Mr. Arthur
Cities."
A. Stoughton.

On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences:

First
Mondays, Section
of
Geology and Mineralogy.

On Tuesday
The Linnsean
Society of
New
York, The
New York
Entomological
On
Wednesdays, as announced:
The Horticultural Society of New York.

On
The New York

The programmes

sent to the
members
making request
New York Academy
Members
of
and
the Museum on
of Sciences

Edmund Otis.Hovey,
Frank M. Chapman,
Editor.
Louis P. Gratacap,
William K. GREGORY,
Advisory Board.

A subscription to the Journal is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of
the Museum.
Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cambridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City.
Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office

Act of Congress, July 16, 1894.
at
Boston, Mass.
AMERICAN .MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY.

For Sale
(Issued as supplements
No.
THE
of
No.
2.
3.
By
F.
Ornithology.
Journal.)
M. Chapman. Associate Curator
October, 1901.
THE SAGINAW VALLEY COLLECTION. By

December, 1901.
No.
Museum
The American
to
BIRD ROCK GROUP.

Mammalogy and
Museum.
at the
H.
Price, 10 cents.
Smith, Assistant
I.
Price, 10 cents.
THE HALL OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W.

Out of print.
No.
4.
THE COLLECTION OF MINERALS. By

February, 1902.
D. Matthew,
January, 1902.
Louis P. Gratacap, A. M.,

Price, 10 cents.
No.
5.
NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS.

of
Mammalogy and
February, 1904.
No.
6.
By
Ornithology.
.1.
A. Allen, Ph. D.
March,
1902
Curator
Revised
edition,
Price, 10 cents.

April,
1902.
Price, 10 cents.
No.
7.
THE BUTTERFLIES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK

By William Beltexmuller,
CITY.
May, 1902.
Price, 15 cents.
No.

No.
9.
Price, 10 cents.
THE EVOLUTION OF THE HORSE. By W.

ond
No. 10.
edition.
May, 1905.
Price, 10 cents.

By William Beltexmuller,
1903.
No. 11.
CITY.
February.
Price, 10 cents.
1HE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE

No. 12.
D. Matthew, Ph. D.,

January, 1903. Sec-
July, 1903.
INCAS.
By
C.
W. Mead,
Price, 10 cents.

thew, Ph.
ber. 1903.
D.
MatOcto-
Price, 10 cents.
No. 13.
No. 14.

HISTORY.
January, 1904.
February. 1905.
No. 15.
No. 16.
Out
of print.
By Frank M. Chapmax.
Ornithology.
April,
1904.
Price, 10 cents.
PRIMITIVE ART. July. 1904. Price, 15 cents.

By William Beutexmuller, Curator of Entomology.
Price, 15 cents.
Associate
Reprinted,
YORK
CITY.
October, 1904.
Museum
No.
Journal.)
17. THE FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAMMALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY.
By W. D. Matthew,
No. IS.
L.
July, 1905.
Ditmars, Curator of Reptiles,
Park.
New York
CITY.
By
Zoological Park.
Price, 15 cents.
October, 1905.
New York
CITY.
Zoological
Price, 15 cents.

D. M. D.
January, 1906.
B. E.
Dahlgren,
Price, 10 cents.
THE BIRDS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By Frank

April- July, 1906.
No. 23.
Vertebrate Palaeontology.

By Raymond
No. 22.
Curator of
Associate
of print.
THE REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK

Raymond
No. 21.
D.,
Out
April, 1905.
No. 20.
Price, 15 cents.
THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W. D

Matthew, Ph.
No. 19.
Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palaeon-
January, 1905.
tology.
Priee,
of
Mammalogy and

Ornithology,
15 cents.
Miner, Assistant Curator of

Price, 10 cents.
October, 1906.
No. 24.
nology.
No. 25.
March, 1907.
of
Eth-
Price, 10 cents.

whose busts are
in the

cents.
No. 26.

OF NATURAL HISTORY. By Edmund Otis Hovey, Ph.D.,
No. 27.
THE MALARIA MOSQUITO.
December, 1907.
By
B. E.
No. 28.
Price, 10 cents.
Dahlgren, D. M. D.
April, 1908.
THE HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN

15 cents.
of Ornithology.
Assis-
Price, 15 cents.
BIRDS.
February, 1909.
By
Price.
pq

MAY,
IX
Vol.
No. 5
1909
THE SERIES OF PROTOZOAN MODELS.
THE
one-celled organisms known as Protozoa form a

Immense importance both from a biological and an
economic standpoint. Swarming in countless millions in both
fresh and salt water, and at times even in the bodies of other animals,
they are the most abundant and most widely distributed of all life.
minute
group
Many
them
of
marine and fresh water creatures depend upon
of the smaller
for food,
important
and among them may
disease-causing
some
also be found
The
parasites.
of the
calcareous and
most
siliceous
skeletons of others settle to the sea bottom by thousands as the animals
many
die, to collect in layers often
feet in thickness.
become compacted
skeletons sometimes
many
great geological importance,
chalk having been formed
in
this
into solid rock,
extensive
the so-called "Radiolarian ooze," which
earth" used
in
siliceous skeletons
the source of the
is
yet
it
is
microscope,
"Barbados
Though
forms no inconsiderable part of the island of Barbados.
penetrating, as
and
form
manufactures for polishing and grinding, and which
vast world of creatures
life,
calcareous
of lime-stone
cliffs
The
way.
The
and thus are of
it
were,
is
all
invisible to
we should be
The Museum
is
this
so important and surrounds us on every side,

the interspaces between the larger forms of
our eyes, and were
it
absolutely ignorant of
at present
completing
its
not for the

except in
it,
compound
its effects.
series of greatly enlarged
models of the typical Protozoa, and one of the most striking of these has
recently been finished for exhibition.
ing illustrations (pages 104 and 105).
gans Hackel) belongs
to the
It
is
shown
in the
accompany-
This Protozoan (Auloceros
ele-
group Radiolaria, so called because of the
radiating siliceous or glassy skeleton which characterizes these forms.
Sometimes these are
of great complexity
and beauty, and though the
Protozoa as a whole are the simplest in structure of
composed
of but a single cell, certain forms
among
considerable complexity of intracellular structure, as

figure.
103
all
animals, being
the Radiolaria attain
may be
seen in the
104
In the middle of the animal

center of
its life activities,
structure
and
in function.
is
the oval nucleus, which
and which
is itself
It is inclosed in
is
the essential
extremely complex both in
a transparent double-walled
"central capsule," in this species red in color, containing a portion of the

living
protoplasmic
cell-substance
(endoplasm)
which
is
continuous
with the surrounding outer protoplasm (ectoplasm) through openings

at the
is
summits
partly
of the three conical projections.
imbedded
in
The
central capsule
a mass of granular pigmented substance (the
THE PROTOZOAN, AULOCEROS ELEGANS HACKEL

Glass model, greatly enlarged.
Made by H.
Miiller
under the direction
of R.
W.
Miner.
MODEL OF AULOCEROS ELEGANS HACKEL

View
phceodium
issues
dark green
to
show
internal
in this species),
from the upper opening
anatomy.
which surrounds and apparently
of the capsule.
siderable physiological value to the organism
It is
probably of con-
and may be
either asso-
ciated with nutrition or a product of an excretory nature retained within
the
body
tion,
for
some secondary reason.
however,
The
is still
real explanation of its func-
uncertain.
true protoplasmic living-substance outside the capsule
tributed for the most part in the

is
The
imbedded
form
of a network,
in a jelly-like structureless matrix.
This matrix
is
with bubble-like, liquid-filled hollows (alveoles), which are so

that they reduce the animal substance to very
a foam-like appearance
to
this
narrow
part of the structure.

105
is
dis-
which secretes and
limits
crowded
numerous
and give
(In the glass
106
model each alveole
is
represented by a separately blown glass sphere.)
Radiating outward from the central capsule
may be
seen the supporting
glassy skeleton of the creature, each ray in this species separate,
branching antler-like at the
tip.
and
Particular notice should be taken of
the delicate radiating filamentary projections of the animal
body be-
These are the "pseudopods,"

prolongations of the living protoplasmic network which reach out in all
directions and act somewhat as tentacles, seizing upon the minute anitween the rays of the skeletal structure.
mals which form the prey of the creature, and drawing them down
This ingestion may take
within the body to be digested and absorbed.

place at any point of the surface, since there
stomach.
The
is
no mouth and no
definite
pseudopods are used also for locomotion.
In other related species
all
parts of the skeleton are welded rigidly
together, often forming complicated
and beautiful patterns, as in the

is represented by a model now
genus Gorgonetta, the skeleton of which
on exhibition
Museum
in the
(page 107).
Roy W. Miner.
A NEW MARINE HABITAT GROUP.
THE
illustration on page 102 represents a group recently installed

This group
by the Department of Invertebrate Zoology.
shows an animal community such as may often be found in the
Bahamas not
Brittle-stars,
Diadema
far belowT the exposed edge of a coral reef.
It
includes
Sea Cucumbers, Cake-urchins and Sea-urchins, especially
seiosum, two fine specimens of which are represented bristling
with long spines, like hedge-hogs.

of the coral-rock
is
and displaying around

plume-like tentacles.
like Pink-tipped
Coiled in and out through the crevices
the brownish body of a Synapta, studded with knobs

its
circular
mouth-opening an expanded ring of
Conspicuous at one side of the group
is
the flower-
Sea Anemone {Condylactis (jigantea Weinland), which
nestles at the base of a coral
growth and
slimy surface of an incrusting sponge.
is
partly concealed by the
Above
brown
this rises the delicate
fern-like colony of a Stinging Coral {Millcpora alcicornis) together with

a
fragile,
paper-like species
(Millcpora plieata), while other sponges
and corals project here and there from (he sand. The material for the
group was collected in 1908 by Dr. B. E. Dahlgren and Mr. II. Miiller
oil'
Andros Island
by the former
in
in
the
the
Bahamas, and was
Museum.
for the
most part prepared
GLASS MODEL OF SKELETON OF PROTOZOAN, GORGONETTA MiRABILlS HACKEL.
Very greatly enlarged.
Prepared by H.
107
Miiller.
MODEL OF THE GOBLIN SHARK.
LIFE-SIZE model
of a very rare
and
Japanese
from
remarkable Shark
waters, a photograph of which
shown on
The model
exhibition
most striking of which
forward
from
some
of the ani-
the "rostrum,"
is
supplied with
which
nerves,
above
the
features,
affair, richly
and
blood-vessels
Museum.
anatomical
a paddle-shaped
been
recently
the
in
well represents
peculiar
mal's
has
page,
this
for
finished
is
projects
mouth and
the
is
probably used to
feel
about on the sea-
bottom
The
long tapering body
for prey.
with extremely powerful

adaptation
shark
a
is
for
In
life
the
somewhat translucent and presents

ghost-like
peculiarly
darts
an
indicates
tail
speed.
great
through
the
appearance
water.
The
as
it
alcoholic
specimen from which the model was made

in the
Museum
is
collection and has been con-
stituted the type of a
new
species (Scapano-
rhynchus jordani) recently described in the

Museum "Bulletin" by Dr. L. Hussakof.
The model was prepared by Mr. Dwight

Franklin, under the direction of Mr. R. W.
Miner, and
is
four feet five inches long.
Dr. L. Hussakof, Assistant Curator

Fishes, went to Europe in April
to
make
a study of the icthyological collections
of
the
weeks
leading museums.
The
be spent
of his stay will
ical station at
THE GOBLIN SHARK.
of
Fossil
Naples.
IKS
last
at the
few
zoolog-
S TEE.
NSSON-ANDERSON ARC TIC EXPEDI TIOX
109
NEWS FROM THE MUSEUM'S ARCTIC EXPLORERS.
EARLY
ceived
in April
The
the middle of
letters written
October were
re-
with news from the Museum's Arctic Alaska expedition.
come from Flaxman
letters
Ocean
off the
kenzie
Bay and Point Barrow, and
Island, situated in the Arctic
northern coast of Alaska and about
and Dr. Anderson, who followed
midway between Mac-
record the union of Mr. Stefansson
different routes after leaving Herschel
Island in August.
The
ber,
route taken by Mr. Stefansson was in part
1908,
JOURNAL, and
number quoted from

tion
later facts
were given
shown
in
the
a letter written late last September.
Novem-
in the
March, 1909,
The
expedi-
proceeded westward as far as Point Barrow; then on a return trip
toward Flaxman was frozen
in at
Smith Bay, west of Cape Halkett,
cached goods there, made a sled and continued slowly eastward.
Anderson and
his party cruised along the coast
Island until September G,
Barter Island and the

sleds, feeding
"on
men
and
started,
their
whaleboat was frozen
west of
in
with their seventeen dogs had to proceed with
the country."
It is a satisfaction to
polar expedition
when
Dr.
westward from Herschel
up
to
know
October
members
of the well-being of all
when
19, 1908,
this feeling is intensified
the Arctic winter
of this
was
well
by a message that has come since
the letters arrived.

A telegram received by way of Seattle April 8, which
was dispatched from Nome, Alaska, on April 6 and was originally
dated at Point Barrow February 14, reads as follows: "Telegram of
December fourth received. Well. Winter camp lower Colville.
Game
Nobody
scarce.
Whalers
Baillie
[Island].
Plans
starving.
unchanged.
Expect
meet
Stefansson."
Realistic accounts of the happenings of the
weeks en route
to
Flaxman
Island are given in the following quotations
Flaxmax Island, Alaska,

October
***** We
have made the
trip
from the delta
of
15, 1908.
an unnamed river
about 50 miles east from Point Barrow eastward to Flaxman Island,

ing Friday, September 18, and arriving here
was unusually slow
for several reasons.
start-
Monday, October 12. Our trip

delaved some three days to visit
fe
STEFANSSON AXDKRSOX ARCTIC EXPEDITION

the Schooner "< >lga " beset
has already informed you;
through waiting for them
deer.
Of
the ice oF
we
to freeze
wooden platforms)
Cape Halkett
about
lost
we employed about
in half-loads;
ing (on high
in
'
five
days
111
as a letter from there
at various rivers, either
over or in taking stuff across their deltas
days in hunting, skinning and cach-
five
seal
and
We
deer.
got one seal
the deer, I saved five specimens for Dr. Anderson.
these were killed in the Colville delta,
and two a
little
east of
and twelve
Three of
it
three
one old female, one young female (female and young with horns
an old buck was in
in velvet).
The deer show different stages of pelage
summer color still, while the doe was fully changed and the others ranged
fine bucks,
We
some specimens of mice, weasels and birds.

At Flaxman Island we found Dr. Anderson and the three natives, all
well and Dr. Anderson reasonably satisfied with the fall months, though
he had had a rather complete change from whitemen's diet and had been
compelled at one time to eat up his mouse bait (5 lbs. of rolled oats). His
party had lived on squirrels and seal oil for a time, and later, on deer, fish
and grouse.
Off Point Tangent I put some of our supplies and some we were carrying
for Leffingwell aboard the schooner " Rosie H.", whose captain, Fritz Wolki,
promised to take Leffingwell's stuff to Flaxman and mine as far as he could
between.
He was
go.
flour,
100
also secured
4 tanks alcohol;
from the
These
we have
frozen in here, so
lbs. triscuit,
60
lbs. pilot
this besides
here the following stores: 27 sacks
bread, 80 lbs. bacon, 20 gallons coal
some
of our
oil,
ammunition, which we brought
east.
stores are, of course,
nor are they, even

frozen in.
"We
if
by no means
sufficient for
our maintenance,
taken with our stuff in Smith Bay, where our boats were
here as soon as Dr. Anderson and
shall, therefore, leave
get our letters written
probably next Monday and go looking
for
game.
some specimens of sheep, so he with two

of the Kugruak (on maps " Kigura")
Here we already
River, while the rest of us go west to near Beechey Point.
have 8 deer cached and hope to get more, while some of us will try to get
Dr. Anderson wants to try getting
natives will go to the mountains
by way
seal outside the Thetis Islands,

If
which are
off
shore just east of the Colville.
threatened with starvation, Dr. Anderson will come back to Flaxman
and get the flour from the "Rosie H.", while if we fail to get game, we shall
go westward to Smith Bay where our boats are. Just now we are getting
bit it is our
from one to three per day
some seal here at Flaxman
opinion that these will not last, for the floe ice is very heavy off shore and all
open places
will
soon freeze.
Most
of even those natives
Published in this Journal for March, 1909,
p. 67.
who
habitually
112
is
now have eleven and our natives

the dogs should die, we should be
If
special anxiety
twelve more, inclusive of
for the dogs, I
three pups.
Our
are going elsewhere for the winter.
Flaxman
live at
severely handicapped for
next year.
should have liked to go to Herschel Island
now and up
to Ft.
Macpher-
two months' round trip) to meet the winter mail and reply to any
letters you may send by it, but as Capt. Wolki will gladly carry our letters
to Herschel and as this is the best season to accumulate a little game and fish
son
(a
(before the sun leaves us), I have decided not to
pay
attention to anything
but the problem of making a living.
we shall try to do, we shall incimany of the Colville people probably; if things go
exceedingly well, I may even be able to get far enough inland to see most
When the days get long I want to make a trip to Baillie Island [off
of them.
If
we can
subsist near the Colville, as
dentally see a good
Cape Bathurst] and with open water
expect to
when they gather for trade at the delta village of

map], while we shall also probably be able to do
on Pingok
(the big island off
Beechey Point).
the Colville people
visit
Nirglik [Nigaluk, on the

the much-desired digging
These are the hopes and
plans for the spring.

It is the intention of
Land
He
next year.
Captain Wolki of the " Rosie H. " to winter
says he will take us
(weather permitting) will land us where he lands, or elsewhere
He
will
Island,
We
own incoming
anything we have
wait some time for some of his
and
will take
aboard there
shall therefore gradually take
our
Then we
From
as seems best.
Mogg
tain
in Victoria
shall
last year,
if
we
desire.
for transportation.
winter and either
according
to the
go to Banks Land, or elsewhere,
information secured by natives
Land
Banks-
supplies at Baillie
stuff to his ship this
precede or follow him with our boats to Baillie Island

season and circumstances.
in
and our gear down there and
we now know
who were
with Cap-
there are people on
Banks Land, though none have ever been seen there either by the
English explorers or by whalers coasting along the west shore.
A
their
second
letter written
by Mr. Stefansson two days
early
later considers
need of ammunition and like supplies, and closes with the reassuring
sentence:
"You
have, of course, no reason to worry about us;
we
are
pretty well off."
Many
interesting facts concerning the zoological
tion are given in a letter
work
of the expedi-
from Dr. Anderson under date of October 14;
while definite information as to plans for the immediate future are

stated not only in the letter proper, but also in a postscript under date
of October 19.
S TEFA NSSON-A XDERSOX A RC TI(
'
EXPEDI TIOX
13
Flaxman Island, Arctic Ocean, Alaska,

October
*****!
14,
and
started west with three natives in a whale-boat
1908.
large
umiak about 25 feet long, with the intention of cruising along

We
the coast to Flaxman Island to meet Stefansson early in September.
had seventeen dogs and ourselves to feed "on the country," as we started
with about one sack of flour, four or five pounds of bacon, a little tea and
coffee and about fifty pounds of dried fish.
We had several gill nets and
were obliged to stop and fish a good deal at various places. Fishing was
only fairly good along the coast
we caught from ten to forty whitefish
skin canoe or
nearly every day and a few salmon trout, but could not get very
We
saw seven caribou and
killed
one August
Our whaleboat was
the international boundary.
west of Barter Island, Alaska, on September
We
than usually happens.

safe place on the reef
succeeded
by means
many ahead.
Demarcation Point,
18, at
frozen in at a reef a
about
5,
little
days earlier
fifteen
drawing it up to an apparently
and tackle which we had with us,
in
of block
cached one chest of specimens and part of our goods with the boat and
broke
the
ice
and dragged the skin boat over the sandbars
mouth
of
Okpilak River, taking part
We killed a good many squirrels here

out our commissariat and
made
and
(Spermophilus parryi
as the ice
which helped
As we had only two
was too thin
across the half-frozen tundra to the place where the Hi la
at the
at
us.
for sled travel,
saddles for several of our dogs, and started September 9
from the mountains, and the
The lower
the coast.
mainland
to the
our supplies with
a few "skins" also.
or three days' provisions on hand,
we made pack
of
swift water remains
coast of both the
Hula River emerges
open much
later
than near
Okpilak and Hula Hula froze over
time the "young ice" formed in the sea lagoon.
Snow
fell
on Septem-
ber 10 and has remained on the ground ever since.
At the fishing place on the Hula-Hula River we caught several hundred
salmon trout (two
species),
in weight.
One day we
tember
but
14,
my
many specimens
caught 284.
We
being from six to eight pounds
on Sepand ruined
also killed three caribou
native inconsiderately ripped the hides off
them
for specimens while I was chasing the fourth individual of the herd.
remained up country over two weeks, returned to the coast for our two
sleds, hauled the fish and meat back to our camp on the coast, and started
We
as soon as possible for
Flaxman
with most of our fish and meat.

4, after a
Island, the sleds pretty heavily loaded
We
arrived at
Flaxman Island October
rather hard trip along the coast, owing to rough frozen in blocks
of ice in places
We had
sailing in a
and
salt slush in others.
seen only one family of natives
whale boat
late in
camped
at Barter Island
and two
August, and they had told us that Leffingwell
"
114
Flaxman Island and nobody was there now, as the natives were
mountains. Hence we did not know what we should have to
do on arriving there, as it seemed probable that Stefansson had been frozen
On arriving at Flaxman Island, we found the whaler "Rosie H.
in also.
Captain Fritz Wolki reof San Francisco frozen in and wintering here.
ported that he had passed Stefansson and Storkerson in Smith Bay with a
sloop and a whaleboat * * * *.
Our flour, bacon and all "civilized foods" had been exhausted by
August 30, the coffee very soon afterward, and from that time until we
reached Flaxman, October 4, we were strictly on a meat and fish diet. We
succeeded in pulling through without going hungry at any time, but a man
had
left
hunting
in the
misses the bread after a few weeks.
*****
In sending out part of our supplies from New York, I think it

would be desirable and economical to send at least part of the lighter materials packed in substantial tin-lined chests which could be used for packing
and transporting specimens in the North. The three collecting chests that I
took out with me are filled with specimens (bird and mammal skins) and
cached, one at Herschel Island and two near Barter Island, and I shall try
If I get no more chests, I shall
to send the specimens out next summer.
have to send out these small skins in what wooden packing boxes I can find
or patch together, and take chances of having them damaged by rats, mice
or dampness in a long whaling voyage before reaching San Francisco.
***** If the natives know that a man wants rare or unusual specimens,
they often bring them in, and expect a present of some kind, or at least the
ordinary fur trader's prices. For example, there is a species of badger found
near the mountains a few miles from this coast, rather rarely, and what few
We may or may
the natives bring in are sold for about one dollar apiece.
I have seen a native
not be able to catch a specimen ourselves next spring.
fur coat made of badger skins, and the fur is much denser and softer than
the southern badger, which appears to reach its northern limit on the Atha-
basca River, around Pelican Rapids.

It
is
probable that
we
most
shall pass
of
the winter and
spring in
the neighborhood of Smith Bay, near our "grub pile," spending part of the
time a
little
farther cast around the
mouth
of the Colville River.
Stefansson will probably start west very soon, while
up
go into the moun-
Hula Hula or Ivugura

sheep
before
the
snow gets too deep.
some
mountain
and try to get
This part of the Endicotl Range is said to be the best mountain sheep
tains near
herewith one
of our natives,
either the
River,
country
year.
left in
We
inel
Alaska, and the natives
kill a
good many
one native near Barter Island
in
turned from the mountains, after killing twenty sheep.
seasons of
tin-
who had just

The caribou
are
at all
August,
re-
STEFANSSON-ANWERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITIOX
115
aumbers all along this coast and are said to be working

numbers every year to the 'olville River region and tip
killed in considerable
westward
in greater
towards Point Barrow.
The
natives say that
than those east of the Mackenzie River.
taken at Demarcation Point, on the Canadian
have a
fair series of the
two species
of
made
side,
Yukon
Territory.
ptarmigan found here,
mottled transition plumage, a few small
shrew from the Hula-Hula
the deer here are smaller
have a very dark August specimen
all in
mammals, including a
(at least different
from any
the
peculiar
have seen before).
good many bird skins along the coast in August and September.
is something of an ornithologist, and
Captain Wolki of the "Rosie H."

has collected bird skins and eggs
in the Arctic
He knows the species very well and

He has a house on the Horton River,
where he
and traded
lived
skins there now, including
golden eagle, hawks, and
snow geese
among
gulls.
fact,
nearly
all
Ocean
apparently
He
for
many years. * * *
very close observer.
says he has a collection of
others pomarine
He
Franklin Bay, east of Baillie Island,
for four years.
and long-tailed
jaegers,
has taken great numbers of eggs of the
there, also whistling swan,
black brant, in
is
American white-fronted goose, and

snow goose
the northern species except Ross's
saw one white pelican at the mouth of

at Horton River, both speThe Eskimo, by the way, distinguish
cies being unknown to the natives.
between the different species better than most white men, and have names
and yellow-billed
loon.
Mackenzie River and
for nearly
all
He
says he
six spoonbill
ducks taken
the species.
Mr. Stefansson left for the west to night with Billy Akpek
and expects to spend some time deer- hunting around the
Colville.
I shall start east to-morrow with Ilavinerk and his wife in company with Capt. Wolki's outfit, bound for Herschel Island. We shall ascend
the Hula-Hula River just west of Barter Island for a few weeks hunting
October
and
19.
his wife
mountain sheep, together with any other specimens we can get in the
We shall stay until we get a good series of specimens, or get
starved out, then retreat to Flaxman Island and go westward from there.
for
mountains.
President Henry F. Osborn will attend the Darwin Memorial

at Cambridge University, England, June 22-24, as the
Director H. C. Bumpus
delegate of the American Philosophical Society.
will attend the same celebration as the delegate of the Museum and
then will go to Geneva, Switzerland, to represent the New York
celebration
Academy
of
Sciences at
the
founding of the university there.
350th anniversary,
July
7-10,
of
the
.s -
'Z
FROM THE SOUTH SEAS
A COLLECTION
117
THE FIJIAN COLLECTION.
THE Museum
has recently secured, as a
gift
from Mrs. Morris K.
Jesup, a valuable collection from the South Seas.
containing more
sion,
from the
largely
Fiji Islands
This acces-
two thousand specimens, comes
than
and amply represents most features
of the
culture of the native inhabitants.
The
Fijians, while resembling the Melanesians in physique,
speak
also they share
many
a language related to that of the Polynesians;
cultural traits with the Polynesian inhabitants of
with
whom
Tonga and Samoa,
they have been in intimate contact for a long period.
For
instance, like their eastern neighbors, the Fijians drink kava, a stupe-
fying beverage prepared from the roots of the plant Piper methysticum;
and the new
collection contains
an imposing array of the bowls used
kava making.
Both preparation and drinking are

Young men, in public
in the process of
accompanied by a great deal
of ceremony.
assembly, chew portions of the roots, then deposit them in the bowl,
which
is
afterwards
Next a
with water.
filled
special official
is
entrusted
with the task of straining the liquid, while hundreds of spectators watch
his
movements, imitate
the
kava
after
is
his postures
ready for use, a prayer
and join
is
recited
in a choral chant.
When
by a herald, and the king,
pouring out a libation, drinks from a cup made from the half of
a cocoanut.
To
be served after the sovereign
is
a great honor usually
some distinguished personal service. A curious custom

connected with the kava ceremony is the voicing of a toast after each
awarded
draught.
for
The
drinker
may
express a wish for favorable winds, for
plenty of fish or an abundant crop, or
depending on
his profession.
a feast of yams, taro,
One
is
of the
figs
and
may
some other hope

ceremony is followed by
set forth
Frequently, this
nuts.
most notable achievements of the South Sea aborigines
and here again the

both material and method.
the ornamentation of their tapa or native cloth,
collection furnishes interesting evidence of
Tapa
is
strips of
manufactured from the inner bark of the paper mulberry,

a mallet
and joined together with arrow-
the necessary size.
Pattern-boards or stencils are
which are beaten with
root paste to
make
constructed from large

fibers or twigs
palm
sewed on
leaves, the designs consisting of coarse
to the leaf foundation.
The
cloth
is
placed
over the stencil and rubbed with a dye until the pattern of the orna-
118
mentation
and
is
transferred.
of the stencils
tration on
Fijian specimens, both of the finished product
employed
in its decoration, are
shown
in the illus-
page 116.
of the South Sea area generally, such as adzes,

implements are also adequately represented
tattooing
and
flv switches
There are numerous throwing-clubs, short sticks
in the collection.
terminating in a knob, formerly carried in the girdle and used as the
Other objects typical
instrument of assassination.
of clubs of
The
collection contains a very large series
varying shape; some are obviously recent productions fash-
ioned in imitation of guns.
Many
these
of
decoration, which usually takes the form of
weapons have a carved

a zigzag pattern of some
Part of them are wrapped with cordage, others with a checker

A weapon differentiating the Fijians from their eastern neigh-
kind.
plaiting.
bors
is
the bow,
which occurs
merely in the form of a
in Polynesia
small assortment of Fiji earthenware (page 121)
interest, as all of the
is
toy.
of considerable
Polynesian tribes lack pottery and are obliged to
prepare their food by baking or roasting.
One
of the
most valuable specimens
is
the
model
of a bure, or tem-
This building was usually erected on a platform or mound, renple.

dered accessible by a notched plank. From this eminence the bure
As nails were entirely unknown

European contact, they fastened together the
by means of sinnet, the native cordage, prepared from
rose to the height of about thirty feet.

to the Fijians prior to
posts
and
rafters
the dried fibers of the cocoanut husk.
In the construction of a temple,
an immense quantity of sinnet was used for decorative purposes, so

that from a distance the whole house seemed to be built of braided
Before lowering the corner posts into their holes, the Fijians
cord.
human sacrifices to propitiate the deity of the temple; sometimes

men were placed standing in each post hole and buried alive by the
The setting up of the first pair of rafters was solemside of the post.
offered
nized with a cannibal feast, and a similar celebration took place as soon
The human bodies were baked in ovens.
as the building was completed.
The
forks or dishes used in eating
that
is
death.
human
flesh
were
strictly
"taboo,"
they were religiously reserved for this purpose under penalty of
The Museum
and flesh-racks (page
collection contains several of these cannibal forks

121).
Although serving as a council-chamber,
place for entertaining friendly visitors, and even as a sleeping-place for

the most eminent residents of the village, the principal function of the
a
to
10
'-
MODEL OF BURE OR TEMPLE

Nails being unknown, cordage was UEed to fasten together posts and rafters.
120
A COLLECTION FROM THE SOUTH SEAS

bure was for religious ceremonies.
Here votive
whale's teeth were presented to the deity.

into a trance, during
Here
121
offerings of food
also the native priest
and
fell
which he held communion with supernatural powers,
whose decision on the question
at issue
was afterwards announced
to the
populace.
While the temple

which
of
Xew
illustrated the architectural skill of the Fijians,
superior to that of
is
all
other Oceanians excepting the Maori
Zealand, their craftsmanship in other directions
the variety of their neck-rests

of their combs.
and the
attractive
(See plate on page 122.)
produced
shown by
Oil and food dishes of
are of rather crude execution, but interesting in shape.

effects are
is
open-work decoration
Very
wood
artistic
which are
tastefully
selected
from the
in a wall case in the
northeast
in the breast-plates of shell bone,
decorated with inlaid patterns.
The
objects illustrated here
collection
and other material
have been installed temporarily
corner of the Siberian Hall (Xo. 101) on the ground
floor.
Robert H. Lowie.
CANNIBAL FLESH HANGERS (I AND 3), CANNIBAL FORK (2), FIJIAN

POTTERY (4 TO 6), KAVA BOWL AND CUPS (.7 AND 8).
OBITUARY OF
is
our sad duty
to record the
ethnologist
Museum,
but
who
pedition for the Field

less civilized
who
for
123
WILLIAM JONES.
DR.
IT guished
DR. J ONES
death of Dr. William Jones, a distin-
was connected with this

some months had been on a collecting exfor several years
Museum
of Natural History, Chicago,
among
the
While near Monbato,
tribes of the Philippine Islands.
Luzon, he was attacked by a party of savages on March 28, his thirtywounds from which he died on the same day.
sixth birthday, receiving
This
for
is
truly a great loss to ethnology, since Dr. Jones
work among
at the time of his
was
well equipped
the Algonkin Indian tribes of North America and had
death a wealth of unfinished work, most of which
is
now
beyond recovery.
His college career began as a student at Harvard where he received
Then he took up the study of anthropology

Columbia University, where he received the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in 1004. He was University Fellow 1900-1902 and Assistant
the A. B. degree in 1900.
at
in
From 1904-1906 he was
Anthropology 1902-1903.
Assistant for the Carnegie Institution.
Dr. Jones
collections
made
While
the
Ojibway,
These
collections are quite complete, those
of the
Ojibway containing a
a Research
Columbia University,
Museum,
returning with
Sauk and
Fox Indians.
several expeditions for this
and data from
at
from the various divisions
large series of birch bark charts
and song
records used in religious societies peculiar to these and related tribes.
His chief work, however, was a study of the various Algonkin dialects
Born of a mixed blood

Sauk mother and reared by his maternal grandmother, he acquired one
Algonkin dialect and gained an insight into Indian life not otherwise
easily obtained.
His published works include a volume of myths under
the title, "Fox Texts," issued by the American Ethnological Society;
a general discussion of Ojibway culture, published by the Department
spoken by the Ojibway, Fox and Kickapoo.
of Education,
and "The Algonkin Manitou,"
Toronto, Ont.;
in the
As these represented but a small part
Journal of American Folk-Lore.

of the data collected by him, now buried
He had
in his notes,
it
is
no adequate
knowledge and grasp of the ethnological

problems centering around the central Algonkin tribes, all his own, and
measure
it
was
of his work.
his intention after a short journey to the Philippines, again to
take up the Algonkin problem as his
life
work.
124
Aside from
worth and attainments, Dr. Jones had a char-
scientific
and personality that endeared him
acter
He was unassuming and
to
many
walks of
in all
high sense of honor and duty.
He had
a rare sense of balance and
man
proportion that enabled him to meet with sympathy every upright
on
his
own
Perhaps
horizon.
varied walks of
life.
modest, yet withal sincere and governed by a
why he had
this is
so
many
friends in such
life.
Clark Wissler.
THE EARTH AND THE SUN.
AN
making
exhibit
in the
for the earth,
day and night,
spicuously
accompanying photograph.
is
regulated to rotate on
around the sun.

orbit;
clear the cause of
of the differ-
ences of local time and of the succession of the seasons
The
and
axis
circular railing inclosing
marked with
a strong
its
the
months and days
beam from an
shown
is
four-foot globe, standing

to revolve in its orbit
the exhibit
and con-
of the year indicates the
electric stereopticon represents the light
and heat from the sun.
When
the visitor approaches this exhibit, he sees
the regular swinging of the

globe's rotation.
that the globe
most
is
pendulum
no motion except
of the clock-work that causes the
short period of watching, however, convinces
moving with
him
the passage of the minutes to bring places
directly in the rays of the sun into the full light of
noon time, regions
west of these into morning hours, regions east toward the time for the
"setting of the sun."
stereopticon)
is
hour for the different

they reach and pass
The shadow
of a line (in front of the lens of the
on the globe from pole
cast
localities, as
it;
to pole to
mark
the
noon
one after another, from east to west,
while the time for
New York
City
is
recorded
continually, as the fifteen-minute sub-divisions on the equator of the
globe approach and leave behind this same line shadow.
The
location of the earth in
its
orbit at
any day of the year and the
inclination of the earth's axis are represented as they occur in the heavens.
This exhibit
little
differs
attention
is
from that of the Solar System
in the
Foyer
in that
given to proportional distances and dimensions.
located, at present, in the Central Hall of the
construction of a Hall of Cosmology.
It is
Second Floor, awaiting the
126
THE PHILIPPINE EXHIBITION.
THE
Philippine Hall
is
dismantled and the Philippine Exhibit
prepared at the request of the United States

has disappeared from the
opening day
the
given the same form
harmony
of color
the
of
that
it
Museum
had
and decorative
same unity
effects,
will
It is
but
be given permanent installation

little
more than
only had they no voice
after
which
it
Museum.
this period of paternal
of
freedom
government
equipped for freedom.
feel
government, they had practically as
Not
little
Their tobacco industry was a State

commerce catered to Spanish interests and the
As to education, there was but one teacher to
population. The Filipinos had not even a me-
over Philippine trade.
control
monopoly;
their foreign
merchants of
Seville.
every four thousand of
dium
in the
in the
same
in the Philippine
1(3,
They had known nothing
hundred years, while
them and made them
civilized
remain
October
There,
of idea, the
ten years ago that the Filipinos were in
insurrection against Spanish rule.

for nearly four
had
it
until
Department,
Exposition.
here, the
War
reappear in Seattle on
Alaska-Yukon-Paeific
Building of the Exposition from June

will return to
to
communication with Spanish authority, for the agents of the

church in whose hands rested the management of schools, had kept the
Spanish language out of the curriculum in order to retain their power as
of
and the government.

Then came American occupation in December, 1898; and, despite
the best efforts of the American government, the story of the Filipinos
intermediaries between the people
in the
one.
years immediately following remained in
With lack
many
of understanding of English, with
was difficult indeed for even the most

look upon the American military governor
America as a conquering nation,

enlightened of the tribes to
respects a sorry
no knowledge of
it
and the American army as friends instead
of enemies.
was added
war and continued
until 1902.
and weeds; robber bands
multiplied.
to the ravages of the previous
Rice fields were left to cogon grass

In addition,
typhoons damaged the
hemp
destroyed crops; a "rinderpest" killed
and various
tropical
diseases
Guerilla warfare
plantations; the locust plague
off the draft cattle;
brought
dread results
while cholera
to the
Filipinos
in the
American
themselves.
Slowly out of the blackness of these years came trust
government and a radical change
in conditions.
Children and teachers
~7?
-a
5 5
o
- ^
o o
a =s
K
rt
fee
II
3 O
<5
J3
15 -^
THE PHILIP PISE EXHIBITION

alike were glad to be taught English
schools at once and carried on the
by the
work
129
who
soldiers,
until the arrival of
The
teachers from the United States in 1900.
entered the
one thousand
Filipinos also found
themselves in possession of a share in the government, not only in the

cities
and provinces where two-thirds
of the officials
were elected by the
people's vote, but also in the central government, three Filipinos
government experimental farms where they flocked
practical ideas at the

in
hundreds
modern machinery and methods applied to the

Each man learned that he could cut
see
to
and
They gained
four Americans comprising the Philippine Commission.
growing of Philippine crops.
lumber
free of charge
Many
and a boat.
from the public
hundreds
in the construction of the
forests to build a substantial
of Filipinos gained
new roads and
house
work and good wages
Many
railroads.
an inland
farmer found routes opened by which he could market his produce.
The
lepers
and
their friends realized that the
homes provided
at the
Culion Island Leper Colony were better than any they had ever known.
Prisoners from Manila appreciated the fact that they were
nists" on parole at Iwahig, with opportunity to
work
made
"colo-
in the fields
and
earn the privilege of being joined by their families.
When
new
these facts are borne in mind, the Philippine Exhibit assumes
interest.
It
shows not only what the Filipinos were, and what
commerce were, under Spanish rule, but also

what they are under American influence. It proclaims emphatically
Philippine agriculture and
that progress has been the keynote of

years, despite calamities,
of the Philippine people
and
is
it
to
life in
the Philippines in these ten
suggests that in the future the prosperity
be limited only by the great productive
capacity of the islands.
The
first
section of the exhibit
accompanying
life-size figures
shows Negrito and Igorot huts with
work
represented in the
of
making
fire,
The second section

Moro and other lesser
carrying baskets of food, cleaning rice and weaving.

leads from these most primitive tribes through the
Tagalog and Visayan groups, the most highly civilized of the

Malayan Christian Filipinos. The cases are filled with metal work,
with pottery and basketry and with beautiful cloths woven from hemp,
pineapple fibre and silk; the pillars carry weapons of many kinds,
fishing and hunting outfits, busts of natives, and relief maps showing
tribes to the
the localities occupied in the islands by each tribe.
Continually, however, the attention of the visitor
is
caught by the
130
bamboo trellis
The method here
colored transparencies that surround the entire hall in a
above the cases and some distance from the
walls.
used of closely incorporating transparencies with the material part of an

exhibit is an innovation in museum installation and a most effective one,
not only for the accurate telling of facts but in general artistic result as
In perhaps no other
well.
way could
have been made so vivid
activities
the Filipino people
and
their
but the pictures do more than bring
the people definitely before the eye, they give to a certain extent the
atmosphere of the islands; they show the beauty
and
rivers, the
picturesqueness of the rice terraces that cover the
tain slopes, the difficulties of the
typhoons over palms and
mountain
and meaning
trails,
moun-
and the sweep
of
sea.
There are many other decorative

unity
of Philippine forests
to the exhibition.
effects
which also tend
Fish nets and hemp
fibre
to give
connect
the pillars to shut off a middle aisle, an open space except for seats constructed of Philippine
tunda
is
made
of large
guns,
Filipino
surrendered
McKinley's reelection
the islands
Swung
woods and bamboo and of the stocks formerly

At the center of the hall a roof Manila.
Philippine palm trunks around which are stacked
market places
in use in the
in
during that
six
1900 when more
months
than during any similar period
in
the
conspicuously in the center of this rotunda
charming features
third
is
President
their
guns
in
history of war.
one of the most
of the exhibit, a strange outrigger boat so typical of
the small craft in the far east, containing a
The
after
men gave up
and fourth
Moro
youth, paddle in hand.
sections of the exhibit illustrate the Philippines
under American influence, the former covering agricultural and comHere it is that such
mercial life, the latter, educational and political.
significant facts as the following are concretely set forth
Philippine coal promises to be sufficient in the future for the
needs of the islands.

Philippine forests contain 665 kinds of trees and cover 48,1 12,920
acres.
This
fact
is
emphasized by a wainscoting
surrounding the entire exhibition
most authoritative
of Philippine
woods
representing the largest and
collection in the world.
There were 428 miles
of standard
the close of 1908, and four years

of 1000 miles,
hall,
gauge railroad
more
will
whereas only about 120 miles
existed at the close of Spanish rule.
in
operation at
give the islands a total

of
narrow gauge track
WEWS NOTES
131
Under the Americans 3506 primary schools have been opened,

which number added to the 726 existing in Spanish times gives a
total of
The
4,232 at present in the islands.

cultivation of rice has latterly increased to such
that in 1007 there
had
amount imported
countries only about one-third of the
of
an extent
be brought into the islands from foreign
to
in 1903.
The
Philippines are a commercial center for half the population
the
globe.
The
amount
total
produce sent out from the
of
was 833,007,867, and the total amount imported

was $30,453,810, as compared respectively with sl4,846,5S2 and
islands in 1007
810,102,086
in 1899.
The most important
fact developed in the Philippine Exhibit, out-
side of the increased prosperity of the islands,
is
that
under American
influence the Filipinos are eagerly taking the steps offered toward self-
government and
self
that there
support:
is
administration of justice in
and the people are engaged in peaceful pursuits, that the

United States is not expending any money to assist the Philippine govthe islands
ernment or the Filipinos except
and Navy are
One
in part
in so far as the appropriations for
expended
other fact, however,
is
in the islands.
certain to stand out clearly before every
thinking visitor to the Philippine Building at Seattle, which
American record
in the Philippines is
proud, when this record takes
its
the last issue of the
is,
one of which the world
that the
will
be
place in the history of nations.
MUSEUM NEWS
SINCE
Army
NOTES.
Journal
the following persons have
Museum Life Members, Messrs.

Frederick T. van Beuren, Karl Hutter, Nathaniel T.
Kidder, Charles B. Penrose and George D. Pratt; Mmes. Oliver
G. Jennings, John Innes Kane and Samuel Lawrence, and Misses
P. C. Swords and Anne Thomson; Annual Members, Messrs. J. R.
Bradley, Chas. W. Burroughs, Louis C. Clark, Wm. Crawford,
Robt. H. Engle, Henry P. Fairbanks, George R. Fearing, Harry
L. Ferguson, Arnold Hague, H. H. Hollister, Marc Klaw, Alfred
G. Mayer, Henry Metcalfe, Casimir de R. Moore, William E.
Nichols, George E. Pollock, Thomas R. Proctor, H. Casimir de
Rham, A. W. Rossiter, Thos. Rowland, Charles W. Sabin, Henry
been elected members of the
132
F. M. Smith, Howard van Sinderen, Frederick

Walcott, Horatio Walker and Wilfred J. Worcester; Mmes.
W. Rathbone Bacon, Oliver H. P. Belmont, M. M. van Beuren,
Samuel P. Blagden, Nathalie Bonner, P. H. Butler, Lilian Gillette Cook, Clarence W. Dolan, Thomas Ewing, Jr., Ogden H.
Hammond, H. M. Harriman, J. C. Havemeyer, G. G. Haven, Richard
March Hoe, H. K. Knapp, Lewis Cass Ledyard, Paul Morton, B.
C. Riggs, George M. Tuttle and Anna Woerishoffer, and Misses
Mary Benson, Margaret E. Gale, Alice E. Strong and Eweretta
C. Whitney.
W. Shoemaker,
C.
President Osborn has recently been elected one of the twenty-five

members of the Zoological Society of London and an Honorary
foreign
Member
of the
Royal Academy
of
Sweden.
Professor H. E. Crampton, Curator of Invertebrate Zoology

New York early in May for an absence of eight months on an
leaves
expedition to the South Seas for the purpose of continuing his important
studies
on the variation and distribution of
which he began
1906 for this
in
Museum and
continued in 1907 and
1908 under a grant from the Carnegie Institution.

the North Island of
recent
Museum
in
letter
New
Zealand,
Crampton
Cook Islands,
Professor
devote most of his time to the Society Islands, the
will
a work
terrestrial snails,
Samoa and Hawaii.
from Mr. William B. Richardson, collecting
for the
Nicaragua, announces the shipment of a large collection of
and mammals made during the

altitudes from 700 to 5,000 feet.
birds
last six
in
Among
months
the
at points
mammals
ranging
are
many
species not included in his previous shipments.
will
Dr. Alexander Petrunkevitch, Honorary Curator of Arachnida,

spend July and August collecting arachnida and other forms of
insect life in Texas,
Mexico and Guatemala.
Public meetings
of
Affiliated Societies will
the
New York Academy of Sciences and

Museum as usual during May.
be held at the

Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston. Mass.
its

Vol.
OCTOBER,
IX
No. 6
1909
THE ENRICHMENT OF OUR COLLECTIONS FROM ARCTIC

AMERICA.
UR
members
will
be interested
in the following
telegrams which
were exchanged immediately upon Commander Robert E.

Peary's getting in touch again with the civilized world.
Indian Harbor via Cape Ray, N. F.
September
American Museum of Natural History, 77th

and Central Park West, New York City.
The
Pole
is
Am bringing large amount
ours.
6,
1900.
Street
material for [Museum.
Peary.
New York
City,
September
7,
1000.
Commander Robert E. Peary,

(Steamer "Roosevelt,"
Sydney, Cape Breton, N. S.
Museum profoundly moved. Am delighted with your triumph

Jesup joins me in congratulations. Your flag and route
our polar map this morning.
American
at Mast.
Airs.
posted on
Osborx.
At the time that
this
number
of the Journal goes to press the eminent
explorer has not yet arrived in
awaited with so
dent,
much
interest is
Mr. Jesup, was deeply
original
toward
member
its
Xew
still
on
way to the city.
interested in
of the Peary Arctic
objects.
York, and the material which

its
Mr. Peary's
success, being
ing for men,
and
toys,
an
Club and a generous contributor
Mr. Peary and the Peary Arctic Club have provided the
of the
is
presi-
Largely through Mr. Jesup's interest and influence
previous expeditions with
Eskimo
Our late
much
Museum from
ethnological material illustrating the
Smith Sound region, including summer and winter cloth-
women and
children, personal ornaments, carvings,
games
lamps and other household utensils and furniture, sledges,

133
134
making fire and for boring, knives

bows and arrows and guns of European manufacture
dogs and harness,
and other
tools,
bow
drills for
but native repair, kyaks or boats, together with drags, floats, harpoons,
Some of this material together with a
lances, spears and fishing lines.
great floor
ground
things
of
map showing
floor of the
routes has been placed on exhibition on the
new west
wing.
In the line of zoology,
among
other
Mr. Peary has brought back to the Museum important

The most valuparticularly musk oxen and caribou.
series
mammals,
able single specimens resulting from the Peary expeditions are the three
iron meteorites from Cape York which were brought from the Arctic
regions in 1897 and are
of these weighs
"The Woman"
now on
largest
36^ tons and is known as "Ahnighito," the others are

(6,000 pounds) and "The Dog" (897 pounds).
MUSEUM NEWS
ON
The
exhibition in the Foyer.
account of the part that the
NOTES.
Museum
Fulton Celebration, the current
is
taking in the Hudson-
number
Journal
of the
is
devoted to the special Guide Leaflet which has been prepared

accompany the exhibition pertaining to the Indians of Manhattan
Island and vicinity installed at the west end of the Hall of the Plains
Indians (Xo. 102 of the ground floor). This exhibition is permanent in
to
character and
York
State
is
further illustrated by the volume on the Indians of
New
which has been prepared under Dr. Clark Wissler, Curator
of Anthropology, as editor and issued by the
"Anthropological Papers."
The Guide
Museum
in its series of
Leaflet in separate form
may
be obtained at the entrance to the Museum or on application to the

librarian, and copies of the larger work may be obtained from the
librarian.
The
cetacean gallery on the third floor of the East
Wing
306) was opened again to the public early in September,

closed for some months on account of changes which were
ocean now
(Hall No.
after being
in progress.
extends around the room and
broad frieze representing the

forms an appropriate background for the marine
At the west end of the hall is a
chief exhibits.
mammals which
series of
senting a school of dolphins at play in the water, while
at
are
its
models reprethe east end of
NEWS NOTES
the hall a school of porpoises
prepared
at the
is
Museum from
135
The models were
similarly installed.
casts,
drawings and photographs
<>f
actual
specimens, and the frieze was painted by Mr. Albert Operti.
President Osborn attended
Darwin Memorial
the
exercises at
Christ College, Cambridge, during- the latter part of June and
spokesman
and
of the scientists
institutions
scientific
of
was the
America
in
giving to the University of Cambridge a replica of the Couper bust of
Darwin that was donated to the Museum

York Academy of Sciences.
The
has been
last
the artist,
Mr.
ground
and
F. A. Stokes, has been completed
forms the background of the entire Eskimo exhibit

of the north hall of the
New
North Polar regions which
series of paintings illustrating the
made by
February by the
floor.
at the northern
These paintings
subject of a special illustrated article in an early
will
number
made
be
of the
end
the
Journal.
Professor Bashford Dean, Curator of Ichthyology and Herpetology, spent the months of June and July in Europe, where he visited the
museums of Paris and London. Professor Dean has recently been
made
a Correspondent of the Natural History
Museum
of Paris.
restoration of the jaws of the great shark Carcharodon anguslidcns which inhabited the waters of the American Atlantic Ocean during
Eocene Tertiary time has been prepared under the direction of Professor
Dean and mounted at the entrance to the fossil fish alcove at the southeast corner of the fourth floor.
This restoration, which
is
feet,
10
inches across and has a spread of 5 feet, 8 inches, gives one a striking
idea of the enormous size and fierce aspect which these ancient sharks
must have possessed.
Mr. R.
C.
Andrews of
on August 25 for Manila
the
Department of Mammalogy
to join the
U.
S.
left
New York
Fish Commission ship ''Al-
batross" for a cruise of eight or ten months in the Pacific Ocean, particu-
among
the islands along the western border from Borneo to central

Mr. Andrews goes under an appointment by the U. S. Fish
Commission.
larly
Japan.
Professor Henry E. Crampton, Curator
of Invertebrate Zoology,
136
who
is
continuing his extensive studies on the variation and distribution
of terrestrial snails in the islands of the south Pacific
is
now
in
Samoa,
after
spending ten weeks in the Society Islands and about a month
New
Zealand.
Under date
of July 18 he wrote
the survey of the islands of Tahiti
from Tahiti saying that
and Moorea had then been completed
with gratifying results, since several

covered,
in
new
forms had been dis-
varietal
connecting types and localities previously unrelated.
The
ethnological results of the expedition were satisfactory also, on account
from the old
chiefs of the native tribes
and through
the occurrence of a great annual feast that brought together
many groups
of friendly reception
of people from different districts.
During
of
the
summer word came from Mr.
February 8 giving a
brief
resume
of his trip
V. Stefansson under date
westward from Flaxman
Island along the coast to Wainwright Inlet, which
is
a week's journey,
say about one hundred miles, southwest of Point Barrow and back again
Cape Smythe near Point Barrow, where he spent a large part of the
was below the horizon. Not much can be done
during the dark days of winter, but Mr. Stefansson improved the time
at Cape Smythe, where he was the guest of Mr. Charles Brower, Director
of the Cape Smythe Whaling and Trading Company's station, by making
physical measurements of the Point Barrow Eskimo, compiling notes
on their dialect and transcribing their folk-lore tales, in all of which much
valuable assistance was received from Rev. H. R. Marsh, M. D., Presbyterian missionary and physician of the U. S. Bureau of Education, and
Mr. C. W. Hawksworth, the resident school master. At the time of
writing, Mr. Stefansson was planning to leave Point Barrow the latter
part of February to go eastward to Cape Bathurst and beyond and was
expecting to send a report from MacPherson near the month of the
Mackenzie about the middle of July.
to
winter, while the sun
Messrs. Herbert Lang and James Chapin
Mammalogy
sailed
from
New York May
proceeded on June 3 for the upper Congo
making
this
a zoological
Museum.
The
of the
district for the
purpose of
survey of the basin of the Congo for the benefit of

Belgian authorities have provided every facility
possible for the assistance of the expedition in attaining
Messrs.
Department of
8 for Antwerp, whence they
Lang and Chapin
with their outfit reached Matadi
its
in
objects and
the Belgian
NEWS NOTES
Congo on June
24.
They
in the highlands of the
and
will
made
be
are
now
137
at or in the vicinity of Stanleyville
This place
upper part of the river.
healthful
is
the headquarters from which to set out on periodical
excursions into the surrounding country, until the purposes of the ex-
Mr. Lang; reports that there
pedition have been accomplished.
poverty of desirable animal
Boma and
Matadi, the region being one of barren

however, abounds
ville region,
has been secured for collecting

to
in
all
the
The
hills.
Stanley-
game, and the necessary permission
forms of animal
life,
including the right
capture two specimens of the rare okapi, which seems to be a
of the giraffe family.
is
particularly birds, in the vicinity of
life,
King Leopold has previously shown
member
his interest in
Museum
by the donation of a large collection illustrating the Congo

and now the Belgian government, in addition to the unusual
peoples;
privileges granted, has contributed largely
toward defraying the expenses
of the present expedition.
Mr. C. E. Akeley, the noted
York August
collector of African big
game,
left
New
17 for British East Africa, where he will continue studies
begun during former expeditions and
American Museum.
The
expedition
make
will
will
collections for the
two years,
require
and,
mounted here amid a

reproduction of their natural habitat, will devote much time to making
a complete photographic record of the people, fauna and flora. A movbesides obtaining a group of elephants to be
ing picture camera has been taken for the purpose of getting pictures of
army
ants on the
Three
march and other movements
important additions have been
of animals.
made
the collection of
to
the 6S2-pound iron to be
meteorites in the Foyer:
known
as Guffey,
but as yet undescribed, the section of Gibeon (West Africa) which was
secured by the
1908,
and
piece of this
in
last year, as
20-pound mass of the

fall
January of
The
Museum
noted in the Journal for April,
aerolite
that has been found
"Modoc," which
is
the largest
and was acquired by the
Museum
this year.
upright cases in the gallery of the East
Wing
third floor,
No.
306) are in process of rearrangement to illustrate in diagrammatic fashion

evolution
This
is
among
living
done by means
mammals and
of
relationship with fossil forms.
wedge-shaped cores within the cases around
138
the bottom of which horizontal bands of color represent Cretaceous
and
the great subdivisions of Tertiary time, the space above the bands being
devoted to the installation of mounted specimens illustrating the principal
subdivisions of
meeting
logical
group
surround
mammals.
band standing
in the
Converging
known or supposed
is
lines
extend downward,
for the geological period in

to
have originated.
this effort at graphically representing
which the zoo-
Many difficulties
a natural classification,
hence the present scheme can only be regarded as an experiment subject

to modification.
At
the
May
meeting of the Board of Trustees two classes of member-
ship were added to the
Museum.
Benefactors are persons contributing
or bequeathing $50,000 in cash or securities,
are those
who
Since our
and Sustaining Members
contribute $25 annually to the funds of the institution.

last issue the
following persons have been elected to
mem-
bership in the Museum: Patron, Mrs. Andrew Carnegie; Fellows,

Mrs. Henry O. Havemeyer, and Misses Caroline Phelps Stokes
and Olivia E. Phelps Stokes; Honorary Fellow, Baron Ludovic

Moncheur; Life Members, Doctors John Hendley Barnhart
and Carroll Dunham, Messrs. William G. De Witt, Daniel B.
Fearing,
J.
Horace Harding, Frederick Delano Hitch and Robert
and Mrs. Edward S. Harkness; Sustaining Members,

Mmes. Clarence H. Mackay and M. Orme Wilson; Annual Members,
Messrs. George J. Bascom, Nathan D. Bill, Clifford V. Brokaw,
Franklin Q. Brown, George S. Clapp, Clarence M. Clark, G. D.
Cochran, J. Clarence Davies, Daniel Edgar, John W Edmonds,
L. C. Hanna, Geo. L. Ingraham, William H. Kelly, David Keppel,
LeRoy McKim, Edwin O. Meyer, Robert B. Meyer, A. Pagenstecher, Chas. W. Parsons, G. Ramsperger, J. G. Timolat, John
R. Totten, Elmer R. Vactor and W. A. White, Gen. Alexander
Siialer, Rev. J. L. Zabriskie, A. Alexander Smith, M. I)., Mmes.
Joseph S. Auerbach, Eli Bernheim, Urban H. Broughton, Edwin
M. Bulkley, Daniel C. French, William E. Iselin, William M.
Kingsland, Angeline J. Krech, S. Neustadt, Marion Story,
Robert E. Westcott, Richard H. Williams and Francis Dana
S.
Woodward
WlNSLOW and Missks CAROLINE HARRIOT, [RENE LeWISOHN, FAITH

Moore, Marion Mott, Gladys F. Waterbury, L. Wheeler and
Dorothy P. Whitney.
LECTURES
139
MEMBERS' COURSE.
The
first
Members
of the
persons holding complimentary tickets given them by
Mem-
course of lectures for the season 1909-1910 to
Museum and
bers will be given in
November and December.
PUPILS' COURSE.
The
lectures to Public School children will be
resumed
October.
in
PEOPLE'S COURSE.
Given
in
Tuesday evenings
October
5.
October
12.
at 8:
15 o'clock.
19.
at 7:30.
Mr. Charles Bullock, "Uncle Sam's

trated by stereopticon views.
Mr. Edward Russell Perry, "The
S.
Farm."
Illus-
Pacific Northwest."
Illustrated
October
Doors open
Mr.
Homer
by stereopticon views.
C.
Bristol,
"Northern California."
Illus-
trated by stereopticon views.
October 26.
Mr. Homer C. Bristol, "Southern California."
Illustrated
by stereopticon views.
Saturday evenings
at S: 15 o'clock.
Dr. William L. Estabrooke,

the
first
Doors open
of the College of the City of
of a course of eleven illustrated lectures
October
9.
October
16.
October
23.
at 7:30.
New
York.
on inorganic chemistry.
"Physical and Chemical Change."

"Oxygen and Ozone."
"Hydrogen and Hydrogen Peroxide."
October 30. "Water."

Children are not admitted to these lectures, except on presentation of a
Museum Member's
Card.
140
On Monday
First
New York Academy
Museum
evenings,
of Sciences
The New York Academy
Mondays, Section
of
and
Affiliated
according to the following schedule:

of Sciences
Geology and Mineralogy;
Second Mondays, Section of Biology;

Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry;
On
Tuesday evenings,
as
announced:
The Linnsean Society of New York;

The New York Entomological Society;
The Torrey Botanical Club.
On
The Horticultural Society of New York;

On
The New York

The programmes
lished in the weekly Bulletin of the
sent to the
members
making request
New York Academy
Members
of Sciences
of the
pub-
and
on
Museum
The Indians of Manhattan Island

and Vicinity
A GUIDE TO THE
HUDSON-FULTON EXHIBIT
AT THE
AHERICAN nUSEUfl OF NATURAL HISTORY

No. 29 of the
Museum
in
Guide Leaflet Series.
FIG.
I.
INWOOD ROCK-SHELTER, MANHATTAN.
FIG
FINCH'S ROCK HOUSE
!2
THE INDIANS OF .MANHATTAN ISLAND AND
VICINITY.
By Alaxsox Skinner,
Department
of Anthropology.
Introduction.
AS
a part of the Hudson-Fulton celebration, a special exhibit representing the Indians of

Hall,
on the ground
New York
floor of the
has been arranged in the Wesl
contain implements of stone, bone, shell and
Manhattan Island and in and around Greater

once used by the Indians occupying this region.
be found ethnological objects,
many
surviving Iroquois Indians of
New York
refers chiefly to the
remains of
of
The
Museum.
low, or table cases,
other materials, found
New
York,
In the upright cases will
which are
in use
still
among
may
and take a general view
The
be seen from the accompanying plan.
In using this guide, the visitor

exhibit
the
This guide, therefore,

Indians found upon Manhattan Island and
State.
adjacent shores, examples of which are shown in the table cases.

location of the various cases
on
implements
is
advised to turn north, as he enters the
of the cases in the order designated; then
it
suggested that he follow the discussion (pp. 14-3G) of the various kinds of
specimens found near New York City as he makes a second examination of
is
the exhibits in the table cases.
The Hudson-Fulton
of
exhibition
is
designed to show the
life
of the Indians
New York City and vicinity in prehistoric times, when primitive conditions
The objects
of European settlers.
by Museum expeditions sent for the purpose of
excavating the ancient village, camp and burial sites of the Indians in several
localities within the area indicated, and the exhibits have been prepared
from the remains thus secured. The remnants of the tribes that once
occupied the primeval forests of Greater New York have so long been scattered and lost that almost nothing can be obtained from them now.
were as yet unchanged by the advent
shown have been
collected
Beginning with the northern half of the exhibit, the

first
section of the upright case (l)
visitor will find the
devoted to a few specimens showing
some of the more perishable articles formerly in use among the Delaware
and Mohegan Indians of this immediate vicinity. Most of these have been
collected from the scattered remnants of these people, or
f:om old families who, since the disappearance of the
1
See diagram on page 193.

143
else
were obtained
natives, preserved
144
articles of
Indian manufacture in their homes as
curiosities.
The
other
and weapons of the Iroquois.

The first table section (2A) is devoted to an exhibition, as comprehensive
as possible, showing the life of the natives in prehistoric times by means of
specimens obtained from the ancient village and camp sites. Here may be
seen bones of the various animals, fish and shell-fish upon which the Indians
depended for subsistence; fragments of nuts, corn, roots and other food
products preserved by charring and obtained from ancient fireplaces, and
such implements as arrow points of antler and stone, net-sinkers of stone
all illustrative of primitive methods of
and stone hoes for tilling the fields
hunting and agriculture. Implements exhibited in the same case show the
preparation of animal and vegetable food with primitive utensils, while
The manufactures
close by are tools used by the Indians in preparing skins.
portions of this case exhibit the clothing
of the Indians are illustrated in the immediately adjacent section
A progressive series
of
(2B).
implements shows the making of an arrow point from
a simple quartz pebble such as might be picked up anywhere on the shore,
with the various stages leading to the finished point; the tools employed are
Implements of stone for pecking, grooving and polishing;

and axes; pottery fragments, and household utensils, such as
hammers, axes, adzes and gouges, will be found at hand.
In the other side of this table case (2B) there is an exhibit from Manhattan Island, made up of specimens principally collected by Mr. Alexander
C. Chenoweth in the rock-shelters and village sites at Inwood, showing as
The exhibit
fully as possible the life of the prehistoric Manhattan Indians.
is
especially
illustrating, by means of models, the manufacture of pottery
noteworthy. From the appearance of fragments now to be found on the
sites of the ancient Indian villages of this vicinity and the methods of modern
also exhibited.
hatchets
Indian pottery makers,
we may
earthenware manufactured in
safely conclude that most,
this locality
which consisted of the following
steps.
was made
The
Indians
if
not
all,
of the
by the "coil" process,

first
secured clay of a
make it
which was mixed with pounded
long
rolls,
and
the
into
tougher and more durable. It was then worked
after
coil,
adding
coil
the
by
pot up
Indian, beginning at the bottom, worked
blending or smoothing the coils with a smooth stone until they did not show
from either the interior or exterior surface. The potter's wheel was not
known to the aborigines in the olden days. When the pot was completed,
shell or stones to
suitable quality,
it
was decorated by stamping or
incising designs about the exterior of the rim.
In the next table case (3A) are to be seen implements and remains from
the shell heaps
Hills,
Long
marking the long-forgotten Indian villages at Shinnecock

This exhibit, which is one of the most complete of its
Island.
kind, gives a rather adequate picture of the ancient
life
of these people
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
and
is
number and
especially valuable for the
One
factures shown.
of the
MANHATTAN ISLAND
most interesting
variety of primitive
145
manu-
of the sections demonstrates,
by means of a series of specimens, the primitive methods of cutting bone and

employed by these Indians. Bone was cut by notching or grooving
antler
it
with a stone knife or flake and then breaking
was worked
antler in order to
In the western side of this case (3B) there

collected
Ground
from an ancient Indian

at
Van
village situated
at the groove.
Antler
in general are
is
a series
on the
of
site of
specimens
the Parade
In the adjacent section some specimens
Cortlandt Park.
from Long Island
The
it
same way, but it is very probable that the Indians boiled

make it more pliable and easily cut.
in the
shown.
upright case (4A) at the end contains an exhibit from the Iroquois
Indians of
New York
State,
and the small wall case (6) on the side shows

map showing the location of most of the
a section of a shell heap with a
FIG.
3.
DIAGRAM OF
Indian villages of Greater
and
labels describing the
typical of those
Of
all
left
TYPICAL SHELL DEPOSIT.
New York and
vicinity, as well as
opening and excavation of the
found in the
the traces
shell
sites.
photographs
Specimens
heaps are also exhibited.
by the aborigines along the
the most abundant and familiar are the shell heaps
New York
the beds
seacoast,
of refuse
wigwams. Wherever the fresh water joins the salt and especially where open water for fishing,
a creek with its clam beds and a spring for drinking come together in happy
combination, there is generally to be found some such evidence of Indian
occupation, unless, as is often the case, settlement and improvement have
marking the
sites of
ancient villages,
camps and
isolated
buried deep the shells or carted them away.
The typical "shell heap" is not a heap at all, for leaf mold, the wash
from neighboring high ground and often cultivation have made it level with
its surroundings (Fig. 3).
Very often, unless the land be plowed, no shells
whatever show on the surface, and the onlv way of finding out the conditions
146
of things
below the sod
is
to test with a
spade or a crowbar.
present, their crunching soon gives notice of the fact.
heaps have been located by

rows, or by outcropping in
down by
They
the surf.
If shells are
Sometimes
shell
thrown from mole and woodchuck burgullies washed by the rain, or banks broken
shells
are generally located near
some creek or bay on
low but dry ground, preferably with an eastern or southern exposure, and,
Some have been found
as before mentioned, not far from drinking water.
These deposits con-
fronting on the open Sound, but such cases are rare.

sist of large quantities of
decayed oyster, clam and other marine
shells
mixed with stained earth, with here and there ashes, charcoal and
broken stones to mark the spots where ancient camp
FIG.
4.
CROSS SECTION OF
SHELL
fires
fire-
Among
blazed.
PIT.
the shells are usually scattered antlers of deer, fish bones, bones of animals
and birds
split for
and broken
by the
implements and ornaments that had been
the marrow, quantities of pottery fragments,
implements, in short, the imperishable part of the

Indians.
Now
and
then, perfect
camp
refuse left
carelessly lost in the rubbish or hidden for safe-keeping are discovered.

Little did the Indian think, as
work would never

and forgotten.
he laid away his
see light again until he
and
little
hoard, that his handi-
his people
had long been gone
Shell heaps vary from a few inches to four feet in depth,
a few square yards to several acres

the settlement
Deep
shell
all
and
in
area from
depending on the length of time
was occupied and the number
of dwellings comprising
it.
heaps are often divided into layers, the lowest of which are, of
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
course, the oldest.
MANHATTAN ISLAND
Under and near most
of these deposits
may
147
be found
which are howl-shaped depressions in the

ground filled with layers of stained earth, shells and other refuse, with an
Some pits are as large as ten feet wide by six
occasional layer of ashes.
scattered "pits" or fire holes,
feet deep, but the
average
is
four feet deep by three feet wide.
sup-
It is
posed that they were used as ovens or steaming holes and afterwards filled up
with refuse (Fig. 4). Some contain human skeletons, which may have been
interred in
them during the winter season when grave digging was impossi-
W^
FIG
5.
MAP GIVING THE LOCATIONS OF SHELL DEPOSITS.
Those marked
Pits as a rule, contain
ble.
The
have been explored by the Museum.
more
of interest than the ordinary shell layer.
packed regular masses of shells form a covering which tends to

preserve bone implements, charred corn and such perishable articles from
decay in a way that the looser shells of the general layers fail to do.
closely
Shell heaps, while
abundant along the seacoast, are seldom found inland,
except on salt creeks or other streams having access to salt water.
may
be seen
all
They
along the east shore of the Hudson River at more or
less
148
frequent intervals up as far"as Peekskill, and on Croton Point and between
Nyack and Hook Mountain on the west shore they attain considerable size.
There are a few small deposits, however, composed mainly of brook clams
(Unio) situated on fresh water lakes in the interior of Westchester County.
There are many shell heaps on Staten Island. Shell heaps occur or did
occur on Constable Hook, New Jersey, and at intervals between there and
Jersey City along the western shore of New York Bay. The accompanying
map
(Fig. 5) gives the location of the
vicinity of
New York
important known
shell deposits of the
City.
MS v
FIG.
On
6.
GRAVE OF SKELETONS WITH ARROW POINTS.
the opposite side (4B) of the upright case, the Iroquois exhibition
continued, but the last section
manufacture
of
wampum
is
by the Indians
of
implements and a number of specimens of

lected
from the Iroquois
The
of
is
devoted to a small exhibit showing the
New York
and
Long
Island with prehistoric
wampum
belts
and
strings col-
lanada.
wall case (5) at the western end of the
room contains
group
illus-
trating the costumes of the Iroquois Indians of a period from about
IT'.N)
to
the present
day.
Beginning on the south side of the
aisle,
the easternmost
uprighl ease
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
(7) is
MANHATTAN ISLAND
devoted to the False Face Society of the Iroquois, while the table
case (8A) immediately following contains objects from Westchester
and Staten
life is
149
Island.
shown.
York did
County
In these sections an interesting feature of aboriginal
Although most
of the Indians of the vicinity of Greater
New
not place objects in the graves with their dead, some graves at
Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island,

1S95, were found to contain a great
many
when opened
interesting
for the
Museum
in
and valuable remain-.
With the skeleton of a child there was a great deposit of utensils, both finished and unfinished ornaments, such as beads, pendants, and the like, a
stone pipe and a number of other objects, while not far away the skeletons
of three Indian warriors were exhumed (Fig. 6), in and among whose
bones there were found, as shown in this section, twenty-three arrow points
of stone, antler and bone (Fig. 7).
This is an excellent exhibit indicating the use of the bow in Indian warfare.
The skeletons lay side by side with the legs flexed as shown in the
illustration (Fig. 6).
In the first skeleton, it was found that two points of
antler and one of bone had pierced the body and lodged near the spinal column. Another point of argillite had been driven between two ribs, forming
a notch in each.
A bone arrow point had struck the shoulder and was resting'
against the scapula.
Among the bones of the right hand, an arrow point
of antler was discovered, and there was a similar one near the left hand.
Another antler point was lying in the sand just beneath the body and had,
no doubt, dropped from it when the flesh wasted away. The most interesting wound of all was one where an antler-tipped arrow had ploughed
through one side of the body and fully one-third of the point had passed
through one of the ribs, making a hole, where it remained, as smoothly as if
drilled.
The second body was also terribly injured. The left femur showed
an elongated puncture near the lower end, probably made by an arrow
point.
Among the ribs was the tip of an antler point, and a yellow jasper
one was among the ribs on the left side of the body. Three other points
were among the bones. The third skeleton was likewise an example of oldtime bow play. There was an antler point among the ribs on the left side.
The end of one of the fibular was shattered by a stone arrow point, and a
second point had lodged between two ribs. Beneath the sternum was a
flint point, and the right shoulder blade showed a fracture near the end,
caused by a blow of some hand implement or an arrow. Near the base of
the skull, the end of an antler arrow point was discovered, broken perhaps by
its impact with the occiput.
Two bone points were near the lower bones of
the left leg.
A second point was found upon search among the left ribs:
under the vertebrae was the base of another antler point, and two broken
points were found beneath the body.
150
FIG.
7.
STATEN
BONES PUNCTURED BY ARROW POINTS, FROM SKELETONS FOUND ON
ISLAND.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
The
MANHATTAN ISLAXD
151
position in which several of the points were found certainly speaks
well for the great force
which propelled them.
The
long bows of the local
Taking
Indians must indeed have been formidable weapons.
number
sideration the
bodies of the warriors,
of
it
into con-
arrows which must have been imbedded in the

perhaps probable that the majority of the pro-
is
jectiles were driven into the victims at close range after death.
In the wall case (11) south of the exhibit will be found the model of a
rock-shelter
and
found
typical objects
in
Many
or less permanent places of abode.
New
of
such shelters exist in the vicinity
York, one or two having been discovered
(Fig. 1).
The most important
t-."S ".*>;:/
c t>
layer V.'.'.^x' ?3?
<xt\
cm
lav/ci
8.
Inwood, Manhattan
VERTICAL SECTION OF REFUSE
IN
<<
is
the so-called
'
mm
layer
FIG.
at
rock-shelter so far discovered
name
made more
These, as the
such places.
implies, are protected spots in rocky ledges, where Indians once
^d!i!ia/i,
FINCH'S ROCK HOUSE, ABOUT MIDWAY OF THE

CAVE.
Finch House (Fig. 2) reproduced in the model. The original is near Armonk, 'Westchester County, New York. One point of special interest is the
fact that the
Finch shelter contained two layers bearing
sand as shown
bottom
layer,
it
in the
drawing
(Fig. 8).
has been inferred that we
different races of Indians, the older not yet

stage.
This conclusion,
ment may be due
The
table
is,
relics
separated by
As no pottery was found
in the
have here the remains of two
advanced
however, far from
to the
final, for
pottery-making
the whole arrange-
to accident.
case
8B
contains
collection illustrating the
especially interesting
life
objects
from the Henry Booth

Upper Hudson. They are
selected
of the Indians of the
on account of the number of ceremonial "banner stones"

which are apparently not nearly so abundant any-
found
in that region,
where
else in this vicinity.
152
In the next table case the section
and the following
is
devoted to the
life
some
history of
New
York,
section (9B) shows, as well as possible, the culture of the
Iroquois Indians of central
New York
9A
than the Five Nations of western
of the Iroquois tribes other
New York
and objects used by the Indians of

from the Europeans
State in general manufacture or obtained
upon the advent of the settlers. In the upright case (10A) there is presented
an exhibition of pottery vessels, all but one of which were found within the
limits of Greater New York, and some implements from the Iroquois of the
Mohawk Valley, besides material illustrating the

On the other side, (10B), the entire case is filled
societies of the Iroquois.
with specimens from the
Bolton and Calver collection from Manhattan Island, which will be more
fullv described below.
The Types
of Indian Relics
found in and about
Having now taken a general view
New York
of the exhibit, the visitor
City.
may
ested in a study of the several kinds of relics found in this locality.
somewhat
types are
different
from those found
in near-by regions,
be
inter-
As these
we con-
clude that the Indians formerly living here had habits and customs different
from those
tribes
of their neighbors.
have been called the
For want
New York
of a better
name, these long-extinct

The term Algon-
Coastal Algonkin.
kin designates the language they spoke, while the adjective defines their
habitat.
In the term
New York
Coastal Algonkin, the writer includes the tribes
along the coast from Tottenville, Staten Island, the extreme southern point
of the state, to the Connecticut
boundary on Long Island Sound, including
to a certain extent the shores of
New
Jersey immediately adjacent to Staten
and Manhattan Islands, the east bank of the Hudson River as far north as
Yonkers, and exclusive of Long Island except the western end. From the
examination of the remains of the
in
many
collections,
objects found
articles of
group
is,
may
New York Coastal Algonkin area preserved
both public and private,
it
be roughly divided into three groups:
bone and antler, and articles of

from the imperishable nature of
clay, shell
its
the table cases previously mentioned.
his
own
author has largely
contributions to
American
Museum
Volume
articles of stone,
and metal.
The
first
representatives, naturally the
and comprises a number of sub-groups

commented upon in this paper. Examples of
largest
historical notes the
becomes obvious that the
to be briefly described
this type will
and
be found
in
For the following descriptions and

drawn on Mr. James K. Finch's and
II] of the
of Natural History"
"Anthropological Papers of the
(New York,
1909).
13
12-
15
14
16
1T
18
is
HttMtti
z
'A3
2t
3,7
^ z&
^9
39
38
UHifcif
^45
4T
50
5-,
4#t It?**
58
~~
53
El
Gc
FIG.
9.
6Z,
63
TYPES OF ARROW POINTS.
64
154
Chipped Articles.
Arrow Points
stemmed
are the
Two general
(Fig. 9).
or notched,
types
may be recognized, and
and the triangular forms.
most abundant, and while these are usually
far the
local rock possessing the necessary conchoidal fracture, in
are of material brought from a long distance.
these
The former are by

made of the nearest
some
cases they
Specimens made of pink
resembling stone from the Flint Ridge of Ohio, and of jasper found
have been recorded. Blunt arrow points are
flint
to the south of this region
Indians probably preferring wooden arrows for this type. Many

found in collections, appear to be scrapers
rare, the
of the so-called "blunt-points"
made over from broken arrow points of a large size.

The triangular type has long been regarded by the
vicinity as being the type
used
in
local collectors of this
war, the argument being that as
it
has no
was necessarily but loosely fastened in its shaft and, if shot into
the body, would be very liable to become detached and remain in the flesh
While
the shaft.
if any attempt were made to withdraw it by tugging at
of triangular shape to the
it was no doubt perfectly possible to fasten a point
shaft as firmly as a notched point, the discoveries of Mr. George H. Pepper at
Tottenville, Staten Island, where twenty-three arrow points were found in
stem,
it
and among the bones of three Indian skeletons, tend to strengthen this
While the majority were of bone or antler, all those made of stone
theory.
were of this type, and indeed most of the bone points were also triangular
However, it is well to bear in mind that arrow points of triangular
in shape.
type have been used for every purpose by all the early Iroquois tribes of
New
York.
Spear Points and Knives (Fig.
10).
None
of the early accounts of con-
temporary European writers seem to mention the use of spears (other than
bone or antler-headed harpoons) by the Indians hereabouts, and it is probable that the larger arrow-point-like forms found were used as knives or
cutting tools.
They
They vary
occasionally round or oval.

that one tool
may
scrapers
and
must be remembered
and that drills, knives and
are usually notched or stemmed, rarely triangular,
may have had

often have been
in size,
various uses,
combined
in
but
it
one implement.
Scrapers were probably used
Scrapers (Figs. 10 and 11).
in
dressing
skins, and in sharpening bone implements, woodworking and for various

other purposes. These are usually mere flint flakes chipped to an edge on
one
side.
in their
down
and stemmed forms, requiring some care

Broken arrow points were occasionally chipped
Nevertheless, notched
making do occur.
to serve this purpose.
single serrated scraper has
been found.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
FIG.
10.
MANHATTAN ISLAND
KNIVES AND SCRAPERS.
155
156
These are very rare in both the Algonkian and Iroquoian areas of New
England and the Middle Atlantic States. One very large stemmed scraper,
of a type more common in the far west, also comes from this locality.
These are usually chipped tools presenting an elonDrills (Fig. 11).
gated narrow blade and a considerably swollen or expanded base, suitable
In some cases the base was absent and those
for grasping in the hand.
were probably hafted in wood. Specimens whose blades have a square
or rectangular cross section are very rare.
The
finding of cores
left
in
shows the use of a hollow drill, and it has been suggested

that a hard hollow reed used with sand and water on a soft stone would
produce this effect. To bear out this assertion, it has been reported that a
half-drilled implement has been found (outside this area on the upper
half-drilled objects
Hudson) in which the remains

by its action.
of the reed drill
Rough Stone
Hammerstones.
were found
in the cavity left
Articles.
These vary from simple pebbles picked up and used
in the rough, showing merely a battered edge or edges acquired by use, to

They are generally mere pebbles with a pit pecked on two
the pitted forms.
opposite sides, perhaps to aid
Some have
in
grasping with the
thumb and
forefinger.
many have not, suggesting, when round and

"Chunke" stones, or as implements used only
battered edges, but
regular, a use as
gaming or
Hammerstones, pitted on one side only,

soft substance.
and others with many pits on all sides, occur. These latter may have had
some special use, and are not to be confounded with the large flat, slab-like
stones having pits only on one side, found in other regions, and perhaps
used as receptacles for holding nuts while cracking them. While these are
in
pounding some
common
in the
Large
Iroquoian area, they are
unknown
here.
stones, single or double pitted, resembling oversized
stones occur,
and these may have been used as
hammer-
anvils in chipping flint or
for like purposes.
Grooved clubs or mauls, also showing use as hammers are found.

These are rare and are usually either rough pebbles, grooved for hafting,
as in the case of the grooved axe, or grooved axes, the blades of which have
become so battered, broken and rounded by wear as to preclude their
further use for chopping.
Net-sinkers.
On all sites
near the water, either
salt
or fresh, net-sinkers
show the prevalence of fishing. These are of two types. In one case a
pebble is notched on opposite sides of either the long or broad axis; in the
The
other a groove is pecked around the entire pebble in the same manner.
FIG.
I.
DRILLS,
SCRAPERS AND OTHER OBJECTS.
158
latter
type
is
comparatively scarce, as the former, being more easily and
The modern Cree and
quickly made, was just as useful to the savage.
Ojibway, residing
in the forests
north of the Great Lakes,
still
use pebbles
by the writer were not notched or worked

Occasionally, sinkers notched on both axes are found in this
for this purpose, but those observed

in
any way.
region.
These are usually ovoid implements, chipped from trap rock and
facilitate hafting, and sometimes not.
They usually
show a slight polish on the blade, caused by friction with the ground. This
stone type of hoe is the form mentioned by early writers; but perhaps hoes of
None of these,
shell, bone or tortoise shell, and wood were used also.
Hoes.
sometimes notched to
however, are
Hand
still in
Choppers.
existence.
Pebbles chipped
to
an edge on one
side, for
use as
hand choppers, occur. These are occasionally pitted on both sides.

Grooved Axes (Fig. 12). For the purposes of this paper, the writer,
while aware that many grooved axes are well made and polished, has
decided to include them under the head of "Rough Stone Articles," as by
far the greater majority of the grooved axes and celts from this region lack
the polish and finish belonging to other articles later to be described.
Grooved axes are of two sorts: a, those made of simple pebbles, merely
modified by grooving and chipping or pecking an edge; and b, axes which
have been pecked and worked all over and sometimes polished. The latter
(b)
may
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
be said to include:
Groove encircling three sides of blade, one side flat.

Ridged groove encircling three sides of blade, one side flat.
Groove encircling three sides of blade, longitudinal groove on flat side.
Groove encircling three sides of blade, longitudinal groove on flat
side and opposite.
Groove encircling blade.
Ridged groove encircling blade.
seventh type, having a double groove encircling the blade,
in this territory, but has never
been reported.
may
occur
A specimen from the
River region, just north of the area here dwelt upon,
is
in the
Hudson
Henry Booth
Museum.
While most worked stone axes have been pecked

into shape, a few have been fashioned by clipping, but these seem to be rare.
Grooved axes were hafted in various ways. During the summer of 1908,
collection in this
the eastern Cree living in the vicinity of the southern end of

told the writer that their ancestors,
them by
splitting a stick
and
who made and
setting the blade in
it,
Hudson Bay
used such axes, hafted
then binding the handle
together with deer-skin (probably rawhide) above and below the
specimens of the grooved axe
in the original haft
seem now
to
split.
No
be extant
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
MANHATTAN ISLAND
159
160
from any
hammers.
erally
From
locality in the East.
these axes,
it
may have been
It is possible that
supposed that
in cutting
kinds of woodworking,
the battered appearance of the butts of
that they were sometimes used in lien of mauls or
fire
they
may have been
down
trees,
was used
former being the active agent.
The
used in war.
an adjunct
as
gen-
It is
making dug-out canoes and other

to the stone axe, the
process of burning and charring having
gone on sufficiently, the stone axe was used to remove the burned portion.
However, some stone axes seem sharp enough to cut quite well without the
aid of
fire.
Celts (Fig. 12).
Ungrooved axes or hatchets, usually
called
celts,
are
frequent throughout this area; but are nowhere as abundant as the grooved
The grooved axe
axe, especially near the southern border of the region.
have been the typical cutting and chopping tool of the local
Algonkin. The widespread idea that the celt was sometimes used unhafted as a skinning tool, has no historic proof, but may possibly have
seems
to
The Cree of the southern Hudson Bay region use an

bone for this purpose, a fact which is somewhat suggestive,
although the implement differs in shape from the celt. Celts with one side
From
flat and the other beveled to an edge may have been used as adzes.
some foundation.
edged
the
tool of
worn and hammered appearance of the
that
many of
polls of
some
celts,
it is
possible
these implements were used as wedges in splitting wood, after
constant manipulation in their chopping capacity had permanently dulled

their edges.
The
celts of this region are, as a general thing,
poorly made, a pebble of
an edge ground on it with little or no preliminary

shaping. More rarely, however, they were carefully worked all over by
pecking and polishing, as in the case of the grooved axe.
In type, aside from the general division of rough and worked celts, we
may add that most celts in this region have slightly rounded polls, the bit
suitable shape having
broader than the butt, although some exceptions have been found. The
a, rough stone celts, pebbles with one end ground
forms are as follows:

to
an edge, but otherwise scarcely worked: and
b,
worked stone
celts,
which
include the following:
narrower than
Wedge-shaped,
2.
Like number one, but with
poll
bit
bit,
and angles rounded
much broader
than
poll.
common.
Very
rare.
Cross-section oval.
other beveled at one end to
3.
Like number one, but one side
4.
Like number two, but with cutting edge
flat,
make
a cutting edge.
flaring,
"Bell-mouthed type." Very rare.

North and west of this region, we find the Iroquois
broader than body.
territory
where most
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
MANHATTAN ISLAND
161
worked celts are angular, having almost invariably a rectangular cross section
and squared butt. Types 1 and 3 also occur, but the celt with the rectanguMany small
lar cross section seems most typical of the Iroquoian region.
celts,
made
found
of flat fragments or chips of stone, are also
in this area,
had a use as chopping tools.

In the Niagara watershed and extending eastward as far as the Genesee
valley, an angular adze-like form having a trapezoidal cross section occurs.
It is found principally in what was the territory of the Attiwandaronk, Kah-
and these could
FIG.
13.
scarcely have
HAFTED CELT FROM
Length
Kwah,
POND AT THORNDALE. DUTCHESS CO

of celt 16. G
N. Y.
cm.
or Neutral Nation (an Iroquoian tribe, early annihilated by the Five
Nations).
It also occurs, as
Iroquois proper, but
is
has been stated, on the
not abundant.
sites of villages of the
South of the Iroquois
Pennsylvania, another form which does not occur in this region

celt,
usually of
flint
or other hard stone.
This form
is,
is
in
central
the chipped
however, frequent in
the country about the headwaters of the Delaware.
In the "American Anthropologist," Vol.
9,
No.
C. C. "Willoughby has figured and described the
2,
p.
celts of
296
the
et seq.,
Mr.
New England
THE AM ERICA X MUSEUM JOURNAL
162
These seem
region with remarks on the methods of halting employed.
be two in number, and consist,
to
in the case of the larger forms, of setting the
blade through a hole in the end of a club-like handle, the butt or poll projecting
muck
once
on one side and the blade on the other as in Fig. 13, found in the
pond bottom at Thorndale, Dutchess County, New York, a region
of a
in the
Mahican
territory.
Smaller
celts
were
set into a club-like
handle,
the butt resting in a hole or socket.
These seem to be of two kinds, the first and most simple being
flat on one side, the other side being beveled to an edge on one
The second form differs in having a groove, which is not infreside.
Occasionally, adzes with two parallel grooves occur. They
quently ridged.
were probably hafted by taking a stick at one end of which projected a
Adzes.
celt-like,
short
but
arm
at right angles with the shaft, laying the flat side of the blade
arm and binding it on with sinew, thongs or withes. The

Adzes
course, was of aid in securing the blade to the handle.
against this
groove, of
of stone, hafted in this

coast.
The
celt
manner, have been obtained on the North Pacific
adze seems not uncommon, but the grooved adze
neither form being nearly so abundant as in the
Gouges.
The
stone gouge
is
rare,
New
England
and seems always
to
is
rare,
region.
be a plain,
single-bladed affair without the transverse grooves so frequently seen in
New
England specimens, and hereabouts is always easily distinguished

from the adze. Less than half a dozen specimens have been seen by the
writer from this entire area, although probably quite as much work in wood
was done by the New York coastal Algonkin as by the New England Indians.
Pestles.
The
long pestle occurs throughout the region of the Coastal
is nowhere as abundant as in New England.

used with the wooden block mortar herehave
been
to
abouts, and are mentioned by the early writers as part of the household
equipment of the natives. They do not seem to have been used by the
Algonkin of
New
York, but
They seem always
Iroquois to the north and west of this area either in early or later times.
The wooden pestle of dumb-bell shape seems to have been preferred by

The latter is used by the Canadian Delaware and may have taken
them.
the place of the long stone pestle to a great extent in this region.
and Polishing Stones. These are frequent, and

rounded pebbles, shaped and worn by use, probably most
crushing corn. They are mentioned by De Vries as being used by
Mullers,
Grinders,
consist merely of
often in
the Indians with a
flat
stone slab for grinding corn
when
traveling.
Some
seem to have been used for polishing stone implements, but it seems hard to
draw the line, as the appearance gained from friction would be quite similar.
Such mullers and their attendant slabs, used for preparing corn meal have
been collected within a few years in use among the Oneida Iroquois of New
York, one specimen being in the American Museum collection.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
Sinew
MAX HAT TAX
ISLAXD
These are pebbles showing grooves along
Stones.
163
the edges,
popularly supposed to have been worn there by rubbing thongs and sinews
They occur generally, but
across the edges to shape them.
are not
common.
These are common, but rather local, some sites having

none at all, and others a good many. One locality on Staten Island is notable for the numbers found there, whereas they are rare elsewhere in that
Stone Mortars.
They may be
vicinity.
divided into the following types
1.
Portable mortar, hole on one side.
2.
Portable mortar, hole on both sides
3.
Portable slab mortar or metate, used on one or both sides.
(New
Jersey type).
Bowlder mortar, one or more holes, immovable.

two types are the most abundant, the third is not uncommon;
but the fourth is very rare, only one or two being reported. As above stated,
De Yries claims that the portable mortars were used in bread-making, while
the Indians were traveling, but certainly the majority of those found are
4.
The
first
far too
heavy for
this
purpose.
Pigments and Paint-cups.
Fragments
of pigments such as graphite
and
showing the marks of scratching with scrapers, are found, which

have apparently supplied the material for painting. "Worked geodes are
limonite,
common on many sites. These show traces of chipping in some instances

and may have been paint cups. There is a tiny pestle-shaped pebble in the
Museum collection from Westchester County, which is said to have been
found with a geode of
this
New England
They
region.
shaped stones, grooved
at
Their use
Knives of rubbed
is
The
writer
problematic.
region.
woman's knife
slate,
similar in appearance to
of the
possible that this form (which occurs throughout

its
abundance
worked egg-
rare, in contrast to their
consist usually of small
Eskimo are found, though rarely, in this

While sometimes ascribed to Eskimo influence or contact, it is
the "ulu" or
by
that such geodes
is
one end, probably for suspension.
has seen but one from this area.
Semilunar Knives.
theory
seems probable.
These are very
Stone Plummets.
in the
The popular
this type.
were used as "paint cups" and
distribution,
eastern Cree
common
in
still
New
may have been

it
is
England), judging
native to the eastern Algonkin also.
use knives of this type as scrapers.
England,
New
less
abundant
The
Like most other forms
in the
southern part of this
area.
Stone Beads.
found on some
ants.
On
number
been
Various pebbles generally perforated naturally are to be
sites,
and may or may not have been used
of square beads of pinkish steatite (?), all but
lost,
as beads or pend-
Staten Island, at "Watchogue, Mr. Isaiah Merrill once
and which he claims were found on
his farm.
owned a
one of which have
164
Polished Stone Articles.
Two
Gorgets.
types of the gorget occur.
pendant form, which

type.
It
The
latter
is
These are the single-holed
the less abundant of the two, and the double-holed
rectangular in shape and generally well polished.
is flat,
usually has two perforations a short distance from the middle.
modern Lenape
of
Canada claim
to
The
have used these as hair ornaments.
is typical of the Algonkian peoples of this

form being on the other hand, the most abundant
Specimens of the latter have been obtained in use
Probably the two-holed variety

region, the single-holed
r
on' old
Iroquoian
among
sites.
the Canadian Iroquois,
and some
of
them are
in the
Museum
col-
lections.
Amulets.
Certain problematic articles of the "bar" and even "bird
amulet" type have been found, but these are probably exotic
in origin
and
are not characteristic of the archaeology of the region in question.
Banner
use
may
1.
2.
3.
Stones.
These beautiful polished stone implements
be divided into three great
classes,
of
unknown
with several sub-types as follows:
Notched banner stones.

Grooved banner stones.
a.
Groove on both sides.
b.
Groove on one side.
Perforated banner stones.
a.
Plain.
b.
Butterfly.
All three types
seem equally abundant, but the notched banner stones
appear to be the oldest form and occur under circumstances pointing to
They are found, however, on the more recent sites

Both notched and grooved banner stones are usually more rough
in appearance than the perforated type, and the writer has never seen a
polished specimen of the first class.
On the other hand, the grooved va-
great relative antiquity.

as well.
riety frequently exhibits the high degree of finish characteristic of the per-
forated forms.
Banner stones grooved only on one
than the other forms.

steatite or
some
"While the latter class
and
naturally-shaped stones with
little
common
of slate,
Implements, usually
working, without notches, grooves or
perforations, but greatly resembling the notched
may have
made
easily
rally-shaped pebbles or chipped roughly into shape.
in shape,
side are less
generally
worked material the notched and

the former, are often formed either from natu-
similar soft
grooved forms, especially
is
and grooved banner stones

and
are not infrequently found on aboriginal sites hereabouts
served as banner stones.
plausible theories as to their use.
There seem
to be neither records nor
MANHATTAN ISLAND
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
made
Stone pipes, invariably
Pipes.
of steatite, are very rare.
165
Four
types have been noted as follows

Monitor or platform pipe, platform not projecting before the bowl.
1.
or platform pipe, platform projecting before bowl, with or
Monitor
2.
Of
without tiny carved stem or mouthpiece.
men
3.
known.
Trumpet-shaped stone
the latter, one speci-
is
pipe.
human face carved on front of bowl.

be remarked that more stone pipes have been reported from the
Indian cemetery at Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island, than from all
The second and third types are reprethe rest of the area put together.
sented by one specimen each from Burial Ridge and from nowhere else in
4.
It
Rectangular stone pipe,
may
Four or
this region.
well.
The
five
last class is
pipes of the
first
class
have been found there as
represented by a single specimen obtained by
Mr.
L. Calver at Inwood, Manhattan Island. Undoubtedly the clay pipe

was the most common form used in this locality.
These are not at all abundant, though occurring almost
Steatite Vessels.
W.
everywhere.
They were
doubtless
all
imported from
New
England, as there
are no steatite quarries within the range of the New York Coastal Algonkin.
The single form found is that common in the east, an oblong, fairly deep
vessel with a lug, ear or handle at each
vessels are
ornamented by rude
end
(Fig. 14j).
Occasionally, such
incisions along the rim.
Articles of Clay.
Pottery Pipes are
common
everywhere.
They
are usually manufactured
of a better quality of clay than that used for vessels,
They
designs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
and bear
fairly similar
are susceptible of division into the following classes:
Straight pipe, bowl expanding slightly.
Bowl much larger than stem, leaving it at an angle of forty-five

Stem round.
degrees.
Same as number 2, but stem angular and much flattened.
Effigy pipes, (represented by a pottery human head apparently
broken from a pipe bowl, obtained by Mr. M. R. Harrington at Port
Washington, Long Island).

straight pipe seems to have been obtained only on Staten Island on
While nowhere
the north shore in the region occupied by the Hackensack.
as abundant as upon the Iroquoian sites of central and western New York, the
The
clay pipe
is
New York
rather
common and
(Fig. 15a).
It is
is
a prominent feature in the coast culture of
more abundant perhaps
in the
southern part
166
may
of the area, but this
are
more
well be clue to the fact that data
from
this region
The triangular-stemmed "trumpet"

sites is unknown in this region.
pipe so
easily accessible.
common on
the Iroquoian
Pottery Vessels.
The
may all be considered as being either the native

showing Iroquoian influence with a third and inter-
pottery of this region
Algonkian
in type or
Algonkian vessels
mediate variety.
may
be divided into the following
groups according to shape:

bottom,
pointed
Conical,
1.
largest at the
slightly
swollen
the typical Algonkian pot of
mouth,
2.
Like number
3.
Bottom pointed,
1,
but
much rounder and
sides
sides,
circumference
this area, Fig. 14a.
broader, Fig. 14b.
slightly swollen,
neck
slightly constricted,
Fig. 14c.
4.
Identical with
number
2,
except that just below the beginning of the
neck, occur small raised lugs, ears or handles.
This
is
rare
from
this area,
Fig. 14d.
5.
Rounded bottom, somewhat constricted

down and back, Fig. 14e.
neck, lip sometimes flaring,
or even turning
The
6
intermediate types are as follows
Rounded bottom,
constricted neck,
narrow raised rim or
collar,
Fig. 14f.
7.
Like number
than round, heavier

of small
humps
6,
but with sides more elongated and bottom more oval
collar, generally
notched angle, with or without a series
or projections at intervals, Fig. 14g.
The Iroquoian types are as follows:

Mouth rounded, collar or rim heavy, with humps or peaks at
8.
angle notched, neck constricted and bottom rounded;
an unknown feature
9.
angle.
Same
as
Much
in local
number
less
7,
common
Algonkian
intervals,
can stand by
itself,
vessels, Fig. 14h.
but with mouth square, and

than the preceding, Fig.
humps
at every
14i.
In size, the vessels range from small toydike pots to jars of very large
In general they appear to have been made by the coil process,

and are tempered with pounded stone or fine gravel, mica or burned or
pounded shell. Sherds showing tempering by fibre or some other substance
When vessels were cracked or
that disappeared in firing are rarely found.
broken, a series of holes was bored opposite each other on either side of the
capacity.
break and the parts laced together, rendering the vessel capable of storing
dry objects, at
least.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
MANHATTAN ISLAND
167
Life forms are exceedingly rare in local ceramic art.
From Manhattan
Van Cortlandt Park, there come a number of specimens showing incised human ?) faces.
This is not an uncommon form on Iroquoian
sites in central and western New York.
On the Bowman's Brook site at
Island and
Mariner's Harbor, Staten Island fragments of a typically Algonkian pot

were obtained which bore at intervals, rude raised faces. With the sole
exception of a rather well-modeled clay face, apparently broken from the
FIG
bowl of a pipe
14.
POTTERY FORMS OF THE COASTAL ALGONKIN.
(Fig. lob)
found
at Port
Washington, Long Island, by Mr.
M.
R. Harrington, this brief statement concludes the list of pottery life

forms reported from this area, although others may yet be found here,
since
some
interesting objects
have been collected
in
immediately adjacent
territory.
The forms
paddle, and
of decoration consist of
incision
(Figs.
10 and
stamping with
17.)
stamp, roulette or
Occasionally, but
very rarely.
168
work
stucco
occurs.
Under stamping we can enumerate the following
processes
1
Impression with the rounded end of a stick
2.
Impression with the end of a
depression with a tiny
lump
quill,
(rare).
or hollow reed, leaving a circular
or nipple (rare) in the center.
Impression with a section of a hollow reed, making a stamped
3.
circle
(rare)
Impression with finger nail (doubtful, but perhaps used on some
4.
sherds from
Manhattan
Island).
5.
Impression of the edge of a scallop shell.
6.
Impression with a carved bone, antler or wooden stamp.
7.
Impression of a cord-wrapped
8.
Impression with roulette.
FIG.
stick.
TYPICAL ALGONKIAN POTTERY PIPE AND
15.
FRAGMENT OF AN EFFIGY
PORT WASHINGTON,
Under the head
we can enumerate the

made with a stick.
possibly made with a Hint object
of decoration
by
PIPE
FROM
incision
following:
Incised decoration, probably
9.
Incised
10.
decoration,
(only one
.specimen at hand).
The paddle was frequently used to finish the sides and bottom of the pot
by imparting an appearance of pressure with fabric when the clay was wet.
Stucco.
Occasionally, ridges of clay placed on the rim for orna11.
ment appear to have been added after the shaping of the vessel.
Ornamentation is usually external, and vessels, either Algonkian or
Iroquoian, are rarely ornamented below the rim, although occasionally the
way down the side in the case of the Algonkian forms.

Where decoration has been applied by one of the stamping processes, and
designs run part
more
rarely by incision,
it
inch or less on the inside.
ami
is
is
sometimes continued over the
This only occurs
in the typical
never seen when incised ornamentation
quoian
vess<
Is
are never
ornamented on
;i-i
die
first
of the
vsr<\.
The
die interior, nor
frequently practised on vessels of this class.

!i
is
lip or
The
rim for an
Algonkian forms,
is
rims of Iro-
stamping so
intermediate forms,
two mentioned, arc frequently ornamented on the
at
interior
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
FIG.
from
a'
16.
MANHATTAN ISLAND
169
INCISED DESIGNS FROM POTTERY VESSELS.
an Algonkian vessel; e, design

b, and d, designs from Iroquoian vessels; c, design from
here for comvessel of the Iroquoian type from a Connecticut rock-shelter, introduced
parison.
170
This internal decoration
of the lip.
is
much more common
in the
southern
portion of this area than elsewhere in the vicinity.
we must
In design,
symbolism,
to
if
of course, give
up
all
thought of trying to obtain
such there were, for there are no sources
base our assumptions.
now
left
upon which
Certain conventional types of decoration seem
stamped or incised paraland much more rarely of dots regularly arranged in the same manner.
Zigzag, chevron and "herring bone" patterns are the most common, but
other angular forms occur, and rows of parallel lines encircling the vessel
are sometimes to be found.
Stamping and incision as decorative processes
never seem to occur on the same vessel. Curvilinear decoration is exceedto have been in vogue, usually consisting in rows of
lel
lines
ingly rare,
and not enough material is at hand

some form.
used, possibly these were scrolls of

material,
it
to
show
On
that patterns were
account of the lack of
cannot be determined whether the designs on the Algonkian
&
7FIG.
vessels differ
17.
INCISED DESIGNS FROM ALGONKIAN VESSELS.
from those on the Iroquoian, except
a very general and
in
unsatisfactory way.
The
angle formed where the heavy rim or collar leaves the constricted
is almost invariably notched, and as such collars

and angles do not occur on vessels of the true Algonkian type, this feature is
necessarily absent from them.
It is noticeable that Iroquoian vessels are
neck of the Iroquoian vessel
usually decorated with incised designs, rather than stamped patterns.
Pottery
is
found abundantly on the majority of the
but, while very
much more common than
in the
New
sites in this district;
England
not equal in abundance that from the Iroquois country.
area,
It is rarely
it
does
found
when sometimes
some distance from the human
remains and apparently not connected with them. Whole or nearly whole
vessels are exceedingly rare and the number of those found up to date may
buried in graves with skeletons as in the Iroquoian area;
found
in graves,
however,
it
is
usually at
easily
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
MANHATTAN ISLAND
be counted upon the
Potsherds taken from pits or shell
fingers.
171
heaps, where they have not been exposed to the action of the weather, are
often as thickly covered with grease as
when
they were broken and cast aside.
Articles of Metal.
of native metal, consisting simply of pieces of
Beads
Beads.
hammered
sheet copper rolled into small tubes, have been found, but they are very
Copper
rare.
salts,
but no objects, were found upon the bones, especially
on those of the head and neck, of a child's skeleton at Burial Ridge, TottenA
ville, Staten Island, which seemed to predicate the use of copper beads.
many beads
great
of olivclla shell,
some
of
them discolored by copper
were found about the neck of the skeleton.

to
have been found
slightly
single celt of copper
salts,
is
said
Westchester County, probably on Croton Neck,
in
above the limit of the
1
territory treated in this paper.
Articles of Shell.
Wampum.
New York
the coast region of
was one
pum
manufacture on the continent,
from
local sites.
With the exception
have been shipped into the

manufacture.
(blue)
The
We
interior,
forations to
all sites,
may
in steps until the
at the end,
make
of completed beads,
wampum,
most
be found
be shown by
shells
the finished white
wampum
which may
"black"
far not reported.
with the outer whorls
innermost solid column
and needing only cutting
of
in all stages of
for traces of the
from the hard clam or quahog are so
process of manufacture
and polished
all
of the best
wampum may
refer to the white
wampum made
broken away
common, and notwithstanding

known localities for wamwampum beads are almost unknown
Objects of shell are not at
is
reached, ground
and perThese do not occur on
off into sections
bead.
though they have been found here and there throughout the region.
away were
Ninety-six conch shells with the outer whorls broken entirely
found
in
a grave at Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island, about the head
and neck
of a skeleton.
Pendants.
Occasionally oyster and clam
for perforations in them,

tainly
have
little aesthetic
Scrapers.
Clam
shells
may have been
shells,
found unworked save
pendants or ornaments, but cer-
value.
seem
to
have been used as scrapers and some are
Native copper occurs in the New Jersey trap ridges, within a few miles of New York
an important source in Colonial times being near Boundbrook 30 miles from the lower
Editor.
end of Manhattan Island. Bowlders of native copper occur in the glacial drift.
1
City,
172
occasionally found with one edge showing the effect of rubbing
and wearing.
These are rare, however. Some may have been pottery smoothers. Clam
shells have been reported which contained central perforations and were
identical in appearance with some shell pottery scrapers and smoothers colContemporary
lected by Mr. M. R. Harrington among the Catawba.
writers mention the use of knives
Pottery Tempering.
made
of shell.
This was sometimes done with calcined and pounded
uncommon, considering the abundance of the material at

Pounded stone or gravel seems to have been more favored.
The corrugated edge of a scallop shell was frequently
Pottery Stamps.
used as a stamp for pottery, as may be seen by examining the potsherds
shells,
but was
hand.
from
this region.
Articles of Bone and Antler.

Objects of bone and antler, while perhaps more abundant here than
New
England, are far
quoian area.
less plentiful in
Cut bones are frequent
form and number than

in
most
shell pits
were cut by grooving the bone partly through on
and heaps.
all sides,
in
in the Iro-
They
probably with a
and breaking.
Bone Awls. These utensils are the most common of all bone articles
Some are
in this region and are found in almost every part of the area.
merely sharpened slivers, but others show a considerable degree of work,
and are well finished and polished. They are usually made of deer or other
mammal bone, but sometimes from the leg bones of birds.
In some instances, the joint of the bone is left for a handle, but this is
Grooved, perforated or decorated bone awls are extremely
often cut off.
rare in this region.
While it is generally considered that these bone tools
were used as awls in sewing leather, as by modern shoemakers, nevertheless,
hey may have served as forks in removing hot morsels from the pot or for a
number of other purposes. The latter supposition is supported by the
abundance of bone awls found in some shell pits. The northern Cree of
the Hudson Bay region use a similar bone implement as the catching or
striking pin in the "cup and ball" game.
Bone Needles. These are rare, but found in most localities. They are
generally made of the curved ribs of mammals and are six or eight inches
Hint knife,
They
midway between the
long, or even longer.
are generally broken across the eve, which
usually
ends.
few with the perforation
at
is
one end
have been reported.
Bone Arrow Points, usually hollow and
conical in shape, have been found.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
especially at Tottenville, Staten
rather rare, but this
may
their preservation
in
be due
most
MANHATTAN ISLAND
Island,
in
the Burial
Ridge.
173
They
are
to the fact that conditions are not suitable for
localities.
Others arc
flat
and triangular
in
shape.
No
Harpoons.
barbed hone harpoons, such as occur
actual
in
the
Iroquois country have been reported from this region; although the writer
has seen what appeared to be part of one from Shinnecock Hills, Long
Island,
in the
shaft.
whence comes a harpoon barb of bone, found by the writer, now

collection, which was apparently made to tie to a wood* n
While neither of these forms seems to occur within this region, several
Museum
naturally barbed spines from the tail of the sting-ray, found on the
man's Brook
site,
at Mariner's
may have
Bow-
been used
which purpose they were admirably suited by
as harpoons or fish spears, for
nature.
Harbor, Staten Island,
Long, narrow, chipped stone arrow-heads are generally called
seem peculiarly adapted fortius purpose and

No bone fish hooks are reported from
hereabouts, though suggested by early writers.
Bone Beads and Tubes. While so abundant on Iroquoian sites, tubes
and beads made of hollow bird or other animal bones, polished and cut
"fish points", but they do not
the
name
is
probably a misnomer.
in sections, are
Draw
very rare here.
Shaves, or Beaming Tools,
made
and probably tised for

bone of a deer's
leg, leaving a sharp blade in the middle with the joints on either end as handles.
The writer has seen none from this immediate region, but they are
reported by Mr. M. R. Harrington. A number were obtained for the
Museum by Mr. Ernst Volk in the Lenape sites near Trenton, New Jersey.
An implement, evidently made of the scapula of a deer, and perhaps used as a
scraper, was found in a grave at Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island, by
Mr. George H. Pepper.
Worked Teeth. Perforated teeth of the bear, wolf and other animals,
so abundant on Iroquoian sites never seem to be found here.
Beavers'
teeth, cut and ground to an edge, occur, and may have been used as chisels,
or primitive crooked knives, or both, as they were till recently by some of
the eastern Canadian Algonkin.
Other cut beaver teeth may have served
removing the hair from
skins,
of bone,
were made by
splitting the
as dice or counters in gaming.

Turtle Shell Cups.
These are common, and
consist merely of the
bony
carapace of the box turtle (Tranene Caroline), scraped and cleaned inside,
away from
the ribs being cut
unworked, occur
they usually
in all shell
show
at
the covering to finish the utensil for use.
Deer
and fragments of antler, worked and

pits.
When whole antlers are found,
the base the marks of the axe or other implement used
Antler Implements.
antlers
heaps and
174
Cut antler prongs, prongs broken from the

to detach them from the skull.
main shaft and others partly hollowed and sharpened show the process of
manufacture of antler arrow points. These are characteristic of this area
and are usually conical in shape, hollowed to receive the shaft, and with one
or more barbs; not infrequently, however, they are diamond-shaped in
cross section.
The
shaft fitted into the hollow socket as in the case of the
conical bone arrow points.
bones of
human
number were found
large
in
and among the
skeletons in a grave at the Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten
Island.
Cylinders, neatly cut
and worked
all
over, or cylindrical tines
made
of
deer antler only cut and rounded at the ends, are not infrequent, and were
probably used as flaking tools in making and finishing arrow points by

pressure.
One broken
cylinder or pin, found on the
Bowman's Brook
Mariner's Harbor, Staten Island, had a rounded, neatly carved head.
site,
This
specimen, however, seems to be unique.

Pottery stamps, perhaps of antler or bone, but which
seem
to
may
be of wood,
have been used, judging by the decorations of many pottery sherds.
pottery stamp, carved from antler, was found slightly east of this region,
at Dosoris,
in the
Glen Cove, Long Island, by Mr. M. R. Harrington, and
Museum
is
now
collection.
Trade
Articles.
In spite of the frequent mention by old writers of barter of European for
Indian goods, the amount of trade material found

is
abundant
sists of
in the
Iroquoian area,
plain,
bowl.
is
small indeed.
While
it
that has ever been found here con-
a few round-socketed iron tomahawks, iron hoes, brass or copper
arrow points of various
and
all
styles,
and some old
little
porcelain, a few glass beads, Venetian
stamped "R. Tippet" on the

and for this no adequate expla-
pipes, notably those
All these articles are very rare here,
nation can be given.
Resume.
This area was inhabited during
by the following tribes:

A. The Lenni Lenape, or Delaware, ranging from the Raritan River,
including Staten Island, to Saugerties on the west bank of the Hudson.
historic times
1
On the map (Fig. 18), these tribes are shown together with the Long Island and other
neighboring tribes as indicated by Beauchamp in the map accompanying his "Aboriginal Occupation of New York," Niv, York State Museum, Bulletin 32, Albany, 1900.
MANHATTAN ISLAND
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
17.")
Raritan or Assanhican.
Hackensack.
Tappan.
Aquakanonk.
Havers traw.
'
FIG
18.
^^
'
MAP SHOWING THE LOCATION OF THE NEW YORK COASTAL ALGONKIN AND
THEIR NEIGHBORS.
Waranawankong.
B.
The Wappinger Confederacy ranging along
Hudson, eastward
to Connecticut,
Rechgawawank
the east
from Manhattan Island.
or Manhattan.
bank
of the
176
Siwanoy.
Weckquaskeck.
Wappinger.
Montauk
C.
Matouwack Confederacy.
or
Canarsie.
These
who
stock,
tribes
were surrounded on
differed
somewhat
in their
all
by neighbors
sides
language and culture.
of the
On
same
the south
and west, lay the Lenni Lenape, or Delaware proper; on the north, the
Manhattan, and on the east the New England tribes. Almost without
exception, these natives were displaced early in the history of this country,
and have been long since expatriated or exterminated. A very few mixed
bloods may yet be found on Staten Island, Long Island and in Westchester
County, but their percentage of Indian blood
The remains
of aboriginal life
now
to
is
extremely low.
be found, consist of shell heaps,
occurring at every convenient point along the coast, on the rivers, and,
rarely, inland; shell, refuse, and fire pits; camp, village and burial
and rock and cave shelters. With one prominent exception, 1 few or no
The typical interment was of the flexed
relics have been found in graves.
variety, but bone burials are not infrequent.
Dog skeletons complete and intact, bearing the appearance of having
more
sites;
been laid out, are sometimes found buried in separate graves.
Some
writers
have supposed that these individual dog burials are the remains of "white
dog feasts" or kindred
practices, because the Iroquois even
day hold such ceremonies. The white dog is

quois, and so far as we have been able to find
occurrences
among
attribute this
It
entirely
up
to the present
cremated by the Iro-
out, there
is
no record of such
the coastal Algonkin; hence, there seems no reason to
custom
to
them
since other Iroquois traits were so infrequent.
seems more probable that such burials are simply those of pet animals,
interred as
we to-day honor a
faithful dog.
Occasionally, the skeletons of dogs and rarely of other animals have been
found
in
among
graves associated with
human
bones.
The
finding of arrow-heads
and other circumstances, seem to point to a

animal
on the death of its owner to accompany
practice of killing a favorite
journey to the hereafter.
master
on
the
or protect the spirit of its
From their appearance and position, many graves seem to indicate that
llit- dead may sometimes have been buried under the lodge, especially in time
of winter, when the ground outside was frozen too hard to permit grave
Others under the same circumstances seem to have been buried
digging.
the ribs of
in refuse pits.
some
of these,
The remains
1
further indicate that "feasts of the dead,'' were
Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Slaten Island.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
MANHATTAN ISLAND
also held at the time of the interment, judging
and animal bones
in
and near
177
by the quantity of oyster sin lis

graves have rows or layers
Some
the graves.
upward, placed above the bodies
of oyster shells, with the sharp cutting edge
animals from disinterring and devouring the dead.

An interesting fact, brought to light by the rock-shelter work of Messrs.
Schrabisch and Harrington in their explorations in New Jersey and West-
as
if
to prevent wild
chester County,
New
and oldest refuse layers of

would be ill advised to infer from
occupants were peoples of another culture from the
York,
that in the lowest
is
these shelters pottery does not occur.

this that the earliest
It
surrounding village dwellers, as the other artifacts found are quite similar
Many reasons for this lack of pottery, such
to the implements of the latter.
as the
more easy transportation
mountains and
hills,
bark or wood through the
of vessels of
suggest themselves, though they are more or less nul-
by the presence of pottery in the upper layers. The upper layer,

may have been made during the period when the natives were
being displaced by Europeans and at the same time subjected to Iroquoian raids, when the villages would naturally be abandoned from time
to time, for refuge among the cliffs and caves of the mountain fastnesses.
It has been suggested that the rock and cave shelters are remains of an
older occupation by people with or without the same culture as the later
lified
however,
known
savages.
The nature
of the finds does not support this view, for the
specimens obtained are often of as good workmanship as the best to be found

in the villages and cemeteries of the latter, while pottery, on the other hand,
occurs on the oldest
known Algonkian
writer that, like the shell
sites.
It
seems most probable to the

shelters form but a com-
heaps, the rock and cave
ponent part, or phase, of the local culture, perhaps a little specialized from
usage and environment, but contemporary with the villages, shell heaps
and cemeteries of the lowlands.

Mounds and earthworks do not occur
nor does it appear that most of the Indian
they were slightly stockaded.
historically,
in the region
under consideration,
villages here
were
A number
fortified,
of instances of this are
however, and a few earthworks occur just beyond
unless
known
this area.
not bear any appearance of very great geological

rock-shelters, shell heaps and village sites
instances,
few
In a
antiquity.
but the oldest known remains, in every
antiquity;
relative
possess
a
seem to
The remains found do
may be placed as Algonkian with considerable certainty. No paleohave

been reported, and it would seem from the comparative lack of
liths
of
the remains that the natives could not have lived in this region
antiquity
case,
for
many
centuries before the advent of the whites.
i
An earthwork at Croton Point on the
ton for the American Museum.
The accounts
Hudson has been excavated by Mr. M.
of con-
R. Harring-
178
temporary writers prove conclusively that these archaeological remains, if

not those left by Indians found here by the early Dutch and English settlers,
must have been from people
of very similar culture.
In culture, the local
Indians were not as high as the Iroquois, nor perhaps as the Lenape or Dela-
ware proper from whom they sprang; but they compare very favorably with
Absence and scarcity of certain artifacts such as
the New England tribes.
long stone pestle, the gouge, adze and plummet, and the
steatite vessels, the
abundance and character

been intermediate
of
bone and pottery
in character
show them
articles
to
have
between the Lenape on the south and west,
New England tribes on the east and north; and consultations of

European contemporaries show that this was the case linguistically
Examination of the remains also shows that the
as well as culturally.
influence of the Lenape on the west, and of the New England peoples on the
and the
the old
was most strongly felt near their respective borders. Iroquoian inwas strong, as evinced by the pottery, and there is also documentary
evidence to this effect. Finally, as is frequent throughout most of eastern
east,
fluence
North America, the archaeological remains may be

belonging to the native Indian tribes
who
definitely placed as
held the country at the time of
its
discovery or to their immediate ancestors.
Historical Notes on the Indians of Manhattan.
Historical references to the Indians
who occupied
this territory in the
and contradictory. There seems to be a

Van der Donck
great deal of trouble in the use of the word Manhattan.
in 1633 classified the Indians of this section by language, and said, "Four
namely Manhattan, Minqua, Savanos and Wapdistinct languages
"With the Manhattans we include
are spoken by Indians.
panoos"
those who live in the neighboring places along the North River, on Long
early days are very confusing
and
Island,
at the Neversinks."
It is
probable that "it was.
.this clas-
by dialect that led the Dutch to the adoption of the generic title
of Manhattans as the name of the people among whom they made settlements." 3 De Laet wrote that "on the east side, on the mainland, dwell the
Manhattans," and in 1632 Wassenaer adds that they are "a bad race of
savages, who have always been unfriendly to our people" and that "on the
sification
west side are the Sanhikans,

tans."
''
"When Hudson
1
2
:
<
who
are the deadly enemies of the
Manhatnow
returned from his trip up the River which
paragraph by James K. Finch.

Wilson, Memorial History of N. Y., Vol.
First
Ibid., p. 49.
Ibid., p. 34.
I,
p.
:?4.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
MANHATTAN ISLAND
179
bears his name, he was attacked by Indians in birch or dug-out (?) canoes
mouth of Spuyten Duyvil (reek. These Indians were a sub-tribe of

Wappingers or Wapanachki called the Reckgawawancs."
This
name seems to have been given to the Indians who inhabited Manhattan
Island, while the term Manhattans as already stated was a classification of
at the
the
'
dialect only.
their chief
Ruttenber says that the Reckgawawancs were named after
Rechgawac;
and the name
part of the island for Riker says that,
also seems to have been applied to
"The
claim to portions of the Harlem lands,.
Indians
still
[in
1669] laid
.one of the tracts being their old
and
favorite haunt Rechewanis, or Montague's Point.

The chief claimant
was Rechewack, the old Sachem and proprietor of Wickquaskeek, who, as
far back as 1639, had been a party to the sale of Ranachqua and Kaxkeek."
Not much is known of their habits and customs beyond what has been
inferred from the relics to be seen in this exhibit, but Mr. Bolton writes:
:
"
We
are not without detailed description of our primeval predecessors
upon the
island of
Manhattan,
for the Hollanders recorded
many
of their
We may
assume that they possessed the usual characteristics, the stolid demeanor, the crafty methods, and
revengeful nature of the Indian, all of which were exhibited in their dealings
with the White intruders. These local bands appear to have had, in addition,
some particular local habits. They painted their faces with red, blue, and
impressions of aboriginal peculiarities.
yellow pigments, to such a distortion of their features, that, as one sententious
Dominie expressed
it,
'They look
ence on supplies of game and

another, semi-annually, and
ground'
in
fish
like the devil
himself.'
Their depend-
caused their removal from one place
we read
of their
removal
to a
summer
to
'hunting-
Westchester, whence the band returned to 'Wickers Creek,'
and to resume their occupation of oystering and fishing

Harlem and Spuyten Duyvil Creek.
"As for dress, 'They go,' said Juet, 'in deerskins, loose well-dressed,
some in mantles of feathers, and some in skins of divers sorts of good furres.
They had red copper tobacco pipes, and other things of copper they doe
for the winter shelter,

in the
weare about their neckes."

"
No
copper objects have been found
metallic stock
was bartered away with
in
upper Manhattan, probably
their
the early colonists, for in 1625,
De
Laet described their use of 'Stone pipes for smoking tobacco.'

" As regards their food, the evident abundance and size of the local oyster
shells shows that they possessed in them a ready source of subsistence.
As
soon as Hudson's ship reached the neighborhood of Greenwich, where the
1
Ibid., p. 46.
Ruttenber, op. cit., p. 78.

History of Harlem, p. 287.
180
Indian Village Sappokanikan was located, the natives 'brought great store
good oysters aboard, which we bought for trifles.' De Laet (1G25)

is maize, crushed fine and baked in cakes, with fish, birds
and wild game.' Van der Donck and others wrote in 1649:
of very
says, 'their food
Their fare, or food, is poor and gross, for they drink water, having no other
beverage; they eat the flesh of all sorts of game that the country supplies, even
badgers, dogs, eagles and similar trash, which Christians in no way regard; these
they cook and use uncleansed and undressed.

Moreover, all sorts of fish; likewise, snakes, frogs and such like, which they
usually cook with the offals and entrails.
They know also, how to preserve fish and meete for the winter, in order then to
cook them with Indian meal.
They make
also
their bread,
cook whole, or broken
in
but of very indifferent quality, of maize, which they
wooden mortars.
The women likewise perform this labor, and make a apa or porridge called by
some, Sapsis, by other, Duundare, which is their daily food, they mix this also thoroughly with little beans, of different colors, raised by themselves; this is esteemed
by them rather
as a dainty than as a daily dish.
"Their weapons were,
of course, the usual aboriginal
bow, arrow, spear,
club and tomahawk, though but a few years later, they had acquired from
the settlers enough fire-arms to
'Now, those residing
make
become exceedingly expert
near, or trading considerably with
in their use.
the Christians,
use of fire-locks and hatchets, which they obtain in barter.
are excessively fond of guns; spare no expense on them,
with them, that in this respect they excell
many
They
and are so expert
Christians.'
Many
of their
discarded neolithic weapons have been found, and these exhibit a wide
and workmanship, indicating considerable acquisitions

and localities. Their household utensils included 'mats
and wooden dishes,' and Juet refers to their 'pots of earth to dresse their
meats in,' and speaks also of the women bringing 'hempe.' The character
of the grass mats which the women wove is to be seen in the imprints made
with such material upon the outer surface of some of the local pottery.
variety of material
from other
They
also
'napsas.'
the Indian
tribes
made the grass baskets, often referred to in early records, as

The pots of earth were the large earthenware vessels made by
women, on
the decorations of the rims
which these poor creatures expended
"Of
covered
most
all their
these objects, there remain a

in
and upper portions
ingenuity and sense of
number
of interesting
being the line
Lroquoian vessel
examples
dis-
same time,
discovered by Mr. W. L.
upper Manhattan, the most complete, and
artistic,
of
art.
at the
Calver, on the south side of 21 1th Street, about 100 feet east of 10th Avenue,
in the fall of L906.
at
The
large vases found in broken condition in the cave
Cold Spring, are of the cruder and therefore,
earlier design of the original
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
Algonkian inhabitants, who
at
MAX HAT TAX
a later period,
is LA XI)
1M
probably by barter, and
perhaps by inter-marriage, acquired or learned the
art of
Iroquoian design
and decoration.
"Of the period during which the race occupied this

make conjectures. The extent and character of the
Spring and the pits and burials at Seaman Avenue,
settlement of large
at
numbers
or of considerable age.
we ran
locality,
shell
heaps
certainly indicate a
The
ceremonial
212th Street and certain remains of aboriginal feasting, such as
and oyster
shells,
of the settlers,
appeared to
exist at a level
only
(Old
at
pits
fish bone-,
below the graves of the slaves
buried at that place.
"While these conjectures may carry back the period of occupancy to

and weapons are all of the modern order, and no objects
true paleolithic character have been discovered, so that we have as yel
antiquity, the tools

of
nothing definitely reaching back into the remote ages of the most primitive'
mankind, although on Hunt's Point in the Bronx, at no great distance away
from our island, a very interesting rude ax and a hammer were discovered
by Mr. Calver
in a gravel-pit, near the old
Hunt burying-ground."
Location of Archaeological Remains ox Manhattan Island.
The
work done on Manhattan Island is of very recent date.

Indian manufacture and evidences of Indian
occupation were found as the city grew up from its first settlement at Fort
Amsterdam, but of these specimens we have very few records. The first
specimens found which have been preserved, to the knowledge of those now
first field
Doubtless
many
articles of
interested in the subject, were
found in 1855, and consisted of a deposit of

Indian arrow-points found in Harlem during excavation for a cellar on Avenue
A, between 120th and 121st Streets.
Riker
Some
as being in the author's cabinet.
near here. 3
The
of these are
spoken
of
Riker also speaks of
by James
shell
next specimens preserved were found at Kingsbridge
heaps
Road
(now Broadway) and 220th Street in 1886, and are in the John Neafie collection at the Museum.
These consist of an arrow point and a few bits
The next work was begun in 1889 by Mr. W. L. Calver of this
of pottery.
city, and has led to the discovery of much valuable material which has been
preserved. 4
1
2
3
By James K. Finch.
History of Harlem (1S81), footnote, p. 137.
Ibid., p. 366.
In the Spring of 1890 Mr. Edward Hagaman Hall began his investigations and at about
the same time Mr. Reginald P. Bolton entered the field of local research.
In many instances
these gentlemen and Mr. Calver collaborated with valuable results.
In the preservation of the
traces of Indian occupation of Manhattan Island the American Scenic and Historic Preservation
Society (formed in 1895 under the presidency of the late Hon. Andrew H. Green, but now
under that of Dr. George Frederick Kunz) has done much pioneer work.
Editor.
4
182
The
following account of the
work
is
taken mainly from Mr. Calver's
note-book:
In the autumn of the year 1889, while exploring the heights of Bloomingdale (now called Cathedral Heights) for any relics that might have remained
from the Battle of Harlem, Mr. Calver discovered one arrow point at 118th
Street, east of Ninth Avenue, and immediately afterwards a circular hammerOn a later trip to the same locality, he found a small grooved axe or
stone.
tomahawk.
In February, 1890, while hunting for Revolutionary
the vicinity of Fort
Washington, he made a
trip to the
Island in search of British regimental buttons,
many
relics in
northern part of the
of
which were said
to
have been found in that, vicinity. There he met an old acquaintance, Mr.
John Pearce, a policeman then on duty there, by whom he was introduced to
Mr. James McGuey, a youth residing in the vicinity of 198th Street and
Kingsbridge Road. To Mr. Calver, Mr. McGuey presented several relics
found by himself on camp sites and made an appointment to meet him
The same day, Mr. Pearce
early in March to explore for Indian remains.
took Mr. Calver to be introduced to Mr. Thomas Reefe who resided near
Kingsbridge Road and Isham Avenue, and, while crossing the orchard at
Academy Street and Seaman Avenue, Mr. Calver saw that the ground was
which afterwards proved to be of Indian origin.
March, Messrs. Calver and McGuey explored this
At the junction of Academy Street
part of the Island for Indian remains.
and Prescott Avenue, they found an Indian potsherd whose importance Mr.
McGuey seemed to realize, for, a week later, Mr. Calver met him again and
thickly strewn with shells
The
first
Sunday
in
was presented by him with a number of fragments of Indian ware. He

assured Mr. Calver that he had found it by digging in an Indian graveyard.
The two men dug again at this place, now known as "the Knoll," and found
more pottery. They then went to Cold Spring, a point on the extreme
northern end of the Island, and in a shell heap there they found more Indian
work. Mr. Alexander C. Chenoweth, an engineer, then on the Croton
Aqueduct, hearing of these discoveries, obtained a permit from the property
owners and began to explore "the Knoll" for Indian remains. Having
finished here, he went to Cold Spring and made some further discoveries.
All his specimens were purchased in 1894 by the Museum, and some of them
now on
are
exhibition.
Since this time, several interesting
relics
have been found and, as the work
and other excavation at this part of the Island are carried

An account of the recent finds
will probably come to light.
of grading streets
more
on,
relies
he found in another part of this Guide, the time of this writing having
will
been 1904.
The writer found an arrowhead on South Field,
en September 30, 1904.
1
in front of
Columbia University Library,
MANHATTAN ISLAND
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
The
only Indian remains
left
on the Island, so
are situated at the extreme northern end at
known
far as
1S3
to the writer,
Inwood and Cold Spring.
They
consist of the co-called shell heaps or refuse piles from Indian camps,
But we have evidence
three rock-shelters at Cold Spring.

this
was not
Lamb
to
show
the only part of the Island occupied by the Indians.
and
thai
Mrs.
says that the Dutch found a large shell heap on the west shore of
Fresh Water pond, a small pond, mostly swamp, which was bounded by the
Bowery, Elm, Canal and Pearl
present
Kalch-Hook or
and which they named
Streets,
In course of time, this was abbreviated to
shell-point.
Kalch or Collect and was applied to the pond itself. 2 This shell heap must
have been the accumulation of quite a village, for Mrs. Jno. K. Van Ren3
sell a er
Canal
speaks of a castle called Catiemuts overlooking
Street,
and says
that the
a small
pond near
neighborhood was called Shell Point.
Hem-
same castle as being on a hill "close by the present

Chatham Square," and says that it had once been an "Indian lookout."
street refers to the
'
Excavations
at Pearl Street are said to
have reached old
shell
banks.
"The
Memorial History of Xcw York" 5 says that a hill near Chatham Square was
6
According to the
called Warpoes, which meant literally a "small hill."
same authority, "Corlear's Hoeck was called Xaig-ia-nac, literally 'sandland-.'
It may, however, have been the name of the Indian village which
stood there, and was in temporary occupation." This is the only reference
we have to this village, but there are references to another on the lower end
Janvier 7 says that there was an Indian settlement as late as
of the Island.
1661 at
Sappokanican near the present Gansevoort Market.
According
to
Judge Benson, 8 Sapokanican was the Indian name for the point afterward-
"In the Dutch records references are made to the

this name.
.was applied for more
than a century to the region which came to be known as Greenwich in the
later, English, times.
The Indian village probably was near the site of the
known
as Greenwich.
Indian village of Sappokanican; and
present Gansevoort [Market;
but the
name seems
the whole region lying between the North River
Manetta Water or Bestavaar's
Kill."
to have been applied to

and the stream called the
Benton says that the name
of the
History of New York City, p. 36.

Mr. Edward Hagaman Hall, however, derives the name from " Kolk " or " Kolch " a
word still in use in Holland and applied to portions of a canal or inclosure of water. The
word also means " pit hole ", which aptly describes the Collect Pond.
Editor.
1
3
4
s
6
7
s
9
Goede-Vrouw of Manahata, p. 39.

Hemstreet, Nooks and Corners of Old New York. p. 46.
Bulletin, N. Y. State Museum, Vol. 7, No. 32. p. 107, Feb., 1900.
James G. Wilson, op. cit., p. 52.
Evolution of New York.
N. Y. Historical Society Collection, S. II, Vol. II, Pt. I, p. 84, 1848.
Thos. A. Janvier, In Old New York, pp. 85-86.
184
Going back to the old Dutch records might lead

was Lapinican.
and other data regarding these places.
names
to finding the actual
on Manhattan Island, as already stated,
found
specimens
Most of the
We
have a few from the central portion,
part.
northern
come from the
spoken of by Riker, and in Webster
arrow-heads
are
the
There
however.
1
village
is a fine specimen of a grooved stone axe found at 77th

Mr. Calver has found an arrow-head at 81st Street
B.
Avenue
and
Street
specimens from the site of Columbia College have
and
River
Hudson
and
Free Library there
been recorded.
Doubtless the northern part of the Island was inhabited for the longer
period but it is probable that all along the shore, wherever one of the many
;
springs or small brooks,
shown on
old maps, emptied into the
Hudson
or
East River, there were small, temporary Indian camps. It is likely that these
camps were used only in summer, while the primitive occupant of Manhattan
retreated to the
more protected part
Spring, during the winter.

states, the villages
Or
it
of the Island, as at
may
Inwood and Cold
be possible that, as Ruttenber
on Manhattan Island were only occupied when the Indians
were on hunting and fishing excursions, while their permanent villages were
on the mainland. Bolton, 3 however, says their principal settlement was on
Manhattan Island.
Fort Washington
Point.
There
is
a small deposit of
shells,
on the
southern edge of the point, in which the writer found some small pieces of
This was
its Indian origin.
was too exposed for winter use.
The Knoll. "The Knoll" was the name applied to a small rise of land,
at the southwest corner of Dyckman Street and Sherman Avenue, which ran
out into Sherman Creek from the eastern edge of the hill at that place. As
already stated, Messrs. Calver and McGuey found potsherds here; then Mr.
Chenoweth obtained permission of the property owners to make excavations.
He found numerous fragments of arrow points and pottery in some refuse
deposits from an Indian camp and also uncovered what were thought to
have been "paved fireplaces." The newspapers of the time had accounts
4
Mr.
of the finds, with pictures of the pottery and other objects found.
Chenoweth also uncovered a number of skeletons. It is stated that these
graves were marked with rough headstones, and there are pieces of a coffin
from here in the Terry collection in the American Museum, as are also
a number of lead buttons found with one interment. Everything seems
pottery and a few
flint
chips, thus proving
probably a summer camp, as
3
4
New
York,
it
p. 26.
[ndian Tribes of Hudson's River, p. 78.

History of Westchester County, p. 25.
New York Herald, January 14, 1894; also Illustrated American, September 19, 1901.
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
to
point to these as being burials of early settlers, but Mr.
Museum.
and
Street
185
Chenoweth holds
Several of the skeletons have been preserved in the
that they are Indian.
was found at 211th

had undoubtedly been an
Probably Sherman Creek was open up to this point
parallel condition to this at the Knoll
will
be spoken of
ancient Indian camp.

to
MANHATTAN ISLAND
The Knoll
later.
site
Indian canoes.
Cold Spring is situated at the extreme northern end of

Manhattan Island on the southern shore of Spuyten Duyvil Creek. The
Cold Sprint/.
Indian remains consist of three rock-shelters and three refuse heaps.

rock-shelter
is
All their rubbish,
or shelter which the Indians used as a dwelling place.
such
as oyster shells,
broken pottery and broken arrow heads, were dumped

Messrs. Calver and
near by, forming the so-called shell heaps.
explored the shell heaps; but Mr. Chenoweth was the

existence of the shelters.
There
is
only one which
is
likely to
These
for fires used in cooking.
(formerly called
Manhattan
breaking
Island.
shelters face east,
have been used
was stored
and are at the
off the cliffs
Probably
it
or shelters
foot of the
Cock Hill) which forms the most northern part of

The largest one was formed by several of the rocks
above and
falling in
such a manner that, by digging
out some of the earth from beneath them, the Indians could
shelter.
McGuey
to suspect the
first
as a dwelling place, the others being places where food
hill
The
a formation where the overhanging rocks form a small cave
was occupied by one
bark wigwams near by. 1
Another
make
a small
family, while the others lived in
of the shelters
is
simply an excavation
under the end of a huge fragment which also dropped from the
cliffs
above,
and the third is a large crevice in the foot of these cliffs. When Mr. Chenoweth first explored them, all these shelters were completely filled with earth
which had gradually worked its way in since their occupation, and much
In them he found fragcredit is due him for suspecting their presence.
ments of pottery and stone implements, together with the bones of turkey
and deer. The largest of the refuse heaps is situated on a rise directly in
front of these shelters.
It consists of
a layer of
shells,
in places several
inches thick, found under a layer of fine loam, a black earth which has
been deposited since the

yellow
soil.
The
shells
were scattered over the original sandy

made it an especially de-
sheltered position of this place
camp site. The hills to the south and west formed a protection to
camp from winds, and by Spuyten Duyvil Creek access could be had to
either Hudson or East River; while the Cold Spring, from which the place
sirable
the
takes
tion.
its
name, furnished an abundant supply
Memorial History of
New
York, Vol.
I,
of fresh water.
p. 33, for picture of houses,
and
p.
39 for descrip-
186
Inwood
Station Site.
At the foot
Dyekman
of
there existed a large deposit of shells, most
away
rocks on which they lay were blasted
bay
the small
Street
and Hudson River,
which were removed when the
for grading the street.
few
bits of pottery, as well as several Revolutionary objects,
arrow points and

were found here.
deposit in the
of
Part of the deposit
below Inwood
just
on the northern shore of

There are photographs of this
is still left
station.
Museum.
Harlem Ship Canal. Formerly at 220th Street and Kingsbridge Road

was a large deposit of shells on the westerly side of the road. This was
destroyed when the ship canal was put through. As with the Inwood Station
Mr. John
site, no systematic examination of this place was ever made.
Mr.
Chenoweth
also has
in
and
here
potsherds
some
1886,
Neafie found
large
that
this
was
a
deposit,
Calver
says
Mr.
from
here.
some potsherds
so
wedged
and
the
shells
were
it
was
that
about
peculiar
thing
the
and that
penetrate
them.
They
lay
on
the
hardly
pick
would
together
that
a
packed
1
bare rock surface in cracks in the rock.
Harlem River
Deposit.
Mr. Calver
says,
"Extending from 209th Street
to 211th Street on the west bank of the Harlem River and almost on a line
with Ninth Avenue was another large deposit of oyster shells lying just
beneath the top
soil
turbed by
Pieces of horn of
among
These
of the field.
and are
deer and
the plow
had nearly all been diswhich was red.

the same animal were common
shells
interesting only for their color,

split
bones of
but, in spite of the apparent antiquity of the deposit,
the shells;
there were, even in the lowest strata of
it,
some small fragments
been
left
during the historic period.
hammerstones from
Isham's Garden.
this spot in
This
is
There are
Mr. Calver's
of glass
which
else the shells
had
several stone sinkers
and
proved that either the whole mass had been disturbed or

collection
and
at the
Museum.
a large garden about on the line of
Isham
and Seaman Avenue. The soil is Avhite with small fragments of shells.
A number of arrow points, flint chips, hammerstones, sinkers and a few bits
Mr. Calver has found several shell pockets
of pottery have been found here.
with small deposits of pottery, etc., on the hill to the south of this garden.
Academy Street Garden. This is a small garden between Academy
and Hawthorne Streets, running through from Seaman Avenue to Cooper
Street.
It was a British camp site during the Revolution, and a number
of buttons, gun-flints and bullets have been found there as well as numerous
Street
Indian remains.
stone of which
The
may
It
seems to have been the workshop for a red jasper-like

finished implements have been found.
numerous chips but no
shells at this point
not
all
were
first
noticed by Mr. Calver in 1890.
be of Indian origin, as some
may
he due to soldiers.
John Ncalifcoll.Tlion, ^(K'HS; Chciiowct li, 20
:'.
1HS.
They
MANHATTAN ISLAND
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
Dog
Burials found
"dog
interesting
In January, 1895, Mr. Calver found two
1S05.
in
burials."
187
The
was unearthed at the summit

Harlem River. The ridge,
had been partly cut away for the grading
first
burial
of a ridge of soft earth at 209th Street, near the
which was about twelve feet high,

It was at the highest part of the hillock that a pocket
of Ninth Avenue.
of oyster and clam shells was noticed, from which a few fragments of Indian
bank had evidently fallen. The shells,

upon inspection, were found to have served as a covering for the skeleton of a
dog or wolf. Another burial was found on May 18th within fifty yards of
It had been covered with shells just as the first one, but had
the first burial.
been disturbed by workmen. Mr. Calver says: "The two canine burials
were situated at a point just without the borders of the Harlem River shell
pottery which lay on the face of the
heap and were distinct from it. The shells were found to be matched,
hence it was concluded that they were thrown in unopened or eaten on the
spot.
As
the skeletons
were intact and the bones uninjured,
all
probability
These burials are common in this vicinity. No satisfactory explanation of them has been given;
but Mr. Calver thinks they were for some religious purpose, and suggests a
It is
relation to the "White Dog Feast" of the Onondaga of this State.
certain that the pockets were in many cases used as fireplaces.
In March, 1903, there was considerable
Shell Pockets at 211th Street.
excitement over the reported discovery of an Indian graveyard at 211th
2
Street.
The graveyard proved to have been that of some slaves, and was
situated on the western end of the rise between 210th and 211 Streets, on
This discovery
the eastern end of which is the old Xeagle Burying Ground.
of the animals
having been eaten
is
disposed of."
was interesting because under

undoubted Indian origin came
Avenue, cut into
the negro graves several shell pockets of

to light.
The workmen,
in grading Tenth
and uncovered the
that the deposits were made
this hill to obtain material for filling,
graves and pockets.
seems almost certain
It
some time ago; then the wind blew the sand over the deposits to a depth of
In
four or five feet, and negroes later used this place as a burial ground.
support of this theory
the surface, that the
and that
is
the fact that the pockets were four or five feet under
soil
above showed no signs of having been disturbed,
put down on the Government maps of this section as a

During the summer of 1904, Mr. Calver with Messrs. Hall and
this rise is
sand dune. 3
Bolton uncovered nine more pockets to the southwest of the graveyard. 4
These pockets
1
2
3
4
all
seem
to
have been of the same period as the others, and
N. Y. Herald, May 26, 1895.

Evening Telegram, March 14, 1903.
New York Geologic Folio.

New York Tribune, Oct. 30,
1904, and
New York
Sun, Dec. 14, 1904.
188
all
appear
farther
up
have been on the original ground surface, although those

In one
hill were some four feet under the present surface.
to
the
was found the complete skeleton

two others contained complete snake
dog
of these pockets,
of a
a turtle shell;
skeletons;
held
the fragments of a small
The
pottery vessel.
in
another,
while a
fifth
pockets were small,
being about three feet in diameter and of equal depth, showing no signs
g?
having
first
been used as
fire
and then
Almost all the
places
filled
up, though charcoal

from Van Cortlandt
was scattered among the shells.

Park were found by Mr. James in pockets similar to these.
During Indian troubles in 1675, the Wickquaskeeks at Ann's Hook,
now Pelham Neck were told "to remove within a fortnight to their usual
Riker says, "This
winter quarters within Hellgate upon this island."
winter retreat was either the woodlands between Harlem Plains and Kingsbridge, at that date still claimed by these Indians as hunting grounds, or
Rechawanes and adjoining lands on the Bay of Hellgate, as the words
'within Hellgate' would strictly mean, and which, by the immense shellbeds found there formerly,
little
later the Indians
is
relics
proved to have been a favorite Indian resort."
asked to be allowed to return to their maize lands
on Manhattan Island and the Governor said that they, "if they desire
it,
be admitted with their wives and children, to plant upon this Island, but
nowhere
else,
if
Mrs.
Mary
and that
they remove;
Island near Spuyten Duyvel."
it
be upon the north point of the
A. Bolton Post, in writing to the editor of
Post," June 19th of the year of the opening of the
speaks of some Indians
who were
allowed to
"The Evening
Harlem Ship Canal
camp on
ten Duyvil Creek on the Bolton property in 1817.
(1895),
the south side of Spuy-
Ruttenber says that the
Reckgawawanos had their principal village at Yonkers, but that on Berrien's

Neck (Spuyten Duyvil Hill) was situated their castle or fort called Nipiniehsen.
This fort Avas protected by a strong stockade and commanded the romantic scenery of the Papirinimen, or Spuyten Duyvil Creek, and the
Mahicanituk (Hudson River), the junction of which was called the Sliorackappock. It was from this castle that the Indians came who attacked
Hudson on his return down the river. 4 Some small shell deposits occur on
Spuyten Duyvil
The
Hill,
village site at
buildings;
Manor
'All
but as yet this "castile" has not been definitely located.
Yonkers, according to Mr. James,
but several
relics
found near the
site
is
now
years ago arc
covered by
now
in the
Hall at that place (1904).
Unit
could be saved of this skeleton has been presented to
Edward Hagaman
Kail.
History of Harlem, p.
Ibid., p. 369.
Ruttenber, pp. 77-78.
36C.
the
Museum by
Mr.
MANHATTAN ISLAND
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
Judging from these references, we might conclude that the

occupied by the tribe commonly
known
ISO
territory
Manhattans included .Manhattan

Island and that part of the mainland which is west of the Bronx River north
to Yonkers, and that these Indians were a sub-tribe of the Wappinger division
of the Mahican.
as
Indian Burials.
Indian Burials.
first
Notwithstanding
all
the efforts of various collectors, the
Indian burials to be discovered on the Island were due to the
activities
and Calver in 1904. The improvement of Seaman Avenue,

Upper Manhattan, at that time, uncovered many relics of the long extinct
Indian inhabitants among which Mr. Bolton saw unmistakable signs of
Indian graves. To quote from this gentleman " It thus became evident that
there were human interments in the vicinity, and in August, 1907, the first
burial was discovered under a shell pit in Corbett's garden.
The grading
process had been extended only about eighteen inches below the sod, but had
sufficed to destroy the jaw of the skeleton which extended upwards, as did
also the foot bones.
The bones lay in and upon a close mass of oyster shells,
some of which were unopened, the skeleton reclined on its right side, facing
west.
The arms were flexed and crossed, the knees bent and the head thrown
back. No traces of weapons were found, nor were there any other objects
found, save a fragment of an animal bone.
" The location and position led to further exploration, which, early in 190S,
Sunday, March 22nd, being the
led to still more interesting discoveries.
first day in the field for exploration for the season for 190S, W. L. Calver
and the writer met at Seaman Avenue and Hawthorne Street, Manhattan,
to discuss plans for further excavations on this Indian village site.
The
rains of the winter 1907-8 had washed the west bank where the layer
of oyster shells and black dirt lay along the hill, and a patch of red burnt
earth was observed, which on digging out, disclosed a fireplace, evidently
of the period of the Revolution, having some large burnt stones, ashes,
wood charcoal, brick, broken rum bottles, a wine glass nearly complete,
a large open clasp-knife with bone handle, a hoop-iron pot-hook, various
forged head nails and a curious folding corkscrew.
Gold buttons of
Revolutionary pattern and an officer's silver button of the Royal Mariners,
together with pewter buttons of the 17th Regiment disclosed who had occu-
of Messrs. Bolton
pied the spot.

" At one part of this fireplace,
we came upon
the good fortune to
a pocket of oyster shells,
and on removing some of these, had

uncover a human thigh-bone. We worked carefully
evidently Indian, about two feet deep,
190
into the shells
mains
and under the pocket, gradually disclosing the complete
of a full-grown
head facing
east,
The
man
(Fig. 19) lying on
knees doubled up, the
left
its
re-
right side, feet to the north,
arm extended down through
the
had been within the area of the hole in which the Revolutionary fireplace had been made, and only one or two foot bones were found.
At a later period other foot bones were found on the opposite side of the
thighs.
feet
Revolutionary fireplace, evidently having been displaced in
The
right
arm was
flexed,
its
construction.
and the hand was under the head, the
latter
was
INDIAN BURIAL, MANHATTAN.
intact
and every tooth was
and some around
it.
We
in place.
Shells
had been packed over the body,

a number of human bones,
a position that would have been
were much puzzled by
by the skeleton, in
had it been upright.
" We removed the skull, covered the remains, and on Sunday, March
29th, renewed the work.
We went carefully to work upon the cluster of
mixed bones in front of the large skeleton, and soon found them to be rather
compactly arranged in a rectangular form about 14 by 2(> inches, the long
bones parallel. The vertebrae abruptly ended parallel with the head of the
larger skeleton, and after working some time, we found a skull placed
lying compactly together

in its lap
below, beneath the pile of bones in a vertical position, facing north, the
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
J
FIG.
20.
MANHATTAN ISLAND
191
LOCATION OF BURIALS, PITS AND SHELL-BEDS NEAR INWOOD
Human
remains. 2. Shell pit, deer antler. 3. Shell pit. 4. Shell pit, pottery. 5. Shell
pit, sturgeon below.
Shell pits.
Shell pit, sturgeon scales.
7.
8, 9.
10. Human remains.
11. Fire pit.
12. Shell pit.
13. Dog burial, puppy.
14. Shell pit.
15. Part of a jar.
16. Shell pit, fish and meat bones.
17. Shell pits.
18. Two dogs in shell
pit.
19. Human skeleton, 1907.
19a. Female skeleton, 1908.
20. Human remains when
house was built. 21. Small fire pits, Revolutionary. 22. Large shell pit. 23. Large shell
pit.
24. Shell pit.
25. Dog burial.
26,27,28. Shell pits. 29. Two human skeletons, male
and female. 30. Revolutionary fireplace "Royal Mariners" and "17th." 31. Skeleton and
infant, female.
32. Skeleton (Chenoweth, 1908).
33. Revolutionary fireplace, 71st, officers'
buttons.
D. Dyckman dwelling. R, R?. Revolutionary fireplaces. R 3 Revolutionary well.
1.
pit*.
6.
Shell
192
lower jaw of which was disengaged, and was placed sideways in front of the
The back of the skull was broken in, and was black with marks of
face.
burning. The lower jaw was burned, and some of the teeth split by fire.
The arm and leg bones were charred at the joints. Inside the skull was a
burned toe bone. Some oyster shells were among the charred remains.
" A significant fact was that the right arm bones of the large skeleton
were below the
pile
arrangement of the
as the large skeleton,
ment
burned bones.
of
latter within the
seem
This feature, and the compact
space in front of and at the same level
an intentional arrangeand to indicate the simul-
to point strongly towards
of these bones, in front of the large corpse
taneous burial of the two bodies. On examination, the large skeleton

proved to be that of an adult male, and the dismembered remains those
No implements were found with the
of a female of about 35 years of age.
remains, but a part of a stone pestle and a rude celt lay under the sod
among
the oysters above the large skeleton.
"On
Sunday, June
north of the above.
14, 1908,
another burial was found about 20 feet
This burial consisted of an adult skeleton doubled
up and its back much curved, and was apparently that of a female of mature
Between the knees, the remains of a small infant were laid, the skull
The right hand of the adult was below
of the latter being fragmentary.
The skull was intact and
the infant and the left hand around the throat.
had nearly all the teeth. One finger bone had grown together at the joint
On lifting the ribs of the
in a crooked position apparently due to disease.
right side, an arrow-bead of flint fell out between the fourth and fifth bones.
These skeletons lay about two and a half feet below the grass, and a pocket
The woman's remains lay within a
of oyster shells was over the head.
space about 31 inches long by 50 inches wide, flat in the hard red sand bed
age.
facing east.
" Shortly after these remains were discovered, Mr. Chenoweth extended
the excavation previously
shell pit in the
made by
same bank
he preserved the
skull.
of sand,
Some
the explorers at the side of a large oyster
and uncovered a male skeleton
of
which
small fragments of the skeleton were after-
wards found by the writer on this spot. Contractors for the sewer in
Seaman Avenue also uncovered the remains of a young female close to the
position of several of the shell pits previously described.
"These interments have some curious

jects
features.
The
position of
the
sometimes west, the absence of weapons or other oband the oyster shells packed with or above them are subjects for inter-
remains facing
east,
on which future finds may throw much light, as also

upon the peculiar double burial and the burnt state of the female remains."
esting discussion
SKINNER, INDIANS OF
MANHATTAN ISLAND
4B
193
The American fluseum Journal

Edmund Otis Hovey,
Frank M. Chapman,
Editor.
Louis P. Gratacap,
William K. Gregory,
Subscription,
subscription to the
Journal
One
is
>
Advisory Board.
Dollar per year.
included in the membership fees of

the Museum.
all
classes of
Members
Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston

bridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City.
St.,
of
Cam-
Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass.

(Issued as supplements
No
1.

of
No.
2.
Mammalogy and
Ornithology.
3.
F.
Journal.)
October, 1901.
THE SAGINAW VALLEY COLLECTION. By

December, 1901.
No.
Museum
The American
to
H.
Price, 10 cents.
Smith, Assistant
I.
Price, 10 cents.

Out
Ko.
D. Matthew,
January, 1902.
of print.
By Louis
P.
Gratacap, A. M.,
February, 1902.
Price, 10 cents.
No.
5.
NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. By J. A. Allen,

of
Mammalogy and
February, 1904.
No.
6.
Ornithology.
Curator
Ph. D.
Revised
edition,
Price, 10 cents.
7.
1902

Second
No.
March,
edition,
May, 1909.
1902.
April,
Price, 10 cents.

By William BeutenmOller, Curator
CITY.
May. 1902.
Entomology.
of
Price, 15 cents.
No.
8.
THE SEQUOIA. A
Review
Historical
George H. Sherwood, A.
of
Science.
Biological
M., Assistant Curator.
By
November, 1902.
Price, 10 cents.
No.
9.

ond
No. 10.
edition,
May, 1905.
Matthew, Ph.
January, 1903.
1903.
D.,
Sec-
Price, 10 cents.

By William Beutenmuller,
No.
D.
CITY.
February,
Price, 10 cents.
THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE

July, 1903.
INCAS.
By
C.
W. Mead,
Price. 10 cents.

thew, Ph.
ber. 1903.
D.
MatOcto-
Price, 10 cents.

HISTORY.
January, 1904.

February, 1905.
Out
of print.
Ornithology.
April,
1904.
Associate
Reprinted,
Price, 10 cents.
PRIMITIVE ART. July, 1904. Price 15 cents.

By William Beutenmuller, Curator of Entomology.
Price, 15 cents.
195
YORK
CITY.
October, 1904.
Museum
{Reprinted from' The American
No. 17.
THE FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAMMALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY.
By W.
tology.
No. 18.
D. Matthew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate PalaeonJanuary, 1905. Price, 15 cents.
THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W. D

Matthew, Ph.
No. 19. THE
July, 1905.
Park.
CITY.
By
Zoological Park.
Price, 15 cents.
October, 1905.
New York
January, 1906.
B.
E. Dahlgren,
Price, 10 cents.

April-July, 1906.
CITY.
Zoological
Price, 15 cents.

D. M. D.
No. 23.
NEW YORK
New York

By Raymond
No. 22.
Curator of
Associate
of print.
REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF
Raymond
No. 21.
D.,
Out
April, 1905.
No. 20.
Journal.)
of
CITY.
Mammalogy and
By Frank
Ornithology.
Price, 15 cents.

Miner, Assistant Curator of

Price, 10 cents.
October, 1906.
No. 24.
nology.
No. 25.
March, 1907.
of Eth-
Price, 10 cents.

whose busts are
in the
Memorials of the naturalist

cents.
No. 26.

No. 27.
THE MALARIA MOSQUITO.
December, 1907.
By
B. E.
No. 28. THE
Price, 10 cents.
Dahlgren, D. M. D.
April, 1908.
Assis-
Price, 15 cen.s.
HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS. By
of Ornithology.
February, 1909.
Price.
15 cents.
No. 29.
THE INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND

Alanson Skinner, Department
Price, 10 cents.
196
of Anthropology.
VICINITY.
By
September, 1909.
=>
PM

Vol.
IX
NOVEMBER,
ACHIEVEMENT
The
FOR
No. 7
POLAR EXPLORATION.
Exhibit of the Peary Arctic Club.
several years a record of Polar exploration has been on exhibi-
tion at the
main
ments of
IN
1909
Museum
in
the east corridor immediately off the
Here, on two fifteen foot
foyer.
a globe fastened to the wall
maps painted on
seg-
have been indicated the routes of
Arctic and Antarctic expeditions.
On
86
September 6 the Arctic

reached in 1895, the
14',
made
86 33',
map showed
Duke
Nansen's farthest north,
of the Abruzzi's (Cagni's) record,
and the northernmost point of all, 87 6', gained

by Peary on April 26, 1906, but the routes went no nearer the Pole than
these points, and from them stretched untraversed a region known to be
more than two hundred miles wide on all sides of the Pole. On September
7,
in 1900,
1909, however, the red cord
spanned
this
on April
6,
marking Peary's
latest expedition
remaining distance and a small flag floated at the center of

the Arctic map to bear record to the larger American flag that was left
1909, waving over the drifting ice where half the year
day and half
is
This achievement, striven for by

an event in history.
in turn
if
It closes
was the culmination
we count
is
night.
many men
of
many
nations,
marks
a century of Arctic research, which century
of a period of three centuries of exploration,
the exploits of whaling
and sealing
vessels
and the early
expeditions in search of a short water-route from western Europe to the

Orient.
and the
that
Some
facts
have been discovered, some things proved not
field is clear for
man may have
new achievement along
other
lines, to
true,
the end
a fairer understanding of the Universe in which he
finds himself.
On
the morning of October 12, an exhibition by the Peary Arctic
Club was opened
in the
west wing of the

199
Museum.
The
presentation
200
in this exhibit
unusually vivid.
is
half hour in the hall leaves one
feeling that he has actually traveled into the unten-
imbued with the
anted world around the North Pole.
In the
and
installed to give an effect of simplicity
first
place the exhibit
much
severity, of
Those
rupted space, cold white surroundings and few objects.
charge were careful not to draw on the Museum's
is
uninter-
well-filled store
in
houses
of Arctic materials to such an extent as to destroy this atmosphere of
In the second place, because of the nature of the exhibit,
severity.
everything speaks of adventure, of a
narrow escape
difficult life, often of
and sometimes of disaster. This is true throughout, from the relic of

a battered life boat that acts as a sign board
the wrecked "Polaris"
the hall, to the view of the "Polaris" in
just outside the entrance of
Thank God Harbor an immense canvas

in the place
of
some
seems
on
to take
life
Every object
at the far end.
as a representative of the daring
work
explorer.
In imagination
we
see the sleeping bags, displayed near the entrance,
with their voluminous fur folds wrapped about the traveller shutting
We
out the savage cold.
see the sledges not as
mere dead frame-works
In our awakened fancy, they have
man.
of wood, but as active aids to
iced runners and, loaded with provisions, they cut deep trails as with
dogs and drivers they pass always on into boundless
The mounted
dog, placed here to illustrate the
nessing, brings to
mind
ice
and snow.
Eskimo method
of har-
the long double-ranked teams, or the fan-shaped
teams of eight as Peary drove them, dragging their burdened sledges,

obeying word and whip day after day until too weak
tion longer, except
fellows;
who have read "Northward Over
My
only consolation
The
did not suffer pain.
your
lives
been had
went out.
it
is
the knowledge that like ourselves you
starvation
.the
was so gradual
not been for you."
upon the
floor,
when
at last
oxen, the
many
and the numerous
skulls
The mounted musk

pillars
bring to mind forcefully the dependence of the
explorer upon these animals for food.
We
standing of the eagerness with which he has
ground for musk ox
that
end was painless, as our own would have
shaggy brown pelts wound about the

piled
the Great Ice"
dogs of that journey, "Faithful, noble servi-
recall Peary's tribute to the
tors ....
their bodies as food to strengthen their
by giving
while those
to help the expedi-
tracks,
when he saw one or more
and
more
get a
many
vivid
under-
time searched the
more keen sympathy with
his fear
of the great creatures, that his eyes blinded bv
AN EXPLORER
TRAIL LEFT AT THE ICE FOOT ON THE COAST OF GRINNELL LAND.
Greeley Expedition, May, 1882.

201
a.
PART OF THE NORTH POLAR REGIONS, SHOWING LINES OF APPROACH FROM

AMERICA AND EUROPE.
205
206
would give a
the incessant glare of the ice
aim
false
at the critical
moment.
The realism of the exhibit is increased by the work of a
newly-invented
automatic stereopticon placed in a darkened alcove at the right of the
Through
hall.
morning
He
of the Arctics.
he sees
display of pictures (uninterrupted from nine in the
its
until five in the afternoon) the visitor
is
carried into the heart
looks on boats and men, sledges and dogs, in action
mountains and icebergs, the self-same
in these pictures the very
pressure ridges or "rafters" of ice and the leads of open water that the
hand held the camera saw in reality.

The central and most striking feature of the hall is a map painted in
It
color on the floor over a space 30 feet by 50 feet in dimensions.
presents the approach to the Pole from North America only, the more
explorer whose
frequently used of the two principal paths of exploration, namely:
the
route between Nova Zembla and Franz Josef Island, the direct course
from Europe; and that through Davis Straight, Baffin Bay and Smith
Sound, a lane of open water stretching northward between Greenland

on the east and the
line of Arctic
dor
Land on
to
show
Ellesmere
the west.
the route of Nansen, nor does
since both of these
does
American islands extending from Labra-
mark
men made
it
give that of the
their
the points reached
This map, therefore, does not
Duke of the Abruzzi,
approach from the Old World.
Markham and
by
Lockwood and Brainard in 1882.

Cape Morris K. Jesup and Cape Bridgman, the limit of
Greeley in 1881 and by

at
by Peary
in
is
It
shows,
exploration
1900 and marks conspicuously the "farthest north" of the
same explorer
however,
It
Parry in 1876, by
as reached April 26, 1906.
to
show
the
The
chief
aim of the map,
route of Peary's last or eighth expedition,
financed by the Peary Arctic Club.
The
story graphically spread out
year's time
northward
1,
and a distance
to the Pole.
traveling
The
from the Pole.
floor concerns
expedition started from
up Smith Sound.
It
more than
from Cape York
Cape York August
reached Cape Alexander August 18
the latter place being about 500 miles

At Cape Sheridan the "Roosevelt " remained in
indicated by the presence of a small model of the
and Fort Conger September

distant
on the
of 800 geographic miles
winter quarters, as
is
boat placed on the
map
2,
at this point.
On March
1,
a few days before
the sun rose above the horizon after the long Arctic night, the sledge
journey began, a journey of more than 400 miles over drifting
ice.
PEARY ARCTIC CLUB EXHIBIT
MUSK OX AND POLAR
207
BEAR.
Pearv Arctic Club Exhibit.

these 400 miles no living thing is to be found, for musk oxen
and caribou range no farther north than Cape Moms K. Jesup, the
northernmost land, while seal, walrus and narwhal are found only along
Through
the waters that margin the land.
The
rest of the trip as traced
On March
11, 84
shows a veritable "dash
north was passed, and a week
reached, 300 miles from the Pole.
87 north, and April
2,
By March
later,
to the
Pole."
85 north was
27 the expedition passed
88 north, only 120 miles from the Pole and
human being had ever before penetrated. Only

camp was made at the journey's end, and the American
farther north than any
four days later

flag
was
flying at 90 north.
There
of this
is
map
scarcely anything in the Peary Arctic Club's exhibit outside

that attracts
more
attention than a sledge on the west side
PEARY ARCTIC CLUB EXHIBIT

among
of the hall
and
skulls
musk ox, caribou and

and the many other things
antlers,
Though
in the ringing.
it
bears this legend
come
success has
means
"A
only a sledge,
sledge
that the
"Roosevelt"
every available place, even drying
in
seems deserving honor, for
it
reached the Pole."
that
In
was delayed
Polar exploration through use of the sledge as a
to
When
time of thaw.
until a
frozen
was not
It
an expedi-
in,
until the
third voyage of Parry and the second of Sir John Ross, that
and 1S34,
that sledging expeditions began
that "ice
which
the sledge."
it
Museum.
12 feet long and 2 feet wide.
ners curved
upward
at
and
flexible,
exhibit
interesting to
two wooden run-
slats crossing the
is
itself,
manner
instructive as to the
we
fishing
and has surely proved
of maintaining
case
is
filled
life
in the
with the skins
and hunting paraphernalia. From the facts brought

Eskimo on the few animals
learn the total dependence of the
and the
of the region, particularly the walrus
contain garments of fur,
made by
There is much
also coats
fur
of fox, seal
fastening together
many
and
seal.
reindeer.
exploration in
other cases
They show
small bird skins.
One
case contains the instruments
used in exploration, such as sextant, chronometer

beside these which
Still
suggested also in the matter of Arctic travel aside
from what has already been noted.
tell
and compass, and
of the success of science in invention
making use
copper taken from the wreck of Sir John Franklin's ship.
Eskimo from
An
Century of Arctic Exploration" calls attention to
cases containing the
and of
of this invention are dramatically placed
various crude implements and vessels fashioned by the
"A
runners
used in igloo building, another contains kayaks, harpoons
and various
label
compare the
This sledge that reached the
both ends and wooden
environment of the Arctics.
tools
out here,
is
for Arctic travel.
its fitness
difficult
was discovered
fact
forms the highway for
It consists of
descents without the slightest injury to
The
in 1821
and bound loosely to them by thongs of walrus hide.

it is able to rise and dip through the snow of. steep
several inches apart
Light and
second or
is
Since that time, there has been great advance in sledge
sledges in the possession of the

is
and the
arrests the progress of the ship
construction, in the light of which fact
Pole
reality,
of travel.
Before 1820 ships alone were used.

tion
walrus hides, crates of
piles of
brought south with her stowed away
209
many books
arching
still
other
descriptive of expeditions to the Arctics.
THE PEARY CARIBOU (RANGIFER PEARYI ALLEN).

Peary A; die Club Exhibit.
210
PAINTINGS OF GREEXLAXD ESKIMO
211
These books lie open at their title pages and, covering the time from the
work of Sir John Ross to the present, invite further investigation.
As a whole, the exhibit has a note of triumph in it. There is triumph
in the discoveries to science of lands and waters, in the improvement
in life for the Eskimo through the intervention of civilized man, in the
final direct route that Pearv made and the American flag floating- above
"the top of the world" in the map on the floor. The visitor reads also
a greater triumph than these, for one
northern explorers or has
lips of
experiences recorded in
some
felt
who has heard
accounts from the
a choking in the throat over the
of the vivid writings of these
same men,
realizes the hardship involved in Polar exploration, the years of privation
and physical
life
worth
distress, of sacrifice of all that to
living.
He knows
ordinary mortals makes
that there has been set before the world an
example of what above most things makes
life
worth
living,
the
in-
domitable courage and perseverance that ends in accomplishment.
THE MURAL DECORATIONS OF THE ESKIMO HALL.
THE
mural decorations at the northern end of the Eskimo Hall have

been painted by Mr. Frank Wilbert Stokes, an artist, who, as member of the Peary Relief Expedition of 1892 and of the Peary Xorth
Greenland Expedition of 1893 and 1894, has made careful study of the
Eskimo people and their frozen country.

Ranged about the hall below are the weapons, the articles
boats, the sleds, while above them in this painted frieze
of dress, the
these
same
objects are seen put to use in the daily activities of the Eskimo, revealing
his adaptation to
and
glaciers
and the
an environment of months' long days and nights among

The combination of the scientific exhibits below
icebergs.
artist's
work above, brings home
to the observer
not only the
ethnological facts involved, but also other facts, such as the austerity of
Eskimo
life,
its
enforced simplicity and
tion for the people of the Arctics.

rests in the fact that
by the
many
the limitations set
Much
upon
civiliza-
of the interest of these pictures
of the scenes represent localities actually visited
Mr. Stokes established his studio at Bowdoin Bay, 77 44'

N. latitude, and worked there during fourteen months, with the primitive
life of the Eskimo and the glowing colors of the northern land under constant observation.
As William Walton has said in an aritcle in Scribner's
Magazine for February, 1909, Mr. Stokes has here succeeded, despite the
artist.
212
\
ESKiMO GODDESS OF THE SUN.
From
the painting on the North Wall.
Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert Stokes.

Courtesy oj Scribner's Magazine.
inadequacy of pigments, in well suggesting "the utmost splendor of light

that blazes in the Polar skies and glows in the Polar, tranluscent ice."
The North Wall.

The
largest picture of the series
of the
Museum
intense
and
is
realistic in
in full
view from the main foyer
continuous panorama
its
coloring.
sixty
feet
long.
It
is
In the center the glow of a mid-
night sun illuminates promontories and sea, toward the right this brilliant color gradually fades to the gray
and purple
precedes the long Arctic night, while toward the
of the twilight that
left
it
changes
to the
white lights and deep bine shadows of that other twilight that foretells
the approach of the long Arctic day.
Against the vivid gold and red of the center of the painting
trayed
conception of the Eskimo myth of the
the artist's
Moon."
There
through the
air.
is
presented a
These
giant mirage of two figures
is
"Sun and
in full
porthe
pursuit
figures are Ahn-ing-ah-neh, a hunter, typifying
PAINTINGS OF GREENLAND ESKIMO
213
ESKIMO CONCEPTION OF THE MOON,

HUNTER IN PURSUIT OF THE SUN.
Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert stokes.

Courtesy of Scribner's Magazine.
the
moon and
ushering in the long winter, and Sukh-eh-nukh, standing
for the sun, a goddess
ah-neh
is
accompanied by summer and plenty.
dressed in winter garb and
is
Ahn-ing-
driving his team of dogs.
The
lower part of the figure, like the dogs and sledge, are shadowy in the
painting, but the upper part reaching forward in the chase, the
and the
right
arm with
its
head
lashing whip, stand out strong and dark as the
forward part of a night cloud that sweeps over the glacier-covered heights.
Sukh-eh-nukh is represented by a figure uncovered to the waist (the

Eskimo, both men and women, occasionally strip off the upper garments
in the
summer
shown
as a sun-dog or parhelion such as
at sunrise
She
sun).
and simset
carries in her right
in the Arctics.
cloud that floats near her head.

line following
from the
far
away
She
is
is
Summer
horizon.
hand an Eskimo lamp,
often seen near the horizon
a part of a cumulus
summer
birds are about her, a long;
Two
fulmar gulls are flying
and two harbor seals are crying to her, the "Mother of

the Seals," from floating ice below, where also little Arctic puffins are
in front of her,
ranged
in military line.
214
The
story of the pursuit of the sun
among
spread
believe, as
do
all
the
Eskimo
people.
other Innuits from Alaska to Labrador and Baffin Land,
that the sun was originally a
escape the
by the moon is a legend widely

The North Greenland Eskimo
unfilial love of
woman, Sukh-eh-nukh, who
her brother, Ahn-ing-ah-neh, fled into the
heavens bearing a lighted torch.
The
brother also carrying a torch
pursued her and was transformed into the moon.
moon
forever in love with the sun
is
in order to
it,
the sun
is
believed that the
to overtake her, but
and he
that since his torch chanced to be a poor one

pelled to return to earth to relight
It is
and seeks ever
is
frequently com-
enabled to keep well in
POLAR BEAR AT BAY.
From
the painting on the North Wall.
the myth, disaster
would come
advance.
According
succeed
catching her, for with his embrace would
in
to
come
if
he should
the end of
all
things.
Eskimo people and
is
and the moon has many variations among the

sometimes termed the Sedna Cycle, Sedna also
signifying the sun.
It
is
This legend
of the sun
of the great Arctic

root in
able.
possible that
day and
Eskimo imagination
we have here
night, but also
tin-
not only an allegory
proof that there has taken
the idea of man's search after the unattain-
PAINTINGS OF GREEXLAX1) ESKIMO

The
right portion of the painting, realistic in
215
the extreme, repre-
sents the twilight before the approach of the long night, the dramatic
interest resting in
an encounter between an Eskimo hunter and a polar
The hunter
bear.
followed
in the
has
left his
chase.
He
sledge and, accompanied by his team, has
has used his arrows and
is
to give a thrust with his lance, the bear's attention
now near enough
being held by the
dogs.
That
part of the painting at the extreme
of stalking prey.
hand,
is
left tells
the Eskimo's
method
In the foreground on an ice-floe a hunter, harpoon in
crawling slowly toward two ring
seals,
which
lie
basking
in the
ESKIMO STALKING THE SEAL.
From
the Painting on the North Wall.
sounds.
Eskimo hunters have

They can make cautious approach
wing
the
sun near their hole.
in
air,
great
giving decoy
skill in
to gulls
by waving a
gull's
while whistling the bird's notes; they can allay the
suspicions of seals by lying
flat
on the
ice
and waving a
foot in imita-
tion of a seal's head, while giving the characteristic calls of the seals.
Beyond
the seal hunter in the distance rises above the ice of the glacier,
a bell-shaped elevation of land which the

Still
farther to the
light of the
goddess.
summer
left
that
Eskimo knows
towers an iceberg, while over

is
being ushered in
as a "nunatak."
all is
the
dawning
by Sukh-eh-nukh, the sun
216
The East Wall.

The
or northern panel
first
An
Pictures of actual events in
west sides of the
making
Eskimo
life
hall, the unity of the
the sky line in the east
Eskimo
life
as
it
Late Autumn.
in
are continued on the east and
compositions being gained by
and west panels the same as
The
painting on the north wall.

pictures of
Innuit Encampment
that of the
three panels on the east wall continue
goes on during the Arctic night.
The first of the panels gives a view of Inglefield Gulf, which by

November is well frozen over. In the foreground to the right an
Innuit (Memkashoo) is cutting up pieces of meat and feeding his
team after a hunting trip. The sledge lies to the left, and just beyond
is
woman
an Innuit
a pouch
is
made
The head and
with her babe carried on her back in a pouch.
of fox skin
and
is
Such
a part of the hooded upper garment.
shoulders of the child are covered by soft fox skin, but the
body lies naked against the mother's bare back and so is kept
warm. The child is secured in the pouch by a sinew which passes around
its body and around the upper part of the mother's waist.
A little Innuit boy stands by his mother, watching his playmate, an
Eskimo puppy. Immediately to the right is the stone-built entrance of
rest of its
the igloo, or winter residence, which, partly covered with snow,
The
seen directly behind the figures.

reveals a pale light
seal-entrail
window
is itself
of the igloo
from the lamp within, a lamp which must serve the
purposes of lighting, heating, cooking and drying for the whole family.
Beyond
in the
with snow which

the bay
is
middle distance
is
to the left is a bay, its shore
about three inches
in
depth
at this season.
a long low promontory stretching into the sea,
completely frozen over and with an iceberg frozen into

brilliant in the sky, while
rich
orange
light
east
from a sun that
Baffin Bay,
of the
central
is
which
is
in
February.
February scene on the
never completely frozen over.

(ill
in
gradually receding.
panel represents a
Aurora Borealis
it.
Beyond
November sea,
The stars are
mountain, sea and shore are enshrouded
The Central Panel -- Walrus Hunting
The
covered
The
the sky and arc reflected by the
ice
of
flaming colors
ice.
In their
ESKIMO ENCAMPMENT
AUTUMN.
The north panel
IN
LATE
of the East
Wa
217
218
WALRUS HUNTING
The
weird light
is
made
IN
THE LIGHT OF THE AURORA BOREALIS
centra] panel
of the
visible the attack of
walrus, one of a group of three
in
Easl
Wall.
an Innuil hunter upon
a large
the central foreground of the picture.
In the immediate foreground to the right a bull walrus is just emerging

from the water. There is no look of fear in the animal's dog-like eye,
since he has not yet caught sight of the hunter.
In the Arctics the barking of walrus can be heard for miles.
When

the Innuit hunter hears
and
travel
windward
hitch six or eight doss to his sledge
show him
the way.
When
the sledge upside
down,
to
and
will
hummocks
and
not remain noiseless, he
check any attempt on
He
crawls over the ice toward the animals.
is
or
within a thousand yards to

if
they
may
turn
run away.
their part to
with a stout harpoon and plenty of walrus-hide
ice blocks or
moon
light of the
of the animals, he tethers his dogs to the ice,
are unaccustomed to hunting
Armed
may
he
toward the sound, often with onlv the
of the stars to
the
it,
219
line, the
Innuit
conceals himself behind
between him and the animals
until the distance
short, then suddenly leaps to his feet, singles out a big bull (as in the
and
painting)
usually
strikes
The whole
with unerring aim.
barking furiously, rushes for the
The
sea.
stricken bull olives,
herd,
and the
walrus-hide line pays out rapidly, but not before the Innuit has deftly
thrust his lance,
which he
carries in his free hand, firmly into the ice.
With knee and shoulder braced against
the shaft of the lance, he obtains
weakened
sufficient
purchase to play the walrus until the big fellow
by
blood that the hunter can leave his lance to cut two holes
loss of
ice close to the spot
slack,
he hauls
Now, whenever
standing.
is
in the
the line
is
few fathoms, and running the noose a couple of times
in a
down through one

reliable hold.
where he
so
is
hole and across through the other, obtains a
With
the lance
now
more
he stands over the breathing
free,
hole, striking the walrus each time that
it
When
rises.
it
is
finallv
despatched, he cuts off piece after piece of the meat and seeks his sledge
and dogs
to carry the spoil
home.
Walrus are huge ungainly creatures, weighing upwards of three

thousand pounds, but
difficulty in getting
blow.
If,
quickly dragged
The Third
The
of
nimble Innuit hunter there
way on
however, the iron point
coils of the line are

is
to the
out of harm's
slips,
or the ice gives way, or
down beneath
no
if,
as the
the water to speedy death.
or Southern Panel.
Peterawik
In the foreground at the extreme
sledge and dogs, bringing a load of walrus meat.
where
usually
running out, the hunter's legs become entangled, he
in
Moonlight.
third panel represents a winter scene at Peterawik
Smith Sound.
right,
is
the ice after he has struck the
left is a
is
waiting to welcome him.
hunter with
His snow igloo
his wife, carrying a child in her hood,
by an Eskimo woman,
on the shore
is
at the
and accompanied
The
sea-ice of
Smith
220
Sound
stretches far to the horizon at the north;
Alexander
teristic of
is
The
visible in the distance.-
Cape
the head-line of
rocks at the right are charac-
the west coast of Greenland at this latitude, 76 N.
In the spring before the ice breaks up, the Innuits congregate at
Peterawik for walrus hunting.

foot, that portion of the sea-ice
They
snow igloos on the ice

bordering the land. Here they remain
build their
hunting, frolicking and feasting in their joyous fashion, until the sun's
warmth has broken up the ice.

the ice, some to the settlements
as Cape York.
Then
they travel southward,
of Inglefield
still
over
Gulf and others even as far
The West Wall.

The
First or Northern Panel
The
Reindeer
Hunting
Eskimo
paintings on the west wall represent
Summer.
in
during the
life
long Arctic day.

In the middle foreground of the northern panel a hunter, crouching
at the top of a
rocky prominence,
is
in the act of
drawing
bone and sinew upon a white reindeer, which has espied too
thing to excite
is
its
curiosity.
bow
his
late
of
some-
In the middle distance at the extreme right,
the continuation of the large iceberg of the central panel of the north
Icebergs in the Arctic regions are frequently from 150 to 300 feet
wall.
in height,
measure
five to
seven times this distance below the surface of
Beyond the ice"

the great ice " Sahara
the sea, and sometimes have a length of three miles.
berg in the distance

in the interior of
the
is
a glacier flowing
down from
Greenland, while to the
left is
a dark rocky portion of
submerged land.
In the immediate foreground are purple flowers (Epilobium
foliuvi)
which
nestle in pockets in the rocks.
The middle
lati-
foreground
is
covered by stunted grass and mosses, especially by reindeer moss on
Many
bloom in Greenland and other

polar lands during the short summer, notably members of the mustard
family, and of the pink, rose, saxifrage and grass families.
There is one
species of sedge known; willows and birches are found, although grow-
which the deer are feeding.
ing only two to three inches
in
flowers
height; while daisies, buttercups, yellow
poppies, harebells, dandelions, gentians

in
many
\
and primroses cover the ground
places.
white caribou (Rangifer pearyi Allen) discovered by Peary
mere Land near Lake Hazen, latitude 82 N.
in
L902
in
Elles-
PAIXTIXGS OF GREEK LAX D ESKIMO
221
WINTER SCENE AT PETERAWIK ON THE SHORE OF

SMITH SOUND.
The southern panel
Another source of bright color

species of alga?, one red
plants that
grow on the
ice or
Cape York.
As to edible
region.
the East Wall.
in these northern latitudes lies in
and the other green.

snow, but they
as to impart their color to the ground.
that explains the
of
may
It is the
They
occur
two
are microscopic
in
such profusion
presence of these algae
famous ''crimson glacier" or "crimson snow" near
plants, there are a few even in this extreme northern
blueberry which grows partly concealed
under the moss
can be secured during the greater part of the year, and
is
eaten with
REINDEER HUNTING
I'hc
IN
SUMMER
northern panel of the Wesl

Wall.
223
Copyright 1908 by Frank WiVbert Stokes.
ESKIMO
IN
The
relish
by the Innuit.
SEALSKIN CANOE HARPOONING

central panel of the
There are several
buds and even flowers are eaten.

angelica officinalis)
eaten.
The
is
NARWHAL.
West Wall.
plants, of
which
roots, leaves,
plant resembling celery (Arch-
a favorite article of food.
Iceland moss
is
chief sources of vegetable food, however, are marine.
seaweed used commonly for food
is
Alarm
pylaii, closely allied to
derlocks," of Scotland, and in flavor somewhat like asparagus.
also
"blad-
224
Narwhal
The Central Panel
The dramatic
center of this panel
is
Hunting
an Inn nit
distance are fulmar gulls.
To
the boat.
left of
In the distance
is
kayak or sealskin
in his
canoe in the act of harpooning a narwhal, which

surface of the water at the
Summer.
in
beneath the
visible
is
the right in the middle
the great ice river, the
Yerhoeff glacier.
The narwhal
is
an animal about which
Some, notably Peary, think that

occasionally has both a long
It
lose,
The narwhal
however.
is
it is
little
is
known.
definitely
the fabled unicorn of the ancients.
and a short horn, one of which it may

blue-black along the back and spotted
with dark along the sides, the color fading into ivory white underneath.
The
thin skin covers a very
delicacy by the Innuit.
and
of the food in the Arctics,

of
which
is
known
deep layer of
This blubber
to the
is
fat or blubber,
considered a
eaten raw, as in fact
is
most
of course without pepper or salt, neither
Eskimo.
In narwhal hunting, the Innuit approaches the animal from the rear
and one
side,
decreasing the distance noiselessly until he
is
within strik-
companion always accompanies the hunter, so that, in

the event of his being struck by the narwhal, and his boat overturned,
there may be some rescue at hand.
The harpoons used in narwhal
ing distance.
hunting formerly had heads
made
near Cape York, but since the
Eskimo have obtained
the
and other
narwhal ivory, which
their metal
fits
from traders and from whaling

is
joined to a piece of walrus or
loosely on to the ivory
the center of this harpoon head,

in place
quarter of the nineteenth century
The harpoon head
ships.
from the iron meteorites
of flakes
first
is
end of the
shaft.
To
fastened a line of walrus hide kept
by the hand that holds the harpoon.
on the fore part of the kayak, so that
The
line itself is coiled
unwind rapidly and without becoming tangled. Attached to the other end of this line and
placed in the after part of the kayak are two objects, a sealskin bag
and a drag resembling a box lid. When the animal dives and flees
it
will
vainly from the pain of the harpoon point
drag
tires
marks
its
it
out,
position
and the skin bag,

and keeps
gets out of the
way
and
it
finally
The
tow
<>l*
it
imbedded
in its flesh, the
floating on the surface of the water,
from sinking.
The
hunter,
who
the infuriated animal, can thus trace
adroitly
its
course
home.
Verhoefl glacier represented
in
the painting
is
one of two glaciers
225
Robertson Bay, on the northern shore of Inglefield Gulf,

West Greenland. It was here that Verhoeff, the meteorologist of one of
at the
head
of
the Peary Expeditions, while trying to cross the glacier alone, lost his
September
life
in
200
feet high,
The
of 1892.
but the
sea wall of the glacier
ice shelves out
is
from 150
to
beneath the water, where the buoy-
away
as icebergs.
This
birth of icebergs at the water's edge of a glacier often causes
waves
ancy of the sea breaks
off parts
which
float
and attended by volleys of

thunderous reports that are terrifying in the ears of the Eskimo. Each
of these glaciers is an arm of the inland ice cap of Greenland, a mighty
thirty or forty feet in height, miles in extent,
sheet submerging mountains and valleys to a depth of 5,000 feet or
more.
The Third
or Southern Panel
Cape
York, a
Summer Home
of the
Innuit.
The
at the
scene depicted
head
of Melville
is
at
Cape York,
summer home
of the Innuit,
Here the Innuit, or Arctic Highlander, as

is first met by those visiting the
Bay.
he was misnamed by Sir James Ross,
The
Arctics.
Cape York looking toward
painting gives a view of
the
north.
In the foreground
which be has
seal
is
killed
the
camp, where an Innuit leans over a harp-
and
is
watching for some stray pieces

skin trousers
about
to cut tip, while his
This
of meat.
and a hooded jacket made
man
is
dogs are
clothed in bear-
about seventy auk skins, the
of
He
wearing boots of
seal-
a girl of about seven years, painted
from
feathers being turned next to the body.
is
skin.
To
the left in the
a sketch
made by
of fox skin
camp
is
the artist in 1894.
She
and an upper hooded garment,
boots of sealskin, reaching to the thighs.
is
clothed in small trousers
also of fox skin,
She
is
and wears
attending a
fire of
moss and blubber, over which blood soup is being prepared, while
guarding from the dogs a piece of meat on the ground at her right.
Behind the girl are two sealskin tents (tupekhs) from one of which
voung woman is emerging.

Beyond the tents are mountains towering 1500 to 3000 feet above the
camp. The summits of these mountains are frequently obscured by
dense fogs, from which come continually the wild cries of innumerable
multitudes of kittiwake gulls and little auks.
226
Copyright 1908 ly Frank Wilbert Si
SCENE
AT CAPE
YORK
SUMMER HOME OF THE ESKIMO.
The southern panel
In this bay, but
now on
exhibition
kes.
of the
some miles
in
West Wall.
to the eastward, the three meteorites
the foyer of
this
museum remained
for
ages.
was Peary who wrested them from their ancient abode and brought
From these meteorites, in olden times,
to New York in 1895.
the Innuit flaked- off pieces for use in knives, harpoons and arrow
It
them
heads, to aid
in
the struggle for food and
lilt-.
NEWS NOTES
MUSEUM NEWS
SINCE
our
issue
last
227
NOTES.
the following persons have been elected to
membership in the Museum: Annual Members, Messrs.

William H. Allen, Charles Collins, Maunsell S. Crosby,
Gustave F. Kolb, Gilbert Robert Livingston, Jr., Henry Mehl,
William Lincoln Parker, Henry M. Toch, Wm. Whitman, Jr.,
and John Williams and Miss Annie Tweedie.
The Library
Illustrious Prince
has recently received from His Royal Highness the
and Archduke Ludwig Salvator
of Austria twenty
volumes descriptive of the natural history of some of the islands and

towns of the Mediterranean.
Archduke
the
manner.
of Austria
The works
These books were privately printed by
and were published
in
a most sumptuous
are as follows: Liparische Inseln, eight volumes,
Ustica, Columbretes, Alboran, Benzert, Eggligio, Bougie, Zante (two
volumes), Parga (two volumes), Leokas and a splendid panoramic
view of Alexandrette.
Mr. William G. De Witt, one
of our Life
Members, has
just
presented to the Library his private collection of more than two hun-
dred volumes on microscopical subjects, which includes a complete

of.
set
the Transactions of the Royal Microscopical Society from the begin-
ning to the present time.
The
Department of Anthropology has recently purchased from

Professor Eugene Schroeder a collection from the South Sea Islands
containing,
fans,
among
other objects, garments, hair ornaments, chains,
war clubs and an assortment
of twenty-five shells
from the Caro-
lines.
The
Department of Ornithology has received thirty-one King and

other penguins from the Antarctic, collected by Captain B. D. Cleveland.
The
series includes
specimens of both young and adults and represents
an entirely different kind of bird
had
before.
life
from anything the
Museum
has
228
On account of
New York state, a
the recent introduction of the Brown-tail

special exhibit of the Brown-tail
has been placed on the
The
near the elevators.
first floor
damage they
of these pests together with the
Moth
to
and Gypsy moths

life
histories
do, relatively harmless
which might be mistaken for them, and other introduced insects
insects
are shown.
The
fall
held at the
exhibition of the Horticultural Society of
Museum from November 3
on Wednesday after 7 o'clock
Museum,
and
Society
the
Friday and Saturday from 9
on Sunday from
1 to
New York
members
On
organizations.
affiliated
will
be
exhibition will be open
m. especially for the
p.
of the
Thursday,
and from 7 to 10 p. m., and

the exhibition will be open to the general
a. m. to
p. m.,
The
to 7.
m.
p.
public.
MEMBERS' COURSE.
The
first
bers of the
course of illustrated lectures for the season 1909-1910 to
Museum and
by Members
be given in November and December.
will
Thursday evenings
November
18.
Mem-
persons holding complimentary tickets given them
Prof.
at 8:15 o'clock.
Herschel
tion of
Doors open
at 7:45.
C. Parker, "Alaska and the Explora-
Mt. McKinley."
many years has made a specialty

mountain? of northwestern North America and has made many
He was one of the party
fir-t ascents in the Canadian Rockies and the Selkhks.
that attempted the ascent of Mt. McKinley in 190G. His photographs are superb.
Professor Parker of Columbia University for
of climbing the high
December
2.
Mr.
A. Radclvi-te
DuGMORE, "Camera Adventure
in
the
Wilds of Africa."
Mr.
Dugmore
is
a naturalist
who has made
the camera, and his photographs obtained
by
specialty of hunting big
flashlight
game
with
and daylight are wonders.
of a 1500-mile journey on foot through the dense jungle

and include a charging rhinoceros at close range, lions at from
twelve yards distant and herds of hippopotamus, zebra and antelope.
They preserve the record

of British Easl Africa
nine to
December
9.
Mr. Donald
Mr. McMillan was a
on her
latesl trip
>
ill-
member
B.
McMillan,
of th
sei >ntific
"Willi
Peary
staff of the Si
Arctic regions and was th
lead
of
in
the Arctic."
lamer " Roosevell
"
the second support-
LECTURES
ing party in
Commander
229
He had
Peary's successful dash to the Pole.
charge of
the tidal work and of compiling notes on the Eskimo and the natural history of the
expedition.
December
16.
Dk.
Hugh M.
Smith,
"The
Coast of Brittany and the
Industries of the People."

Dr. Smith is Deputy Commissioner of the United States Bureau of Fisheries
and has traveled extensively in the discharge of his official duties. Recently he
made a particularly interesting excursion along the coast of France and obtained
some remarkable photographs. The result- of this expedition are embodied in this
lecture.
PUPILS' COURSE.
These
open
lectures are
panied by their teachers and
Membership
the presentation of
Lectures begin at 4
Oct.
Monday,
to the children of
p.
Members
when accom-
of the
Museum
on
tickets.
m.
Nov.
15.
"The Development
of
New York
City."
Bv Roy
W. Mixer.
17.
"Life
in the
Arctic
Regions."
By Mrs.
Roesler.
"American Forests and Their Uses."
H. Sherwood.
19.
22.
"Scenes
the
in
British
Isles."
A.
L.
By George
By Louis Hus-
SAKOF.
Dec.
.
"Life Among Our Indians."
3. "Animals
(1.
"Mining
Helpful to
By Harlan I. Smith.
By Roy W. Mixer.
United States." Bv E.
Man."
Industries of the
O. HOYEY.
8.
10.
"Animals Injurious to Man."
"Travels
in
South America."
By
F. E.
Lutz.
By Lons Hus-
SAKOF.
PEOPLE'S COURSE.
Giyex
in cooperation with the City
Tuesday evenings
at
8 o'clock.
Department
Doors open
of Education.
at 7:30.
All lectures illustrated with stereopticon views.
November
November
2.
Mr. R. Corxelius Raby, "The Historic Alamo City."

Miss Mary V. Worstell, "The Yosemite Valley."
9.
230
November
November
23.
"Mr. Benjamin
Dr. Edward P.
November
30.
Lecturer and subject
16.
Comstock, "The Canadian Rockies."

Crowell, "Across the New England
S.
States."
Saturday evenings at 8 :15 o'clock.
to
Doors open
Dr. William L. Estabrooke, the

tures
on inorganic chemistry,
November
November
November
November
6.
13.
20.
27.
be announced.
illustrated
at 7 :30.
last four of a
course of eleven
lec-
by experiments.
"Chlorine and Hydrochloric Acid."

"Fluorine, Bromine and Iodine."
"Nitrogen and Oxides; Nitric Acid
Compounds."
"Carbon and Some
Its
and Ammonia."
of Its
Children are not admitted to the lectures of the People's Course, except
on presentation of a
Museum Member's
Card.
RESTORATION OF THE JAWS OF THE FOSSIL SHARK, CARCHARODON MEGALODON.

232

Vol.
DECEMBER,
IX
No. S
1909
THE GIANT OF ANCIENT SHARKS.
AT
the entrance of the Hall of Fossil Fishes there
which lived along the coast of South Carolina,
There can he no doubt

living or extinct of
that this
was the
of five
or six
largest
feet.
The
in
exhibited
megalodori)
Tertiary time.
and most formidable
The jaws
which we have any record.
grown specimen measured about nine

gape
now
is
restoration of the jaws of a shark {Carcharodon
feet across
of a
and must have had a
teeth themselves average about six inches
middle of the jaw, and they gradually decrease in
in height in the
fish
f ullv
size
mouth, the smallest teeth measur-
in the direction of the sides of the
ing about two inches.
In the present restoration the teeth have been arranged as in the
liv-
ing species of Carcharodon, the great White Shark or Man-Eater, for

there can be no question that the fossil shark differed in no essential
structure from
don
its
Museum
loaned by the
tesy of
and
is,
in
in
accordance with the proportions of the teeth in the ex-
same number
of graded sizes.
was
fossil
and
teeth were then arranged

in
the
same number
was
available, out of
Charleston, Joseph Cohen, and the collection was se-
The accompanying
Ff.
Dodge
fund.
picture gives an idea of the impressive size of
the ancient Carcharodon.
Indeed from the teeth alone one can form a
reasonably accurate estimate of the dimensions of the

that a specimen of the living species in
was one and one
half inches in height
another having teeth three inches

feet.
It
banks
which an almost complete denti-
cured through a grant from the Cleveland
known
of
on
This material had been collected during many years
selected.
a resident of
The
of rows
Fortunately for this purpose a large assortment of teeth
of the fossil shark
by
pair having been
(a splendid
of Natural History of Paris, through the cour-
the living form.
the jaws in the
tion
Accordingly the jaws of Carcharo-
relative.
Professor Yalliant), and the model was prepared according to
scale, that
tinct
modern
were carefully measured
rondeleti
in
fossil fish, for
which the
measured twenty
largest tooth
feet,
and that
height had a total length of forty
therefore follows that the length of the Carolina shark

233
it is
whose
234
teeth measured six inches was approximately eighty feet, an estimate,

by the way, which was made many years ago by Professor Goode. The
largest living shark is the Whale Shark, Rhinodon which probably does
not exceed
fifty feet in
In spite of
common
in its
length.
great size, Carcharodon appears to have been quite
its
number
day, judging at least from the
And from
the deposits of phosphate.
this fact
must have been a
idea
For where there
of the richness of the marine fish fauna of that time.
existed one of these sharks there
of teeth found in
may form an
one
vast
number
of fishes
of the usual bony-fish type, for sharks are proverbially rapacious,
we can
implies the capturing of tons of bony-fishes.

also,
and
estimate fairly that the daily provisioning of so huge a creature
because
it
This
worthy of mention
is
gives us a striking illustration of the imperfection of the
geological record.
It is
a well-known fact that in regions where the
teeth of this shark are plentiful, there occur few fossils of the
kinds of
fishes.
Even
the most
(teleosts) are usually lacking.
common
fragmentary remains of bony-fishes
It is
none the
less clear
from the very
presence of the sharks that a contemporary fish-fauna must have been

represented in the most abundant way.
Bashford Dean.
EXPERIMENTAL WORK WITH POMACE
EXPERIMENTAL studies in
their theoretical interest,
principles
to
worked out
FLIES.
evolution are important not only for
but also because
in the lowest
it is
forms of
believed that the
life will
apply also
domestic animals and plants and even to man.

It is the natural
and speculation
mental analysis.
to
course of scientific progress for verbal description
be followed by mathematical statement and experi-
made even before Darwin's

own work was experimental; but
Certain experiments were
time and a large part of Darwin's
the painstaking studies of de Vries concerning (he origin of plant species,
together with the recognition of Mendel's
have given an impetus
to
Laws
of Heredity, not only
experimental evolution, but also,
measure, have determined the character of the work.

research
As
in
large
consequence,
by pedigree breeding for de Vriesian "imitations" and the
POMACE FLIKs
testing of the
manner
235
have been energetically carried on
of inheritance
during the past few years and have yielded many interesting results.
Other factors of evolution, such as the effect of environment, the laws of
fluctuating variation, and selection, have also been studied quantitato a less extent.
and experimentally, although
tively
In these experiments
it
important
is
the ancestors of the individuals used and

cultures must be made.
Therefore,
breeding form which can be
is
it
know
to
desirable to use
red-eyed
excellent laboratory creature.

ter.
The
a generation
eggs are laid directly
Fig.
FIG.
I.
FORE LEG OF
and hatch
in
MALE POMACE
also
known
can be obtained every
upon the food
(e. g.
ripe
banana)
1.
FLY,
two or three^days into
pupate after about a week
in-
latter the
and Fruit Fly, has been found to be an

It feeds upon fermenting vegetable mat-
At ordinary room temperature
two weeks.
some rapidly
and among the
Pomace Fly (Drosophila ampelophila),
as the Vinegar Fly, Sour Fly
Pedigreed
Domestic animals and
easily reared.
sects have been favorite zoological material,
common
the characters of both
of their progeny.
DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA.
legless larvae, or
of feeding.
The pupal
maggots, which
period
in a trifle over twenty-four hours after
is
four or
emergence
days long, and

from the pupal case the adults mate and a new generation is started.
The adults live, on the average, three weeks or a month and the female
five
may lay as many as three hundred eggs.

The males differ from the females very strikingly in the adult stage.
They are somewhat smaller and the under side of the abdomen is more
completely pigmented. The most interesting difference, however, is
the possession by the males of a relatively large comb-like structure,
upon the anterior legs

that is as pronounced
(see Fig. 1).
This
is
a secondary sexual character
It would be explained by
as the antlers of deer.
no other function is apparent, as a male adornment which
However, I have found that the males from
is pleasing to the female.
been removed are just as successful in
have
combs"
which the "sex
many,
since
236
getting mates as those which possess
although strong evidence of
it,
sexual selection with respect to other characters

It is
generally believed that close inbreeding
is
is
This
decreased vitality and disuse by degeneration.

with Drosophila ampelophila.
It
being obtained.
always attended by
not the case
is
has been repeatedly bred for a large
number
results.
careful
sister,
without disastrous
although
my
of the wings
and found
pedigreed stock
has not been allowed
Fig.
than
made
have, furthermore,
measurements
of successive generations
that
mating
o-enerations,
of
brother and
to fly for
been no degeneration
more
has
there
generations,
fifty
the
of
wing
either as to size or as to venation.
On
other
the
breeding
hand,
by
selective
have been able
get
to
specimens with greatly reduced wing

venation as
FU
Figure
is
shown
Figure
in
Selection in the other direction,

for
2,
showing the normal wing.
.3
increased venation,
effective
(Fig. 4).
is
i.
just
e.,
as
study of the
inheritance of these variations was
begun
Fig.
mental
4.
A WING OF DROSOPHILA AMFIG. 2.

PELOPHILA SHOWING REDUCTION OF
VENATION DUE TO SELECTION.
FIG. 3. A NORMAL WING OF DROSOPHILA
AMPELOPHILA.
A WING OF DROSOPHILA AMFIG. 4.
PELOPHILA SHOWING INCREASE OF VENATION DUE TO SELECTION
at
the
Station
Institution
and
is
being continued,
imental studies of evolution, at the
Museum.
About 200,000 pedigreed
individuals of this species alone have
work
two sexes display the abnormalities
mode of inheritance deviates

the commonly accepted laws.
the
of
Experi-
with other mathematical and exper-
already been obtained.

pretation of the results of this
for
Evolution of the Carnegie
is
to
complicated by the
The
fact
inter-
that the
unequal degrees and also because
strongly from expectation on the basis
F.
F.
Lutz.
THE GUFFEY METEORITE
23;
THE GUFFEY, COLORADO, METEORITE.

November, 1007, two cowboys, Robert L. Pope of Canyon City,
and J. T. Witcher of Gnffey, Park Co., Colorado, dis-
IN Colorado,
covered an iron meteorite while they were riding after their cattle
The
along the head waters of the Freshwater River.

of the find
Range
i>
the X. E. \ of the X. E. \ of Section 16,
Meridian,
72, 6th Principal
Tlic nearest post office
secured help and
mountains and
from the
Guffey, as
Its
at
it
succeeded
last
and
The cowboys
mass out of the
must he
now on
30V inches long, 15 inches
in
is
edge
maximum
so straight
i-
office nearest
a "siderite," or wholly metallic mete-
The mass
682 pounds.
One
flattened.
it
exhibition in the foyer.
from the name of the post
called
is
where
the
getting
in
The American Museum purchased
Creek.
is
it
was found,
weight
35,
Guffey, Park County, about three and one
is
to Cripple
finders,
to the spot
orite
Township
Freemont County, Colorado.
in
from the spot where the iron was found.
half miles
it
W.
exact location
is
and
reference to the adjoining sides that
it
height and S inches wide.
roughly pear-shaped, but
much
so nearly rectangular with
is
seems
like a definite fracture,
indicating the possibility of there being another fragment or other frag-
ments
The
of the meteorite in the vicinity of the spot
surface of the iron
iron oxide,
is
from rusty
if
it
tain before
it
was found.
The
At any
air.
statement
lain long
made
is
passed over the Freshwater River region in the

supposition
is
that this
mass
is
a part of
not strong in support of this theory.
face led
them
to
The
brilliant
it
to
Two
sides
in fact did
show
in
after
of 1906,
and the
who found the

not know that
is
iron
they
of pure silver, and

making an unsuccessful
mass
end of the specimen.
good development the "thumb marks" or "piezo-
glyphs" characteristic of meteoritic masses.

ticularly
moun-
white color disclosed on rubbing the sur-
town accordingly,
effort to cut off the small
the
evidence, however,
cowboy-,
suppose that they had found
they started to get
rate, the iron is
upon
that a vivid meteor
fall
The
it.
The
were not searching for a meteorite, and
had found one.
was found.
might be the original skin formed by
and apparently had not
scale
this
covered with an extremely thin film of black
which looks as
the passage of the meteorite through the

free
where
deep upon the
flat
side
shown
in
These markings are parFigure
2,
and they are
less
g u
Ul
I-
0/
-=
S x
en
Co
o:
uj
y
V
<n
*-
it
/.
Z.
.2
'
<
UJ
^_-
r-<
to
.2
2
-
*
cS
r.
f-
.1
242
pronounced and somewhat more elongated

Figure
The
3.
flat side
piezoglyphs, but
it
has
shown
many
Figure
pits,
almost square edge, which
is
of the
its
atmospheric
flight
through the atmosphere.
illustrated in
flight,
Figure 4 and which
when
was
has an oxidized skin like the
rest
mass but shows piezoglyphs very imperfectly.

1 shows the side which was in front during most
and
atmospheric
The
position of the furrows indicates that the line of flight
called
upper right hand quarter of the mass as shown

the iron
is
unusually uniform and dense
out under the discussion of

to the heat
produced by
passing over
and
left
its
its
was toward the

Although
in this picture.
in structure, as will
composition,
friction
of the meteor-
by the Germans the "brustseite."
ite's
is
is
the meteorite
Figure
flight
in
grooves and points due to the flowing
considered to be an abrupt fracture occurring
near the end of
round edge shown
in the
has comparatively few round
mass during
of the melting surface of the
The
in
it
be brought
evidently yielded unequally
with the atmosphere, and the air in
surface plowed deep furrows ending in subcorneal pits
sharp projections pointing forward in the direction of
piece of the iron which
flight.
had been sawed from the small end
of the
mass was polished and etched with dilute nitric acid at the Museum and
was afterwards polished again and
treated
acid
with dilute and strong
and picric acid
nitric-
in succession
the chemists, Booth, Garrett
and
by
Blair,
Philadelphia, picric acid proving to be

the best mordant.
not
show
the
The
surface docs
Widmanstatten
lines
usually characteristic of meteoritic iron,
but instead
which
GUFFEY METEORITE.
PHOTO-
eters in
MICROGRAPH.
graph
Polished section magnified 100 diamin
eters
line
si
show
ud
cryptocrystal-
ure.
The
chemical analysis,
resulted as follows:
is
possesses an extremely
crystalline
structure,
shown magnified KM) diamFigure 5 from a photomicro-
made by
the
analysts.
The
homogeneous character of the mass

and the paucity of nonmetallic contents
are
gravity.
it
granular
fine
indicated
by
made by Booth,
the
high
Garrett and
specific
Blair,
RE( 'EN T
.11)1)1
TIONS TO M E TE0R1 TES
24:;
NX. IIS?',
Iron
Mi.:, 17',
Nickel
Cobalt
0.546<
!hromium
Manganese
0.0189?
Carbon
0.025"
none
,
none
Silicon
Sulphur
0.016%
0.020',
Phosphorus
99.859'
Total
Specific gravity, 7.939.
This analysis shows that the Guffey meteorite contains rather more
than the average percentage of nickel and cobalt and unusually low
The
percentages of carbon, sulphur and phosphorus.
extremely small
amount of sulphur found indicates the practical absence from the mass
meteorites.
of troiiite, the protosulphide of iron which is found only in
This inference
is
substantiated by the few particles of this mineral which
are to be seen on careful examination of the surface.
The low
content of
phosphorus might have been inferred from the practical absence of

schreibersite (a phosphide of nickel and iron characteristic of meteorites)
as shown by the polished and etched specimen, this mineral being the
substance that usually brings the Widmanstatten lines out
in relief.
Edmund Otis Hovey.
RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE METEORITES IN THE FOYER
DURING
the
installed
past
among
summer
the
three
meteorites
(1) the newly discovered iron
scribed elsewhere
in this issue of the
iron meteorite called
Gibeon and
important
in
known
Journal,
Foyer.
as Guffey
(2)
wen-
They were
which
is
de-
a slice and cast of the
known
Modoc.
(3) the largest
20 pounds 3 ounces, of the stone meteorite
the
accessions
portion, weighing
Gibeon section is a new departure in

About two years ago
the mounting of meteorites, as far as we know.
History Museum of
Natural
the
with
exchange
we received through
the two known porof
larger
Hamburg, Germany, a plaster cast of the
The manner
of installing the
GIBEON IRON METEORITE.

Cast iron reproduction with etched
GREAT NAMAQUA LAND. AFRICA.

slice of original
in
its
proper position.
has been inserted in order to display clearly the Widmanstatten lines" thai show the crystalline character of meteoritic iron
The
" -
electric light
and the lack
of such lines in artificial iron.
245
246
and etched
slice
greatest dimensions
and
tions of this interesting find, together with a polished
giving a complete section of the mass
showing
in
in
its
remarkably beautiful development the Widmanstatten
that are generally characteristic of meteoritic iron.
weighed
5()2
We determined
pounds.
GIBEON IRON METEORITE.

(
the plaster cast, cut

place.
cast iron,
original
the correct position of the slice in
na1 uval size.
the latter in two
portion
and
fitted the slice into its
of the plaster cast
proper
reproduced
and hinged the two parts together, with the natural
in its original position,
lines
mass
POLISHED AND ETCHED SECTION.
hie fourth
Then we had each
The
in
.section
thus showing not only the appearance of the mass
RECENT ADDITIONS TO METEORITES
247
We also
polished the
as found but also
and treated
surface of the east iron reproduction
opposing
same manner
nitric acid in the

in
internal crystalline structure.
its
as the meteorite
which
is
with dilute
had been
treated,
does not possess the
artificial iron
order to bring out the fact that
crystalline structure
itself
it
so characteristic of the other.
natural
depression fortunately pierced the upper half of our cast and gave us an
ideal way of introducing an electric light to enable visitors to see clearly
amorphous character
the WidmanstJitten lines of the meteorite and the

of the cast iron.
The
meteorite takes
geographical position
its
name from
about 25
is
8'
the
village of
little
Gibeon whose
South latitude and 17 50' East
longitude in the eastern part of Great
Namaqua Land,
German
in
southwest Africa, the home of the Hottentot. Two other famous iron
meteorites have been found within a radius of 125 miles of Gibeon:
Mukerop,
which there
of
a fine slice in the
is
now in our
came from near the hamlet
Hall
of meteorites,
of
Bethany and
part of a slice in our general series.
more than
Shepard
It
in 1856.
is
is
represented by a small
latter
has been
described
by Mr.
J.
known
for
by Prof. C. U.
more recently.
some authoriLion
the same fall.
to public notice
to consider
them parts
of
entirely distinct in character.
an aerolite or stony meteorite that was seen to

town of Modoc, Scott County, Kansas, and the occurrence
Modoc
collection
in crystalline structure so closely that
have been inclined
River, however,
has come
The former
resembles Gibeon
ties
The
having been
a century,
half
Ward-Coonley
Geology, and Lion River, which
of
is
K. Freed, an eyewitness of the
fall
fall
is
near the
described
and the finder
of our
specimen, as follows:
"The
meteorite appeared as
at 10 o'clock in the evening, tic
a ball
of fire in the west
September
2,
1905,
sky being cloudless and the clear atmosphere
by wind. From Scott City to Syracuse,

enough to read common newspaper print on
and the explosions rattled doors and windows. The mass ex-
of the plains being undisturbed
75 miles southwest,
the street
it
was
light
ploded, and then the resulting fragments exploded several times in rapid
The fragments gleamed brightly at first but their light went out
succession.
almost immediately after the explosions.
Tien came
the sounds of the
explosions, the whistling like bullets or heavy hail of the smaller fragments
and a most intense humming
like that of a rapidly revolving cylinder of
heavy machine, evidently caused by the larger mass.
some
This was followed by
248
fierce
cannonading (echoes
of artillery or a rapid-fire
of the explosions ?) like the discharge of a battery
machine gun, gradually growing
The
out like rolling thunder in the distance.
40 miles west of the
fall
and
fully as far
first
fainter
and dying
explosion took place about
The
above the surface of the earth.
fragments were scattered over an area nine miles bv three; the largest ones
going farthest.
heard the largest one drop and hunted for
it
for over
two
years.
"On May
plow and a
easily,
1908,
6,
five
was breaking new ground on the
horse team that was a
little
prairie with a gang-
too high-spirited to be controlled
but having half-mile furrows as smooth as a lawn before me,
I had set
them go, thinking
While congratulating myself upon our speed we
the plow a few notches deeper into the ground and
nothing of meteorites.
suddenly
very suddenly struck
something hard.
let
It
threw
me
out of
and piled my gang-plow up in a promiscuous heap against the team,

which was too badly surprised to do anything. I had plowed hundreds of
acres and knew there was not a rock within ten miles of me, so my first
thoughts were of dynamite. After sitting for some time trying to think, I
ventured back to where my plow had left the ground. Seeing nothing, I
commenced stabbing with my jack-knife and soon located the cause of the
disturbance.
It was the largest fragment of the Modoc meteorite and completely buried under the tough buffalo sod (virgin soil) and was pounded in
so hard that the force of the blow of my gang-plow had not loosened it.
So
completely was it buried, that I had hunted dozens of times all over that
pasture without either finding the rock or the hole in the ground which it had
made."
my
seat
Twenty-five fragments of Modoc have been found.

All are covered
with the thin glassy black coating or "skin " that is generally characteristic
of aerolites
and that
is
caused by the melting of the surface in the
great heat generated by friction with the air during flight through the
Flakes broken off by the plow reveal the interior

mass and show that the meteorite is composed of whitish stony
material like some terrestrial lavas, but containing blight specks of
earth's atmosphere.
of the
metallic iron.
SPIDERS OF SOUTHERN MEXICO
240
A TRIP TO SOUTHERN MEXICO FOR SPIDERS.
WHEN
found
in
June, 1909, that
to collect spiders, I
was
to visit
southern Mexico
anticipated the trip with great interest
since only a few species of spiders had been described from
the States of Vera Cruz and Tabasco, while Chiapas remained entirely
unexplored.
From
the geography of the country
find a continuation of the Central
we should expect
to
American coast fauna along the
THE ROUTE OF DR PETR UN KE VITCH

MAP OF SOUTHEASTERN MEXICO SHOWING REGION VISITED BY
Pacific coast of Chiapas.
of Tabasco,
itself
PETRU N KEVITC H
the other hand, the fauna of the lowlands
Campeche and Yucatan shows some
Indian fauna, which
Thus
On
DR.
has close relation
a study of the fauna of Central
to the
America
is
relation to the
West
fauna of Venezuela.
a clue to the under-
standing of the insular fauna which represents remarkable features in

the
West
I left
Indies.
New York
Julv
bv the Ward Line of steamers and landed
250
at
Vera Cruz, July
9.
cloudless, and vegetation showed all

During the day the breeze from the sea
The sky was
signs of prolonged drought.
was
refreshing, but each even-
away leaving the

hot and uncomfortable.
ing this died

night
After two days at Vera Cruz, I
went south on the Vera Cruz

Isthmo Railroad, passing
al
and palms and
mesquite
of
jungles.
beautiful
extensive;
Leaving the
Rosa
savannas
through
alternately
Santa
train at the
flag station
on the
mus of Tehuantepec, an
Isth-
hour's
me to the rubber
La Buena Ventura,
ride brought
plantation
where
to
it
But one other specimen
is
known.
Mr.
is
His house
a specialist on palms and orchids.
veritable botanical garden of trees
world, while the plantation
is
End
surrounded by a
foot-prints, the locality
jaguar, tapir, wild swine and deer, but

is
all
parts of the
of
abdomen, used
as the " trap-door."
Enlarged.
In the depth of the jungle, there
life
picturesquely shut in by the jungle.
Side view
Judging from
C. Harvey,
and animal
and other plants from
itself is
J.
one of the owners. Mr. Harvey

has extensive knowledge of
tropical plant
and
good fortune
experience for ten days the
hospitality of
TRAP-DOOR SPIDER CHORIZOPS LORICATUS.
my
was
good one
was
was
intent
little life
for
hunting
on smaller game.
on the ground.
Along the

trails,
flies
however, and
at the
251
bdge of the woods are great numbers of butter-
and grasshoppers and many species of other
During two
insects.
days, one species of butterfly was migrating high over the jungle
immense numbers.
was found
also
found
and presented
two
to
me
large
common.
tarantulas
by Mr. E. Howard,
other specimen of this spider
known
to exist,
specimen of a
There
very rare trap-door spider, Chorizops loricatusC K.
and that
in
There
is
is
in
only one
the Paris
collection.
After leaving La Buena Ventura,
SANTA LUCRECIA.
the State of
spent four days at Palomares
E. O. Hovey, Pr.o.o, 1906.

NATIVE VILLAGE ON THE ISTHMUS OF TEHUANTEPEC.
Oaxaca on
the Isthmus.
Here there
jungle, hut the character of the vegetation

to
different soil.
It
is
also an extensive
is
somewhat
different,
At
the country has the character of a semi-desert with mesquite
arrival,
little
owing
did not, however, afford enough peculiarities to
merit a long stay, so I proceeded to San Geronimo.
and very
in
rainfall.
This year, however, about
this
place,
and cactus
week before my
an especially heavy rain flooded the land for miles.
ran off quickly, and soon the heat of the sun caused the
The water
soil to
crack,
THE AM ERICA X MUSEUM JOURNAL
252
forming crevices
and
in all directions,
so broad that
some
of
my arm
could thrust
them more than

into them.
three feet deep
Much
the surface evidently had been destroyed by the water.
hundreds of trap-door spiders' nests but
The most
striking
Geronimo seems
to
Latrodectus mac-tans,
and
all
distinctive character of the
coral-red stripes which give
it
all
of the
life
found
many
of
were deserted and ruined.
be brilliancy of coloring.
common
Thus
fauna
at
San
the black spider,
over tropical countries, has here broad
The
an appearance more red than black.
E. o. Eiovey, Photo., L906.
ON THE JALTEPEC RIVER, ISTHMUS OF TEHUANTEPEC.
black scorpion
by
a species
mens
is
replaced by a yellow one, the black and brown tarantula
with pink cephalothorax and red-striped abdomen.
of araclmida were abundant, but the
so that three days proved time
My
next slop
was made
enough
at
number
of species
Speci-
was few,
to get a representative collection.
Tonala, Chiapas.
This town
rainy belt which begins a few miles to the southeast of San
is
in
the
Geronimo
and extends along the Pacific coast into Guatemala. In the lowland, it
was hard t<> collect, owing to the great amount of water over the ground
from the swollen brooks. One trip only was made through the little
SPIDERS OF
SOUTHERN MEXICO
253
ranches on the plain, and the remaining days were spent on the
slope's
of the hills about 1200 feet above sea level.
Finally
although
it
decided to go to Tapachula and the Guatemalan border

turned out that I first had two days of good hunting at a
rubber plantation, La Zaeualpa, on the way
to
Tapachula.
reached Tapachula on the evening of Thursday, August
and did not stop even
falling in torrents
wanted
to
for a
moment
the rain
>,
until
When we
Sunday.
was
We
reach the Guatemalan border from Tapachula and return on
E. O. Hovey, Photo., 1906.
ON THE TEHUANTEPEC RIVER.
same day, the distance being only some forty-eight kilometers on

Pan-American Railroad, but the country was already so flooded that
the
train
made
proceeded very slowly.

to allow the
water
to
At one place
it
stopped, and a ditch was
run from one side of the track
while an improvised support was constructed for the

the rain began to
fall
again,
and when,
the
the
to the other,
rails.
late in the afternoon,
Meanwhile
we reached
the last station, about one kilometer from the border, the conductor was
so afraid of a washout, since the wheels of the cars were already plowing
through water
in
many
places, that after only a twenty-minute wait
he
THE AMERICA X MUSEUM JOURNAL
254
started the train
heard that the
two days for

It
backward journey. Therefore on Monday, as I

expected washout had occurred and would take some
on
its
repairs, I
went again
was no longer possible
the water
was
so
deep that
it
to the
to collect
rubber plantation
anywhere
was impossible
La
Zacnalpa.
in the jungle.
In fact
to enter within its borders,
There was plenty of life, however, in the high grass

among the rubber trees, and in the period of waiting my collection grew to
such an extent that I had to get all kinds of odd bottles to hold the speciexcept in a canoe.
Wednesday we were
mens.
We
washout.
to repair the
told that
it
would take another two days
remained
at
Zacnalpa.
When
on Friday,
however, we were told that the washout extended over eighty-eight kilometers of the railroad more or
that several bridges were destroyed
less,
and that some eight days woidd be required

pairs,
we decided
and there
It
to get
we
last station to
to
make
which the
the necessary retrain
was running
horses for Pijijiapam.
rained nearly
all
day Friday, and we had
Next morning we
railroad car.
while
go to the
to
spend the night
to
the horses
let
swim
in a
across the river,
carried the baggage over a bridge, the approach to
which on
both sides of the river was dangerous owing to the fact that the track
had no support, the
ties
Furthermore,
amount
piers in the
pressure.
a great
hanging
the air suspended from the
in
of brush
and
middle of the bridge so that
We
walked over
this
bridge one
logs
it
rails.
had been caught by the
bent perceptibly under the
at a time, then resaddled
our
the "
Camina Reale," or
horses and leaving the railroad started on
"Royal Highway." Fortunately the rain did not begin until about two
o'clock or else we should not have been able to cross some of the rivers
In the dry season these are mere brooks, but now
that we encountered.
some of them were about one hundred yards wide and three to four feet
deep and so rapid that many a time we hesitated before urging the
During the three days of our ride, we crossed twelve
horses to enter.
such rivers and more than double that number of smaller streams.
It would be hard to imagine a worse road than this "Royal HighIn some places
way," the only road between Tapachula and Tonala.
it
was many yards wide,
others
in
through the woods and the
it
fields of
narrowed
each other by miles of beautiful jungle.
Where
water from the recent rains was often two

the road was so
muddv
that
we had
to a
mere path.
It
ran
ranches which were separated from
to
lift
feet
our
the pad)
was narrow, the
deep.
In other places
feet
to the horse's
neck

to
prevent their plowing long distances through the
one part of the road
a great
number
To
storm and lay across our way.

trees necessitated in
many
of trees
ride
255
Along
soft clay.
had been uprooted by some
around the
free
cases the use of the machete
ends of these
and
in conse-
quence much delay.

It is
not surprising that, under such circumstances,
make no more than
we were able to
With our
four kilometers an hour on the average.
baggage soaked because of repeated crossings of
rivers
and ourselves
so
wet that we no longer minded the rain, we arrived on the evening of the
day at Mapastepec where we stopped over night. On the next day

we reached Margarita and stopped at a Mexican ranch, sleeping in
hammocks in the same wet clothing of our journey. On the third day
we reached Pijijiapam and were glad to remain over night in the railfirst
We
road station.
found that the bridge over the Pijijiapam River had
been swept away the twisted

yards farther
down
rails
being washed ashore some hundred
The
the stream.
following day
we
crossed this river,
then paid off our guides and waited for a train that was hourly expected.
It
come till late in

but we were grateful
did not
train,
and proved to be a mere work

get under cover from the rain and spent
the evening
to
the night in a box car, reaching
These days
Tonala
early in the morning.
of ride through the jungle were, perhaps, the
most
inter-
Not only could we study many recent

foot-prints of wild animals, but also we were accompanied for a long
time by a crowd of monkeys. They showed no fear and chattered,
played and swung from tree to tree looking down on us with curiosity.
Red and green parrots were also present in great numbers, and their
esting part of the whole journey.
cry in the evening reminded
European crows, when
The
in
me
forcibly of the distant calling of the
large flocks they are looking for a night's
was abundant and apparently the same as at

Tonala and Zacualpa, but it was impossible to do any collecting under
shelter.
insect
life
the conditions.
To my
great disappointment
my
collection of spiders
from Zacualpa
and Tapachula was considerably damaged during this trip. At first I

around my neck and held it on the
tied the basket containing the jars
saddle in front, but after fording the
first river, I
appreciated the fact that
in case the horse slipped, I should not be able to
weight on
The
my
neck, so thereafter I fastened
constant shaking resulted in rubbing
my
swim ashore with
that
basket to the pack horse.
many specimens
to
powder,
256
and as though that were not misfortune enough, the horse fell on its
back in a ditch and broke some of the most valuable vials. Finally,
so many had been the mishaps that I felt grateful to see that the entire
collection
The
was not ruined.
rest of the
to
Texas a
journey had fewer unexpected incidents.
Cordova and
collecting at
flood at
in the vicinity of
Monterey made
it
the weather
and the
spent a
week
had been dry
insects
collecting
made by way
under very
so long that the soil
and spiders were hidden deep
me
did
On
some
the
way
of Eagle Pass.
difficult conditions, for
was desiccated and cracked

ground.
in the
Paterson of the University of Texas and Professor

School accompanied
City.
impossible to reach San Antonio
through Laredo, so a westerly detour was
At Austin,
Mexico
Brown
Professor
of the Pease
on several of these excursions and most cour-
teously helped in the collecting.
As may be
imagined, the work of the trip was considerably
easily
impeded by the heavy

lowlands into
rains
swamps and
of the expedition
was
and floods which turned the
lakes.
large.
The
With
all that,
forests of the
however, the net result
collections consist not only of
some
2000 specimens of spiders, scorpions and other arachnids but also of

more than 400 vials containing many specimens each of myriapods and
To
insects.
reptiles
this list
and a small
given to
must be added a few specimens
of
collection consisting of nineteen
me by Mr. Olmstead
of
Mexico City
amphibians and
Mexican snakes
for presentation to the
Museum.
Alexander PETRrNKEViTCH.
o. Hovey, Photo., 1906.
TEHUANA TRANSPORTATION
NEWS NOTES
MUSEUM NEWS
AT
the regular meeting of the
Ludwig
Mr.
important
II.
gift of
Museum on
number
of the
Member on account of
game and Dr. Hugh M. Smith was
heads of big
Membership on account
extended to the Museum.
to the gifts already
of
many
services rendered
and
reported in the Journal the following
important donations were announced

tion of types of
of the
in the last
R. Cornell was made a Life
gifts of the
Ix addition
Member
books noted
elected to Life
courtesies
on November
memberof the Board. Prince
of Trustees, held
Salvator was elected a Life
account of the valuable

Journal;
Board
NOTES.
Dr. James Douglas was elected a
8,
2h",
at the Trustees'
meeting:
A collec-
from Dr. Thomas H.

one hundred books on angling, from Miss Grace H.
North American
spiders, received
Montgomery;
Dodge; an atlas of hand-painted plates of Brazilian flowers, from Mr.
Anson W. Hard two hundred volumes on microscopy, from Mr. William
G. DeWitt; a head-dress from Abyssinia, from Dr. U. S. Kahn.
;
SlNCE our
memberJames Douglas and George J.

Gould; Life Members, Messrs. S. B. Chapix, R. R. Cornell,
William R. Craig, Thos. De Witt Cutler, Wm. T. Davis, Lewis
L. Delafield, A. F. Estabrook, Alessandro Fabbri, Childs Frick,
John Hubbard, M. R. Jacobus, Goodhue Livingston, James McLean, Edward C. Moore, Jr., Victor Morawetz, Dudley Olcott,
2d, J. Saxford Saltus, Prixzex und Herrx Erzherzog Ludwig
Salvator, Edward Shearson, Francis Skinner, Byam K. Stevens,
Frederick Sturges, F. W. Yaxderbilt and Henry R. Walcott, Dr.
Hugh M. Smith and Mmes. Emmons Blaine and Sidney Webster;
Sustaining Members, Messrs. H. I). Babcock, Edward S. Harkness,
Mortimer L. Schiff, Grant B. Schley and Delos O. Wickham and
Mrs. D. C. Blair; and Annual Member-. Messrs. Joseph A. Blake,
Albert Calman, J. B. Francis Herreshoff, Cary T. Hutchixsox,
Harry La Montague, James Laughlin, Jr., Charles L. Leoxori,
Fraxk J. Logan, Philip M. Lydig, J. M. McCarthy, Wm. McDonald
Charles Mac Donald, Marvin H. Mead, Hexry H. Melville,
Truman H. Newberry, Dudley Olcott, Geo. Card Pease, Veryl
ship in the
last issue the
Museum:
following persons have been elected to
Patrons, Messrs.
258
Edmund
Rogers, Alexander Rebel,

George S. Runk, Henry A. Rusch, William Salomons, T. P. Shonts,
H. B. Smithers, Geo. S. Terry, S. Breck P. Trowbridge, Frank
Vincent, Geo. D. Widener, P. A. B. Widener, William Williams
Preston, John T. Pratt,
P.
and John M. Woolsey, Doctors Clemens Feed a, Ulysses
S.
Kahn
and E. H. Raymond, Major General I). E. Sickles, U. S. A., Gen.

Samuel C. Lawrence, Mmes. James Lent Barclay, C. Ledyard
Blair, David H. Greer, Charles McBurney and Joseph Walker,
Jr., and Misses Caroline Coventry Haynes and Fanny P. Mason.
The
annual autumn exhibition of the Horticultural Society of
New
York was held at the Museum from the evening of November 3 to 7

The exhibit was broader
inclusive and was attended by 30,734 visitors.
in scope than that of last year and was more effectively displayed, being
installed in the foyer
and the adjacent
halls.
summer, Dr. Edmund Otis Hovey of the Departsome of the iron and copper mines of the Upper
Peninsula of Michigan and secured valuable and interesting specimens
Through the kindness
for our collections illustrating economic geology.
of the Oliver Mining Company, its noted hematite mines at Ishpeming
were studied in detail and characteristic specimens secured. Through the
courtesy of Dr. Alexander Agassiz, President of the Calumet and Hecla
During
ment
of
the past
Geology
visited
Mining Company, a complete
series of
specimens was collected
illus-
trating the occurrence of native copper in the celebrated mines of that
Through the courtesy of Mr. F. W. Denton, the

at Calumet.
mines at Painsdale were visited and characteristic specimens were se-
companv
cured.
Dr. Louis Hussakof, Assistant Curator of Fossil Fishes, recently

He spent most of his time
returned from a five months' trip to Europe.
studying the collections of living and fossil fishes in the leading museums;
Royal Scottish Museum, the British Museum, the
Musee d'Histoire Naturelle of Paris and the Berlin Museum. Considerable attention was given to the methods employed in the exhibition
among
and
in
others, the
installation of specimens.
The
last
studying and collecting living fishes
Many
two weeks of the
at the
trip
were spent
Stazione Zoologica, Naples.
valuable scientific data were obtained for future publication.
NEWS NOTES
During
the past
summer
259
collecting in the
Eocene deposits of Wyo-
ming for the Department of Vertebrate Palaeontology was continued by

Mr. Walter Granger. His party was four months in the field and
devoted
its
attention principally to the exposures of the
Wind River
Wind River
basin in the
Lower Eocene formation
beds of the
central part of the State.
This
is
the
in
the formation in which the famous
Eohippus, was found
in
skeleton of the small four-toed
horse,
by Professor Cope's
Fossil remains are rare in the
collectors.
1880
Wind
They are
River beds and usually are fragmentary and badly preserved.

desirable, however, because they fill an important place in the Eocene
North America. The collection obtained this season commore than four hundred specimens, representing probably all of
history of
prises
the forms previously
new
ones.
It will,
trating early
Eocene
known
to
occur
in the
formation as well as several
therefore, considerably increase our collection illuslife.
Mr. Barnum Brown of the Department of

returned early in November from a field season
Vertebrate Palaeontology
spent
in collecting in
the
Laramie Cretaceous rocks of Montana. Mr. Brown was assisted by

Mr. Peter C. Kaisen, and their efforts were richly rewarded by securing
the major portion of a ceratopsian skeleton besides parts of three skeleFurthertons of a new predentate dinosaur from the Hell Creek horizon
.
more,
much
material was obtained which will be used in mounting a
skeleton of the three-horned dinosaur Triceratops.
There
has been installed
in the
new
accession cases of the Depart-
Anthropology (Siberian Hall, southwest corner of the ground

by Mr.
floor) a selected series of specimens from the material collected
Alanson Skinner last summer among the Winnebago, Ojibway and Cree
ment
of
Indians, and by Mr.
W.
C.
Orchard among the Penobscot Indians.
twenty-seventh annual convention of the American OrnitholoDecerngists Union is to be held at the Museum Tuesday to Thursday,
The
ber 7
to 9, inclusive.
260
MEMBERS' COURSE.
The
following illustrated lectures remain to be given to
Members
of the
Museum and persons holding complimentary tickets given them by Members.

Thursday evenings
December
2.
at 8.15 o'clock.
Doors open
at 7:45.
Mr. A. Radclyffe Dugmore, "Camera Adventure
in the
Wilds of Africa."
December
December
9.
16.
Mr. Donald B. McMillan, "With Peary the Arctic."

Dr. Hugh M. Smith, "The Coast Brittany and the
in
of
Industries of the People."
PUPILS' COURSE.
These
open
lectures are
panied by their teachers and to the children of
Membership
the presentation of
Lectures begin at 4 P.
Wednesday, December
1.
Members
when accom-
of the
Museum on
tickets.
M.
H.
I.
Smith, "Life
Among
our Indians."
December 3.
R. W. Mixer, "Animals Helpful to Man."
Monday, December 6.
E. O. Hovey, "Mining Industries of the United
Friday,
States."
Wednesday, December
Friday,
December
10.
8.
F. E. Lutz, "Animals Injurious
Louis Htjssakof,
"Travels
in
to
Man."
South America."
PEOPLE'S COURSE.
Given
in
Saturday evenings
at
8:15 o'clock.
Doors open
at 7:30.
The last three of a course of eleven lectures by Dr. William

BROOK on inorganic chemistry, illustrated by experiments.
December
December
December
4.
11.
18.
"Carlton Dioxide and

"The Atmosphere."
"Combustion and the
Tuesday evenings
at
8:15 o'clock.
L.
Esta-
Ventilation."
Flame."
Doors open
at
7:30.
Lectures
illus-
trated with stereopticon views.
December
December
7.
14.
Mr.
Mr.
George Newton Cross, "The White Hills."

George Newton Cross, "City of Washington."
Children are not admitted to the lectures of the People's Course, excepl
on presentation of a
Museum Member's
Card.
MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES
LECAI.
Fully illustrated.
open
at 2:4.~>, lectures
261
HOLIDAY COURSE.
Open
free to the public.
begin
at
No
tickets required.
Doors
3:15 o'clock.
Thanksgiving Day, November 25, 1909. Charles

"The Fiji Islanders and >ther People of the South Seas."
II.
Townsend,
<
Christinas Day.
to
25,
Alanson Skinner, "By Canoe
1909.
Hudson Bay."
New
(
December
)ur
Year's Day, January
1,
Roy W. MlNER, "Sea Animals
1910.
of
Shore."
Washington's Birthday, February
"Some American Mining
22,
1910.
Edmund Otis Hovey,
Regions."
Particularly those producing Coal, Iron, Copper, Gold
and
Silver.
New York Academy of Sciences and Affiliated

On Monday
First
evenings,
The New York Academy
Mondays, Section
of
of Sciences:
Geology and Mineralogy;
Second Mondays, Section of Biology;

Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry;
On
Tuesday evenings,
as announced:
The Linnaean Society of New York;

The New York Entomological Society;
The Torrey Botanical Club.
On
The Horticultural Society of New York;

On
The New York Microscopical

The programmes
Society.
lished in the weekly Bulletin of the

sent to the
members
making request
New York Academy
of the Director will be
Members
prodded with
of Sciences
of the
pub-
and
on
Museum
the Bulletin as issued.
The American riuseum Journal

Edmund Otis Hovey,
Mary Cynthia Dickerson,
Frank M. Chapman,
Editor.
Associate Editor.
Louis P. Gratacap,
William K. Gregory,
Subscription,
subscription to the
Journal
One Dollar per

is
Advisory Board.
year.
included in the membership fees of

the Museum.
all
classes of
Members
Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Bovlston

bridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City.
St.,
Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass
Cam

American Museum Journal.)
{Issued as supplements to The
1.
Xo.

of
Mammalogy and
THE SAGINAW
3.

Price, 10 cents.
October, 1901.
VALLEY COLLECTION. By
December, 1901.
No
F.
Ornithology.
H.
I.
Smith, Assistant
Price, 10 cents.

Out
No.
D. Matthew,
January, 1902.
of print.

By Louis
P.
Gratacap, A. M.,
February, 1902.
Price, 10 cents.
No
_ NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS.

of
Mammalogy and
February, 1904.
No.
6.
Price, 10 cents.
7.
Curator
A. Allen, Ph. D.
Revised edition,
1902
March,

Second
No.
By J.
Ornithology.
May, 1909.
edition,
April,
1902.
Price, 10 cents.
CITY.
May, 1902.
By William Betjtenmuller,
Price, 15 cents.
No.

No.
9.
Price, 10 cents.

ond edition, May, 1905. Price, 10 cents.
No. 10.-

By William BeutenmCller,
1903.
No.
D. Matthew, Ph. D.,

January, 1903. Sec-
CITY.
February,
Price, 10 cents.
THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE

July, 1903.
INCAS.
By
C.
W. Mead,
Price, 10 cents.

thew, Ph.
ber. 1903.
D.
D.. Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palaeontology.
MatOcto-
Price, 10 cents.

HISTORY.
January, 1904.

February, 1905.
Out
Ornithology.
Price, 10 cents.
263
of print.
April,
1904.
Associate
Reprinted,
No. 15.
No. 16.
PRIMITIVE ART.
July, 1904.
Price, 15 cents.
THE INSECT-GALLS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK

By William Beutenmuller,
CITY.
October, 1904.
Price, 15 cents.
Museum
No. 17.
By W. D. Matthew,
tology
No. 18.
THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W.
D.
Curator of
of print.
THE REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK

Raymond
New York

By Raymond
Park.
October, 1905.
New York
D. M. D.
By
CITY.
Zoological
Price, 15 cents.
21 THE DEVELOPMENT OF A MOLLUSK. By
No. 22.
CITY.
Zoological Park.
Price, 15 cents.
July, 1905.
No.
Associate
D.,
Out
April, 1905.
No. 20.
Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate PalaeonPrice, 15 cents.
January, 1905.
Matthew, Ph.
No. 19.
Journal.)
THE FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAMMALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY.
January, 1906.
E.
Dahlgren,
CITY.
By Frank
B.
Price, 10 cents.
M. Chapman, Associate Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology.

April-July, 1906.
No. 23.
Price, 15 cents.

Miner, Assistant Curator
October, 1906.
of
Price, 10 cents.
No. 24.
nology.
No. 25.
March, 1907.
of Eth-
Price, 10 cents.

whose busts are
in the

cents.
No. 26.

No. 27
THE MALARIA
MOSQUITO.
December, 1907.
By
B. E.
No. 28.
Price, 10 cents.
Dahlgren, D. M. D.
April, 1908.
Assis-
Price, 15 cents.
THE HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS. By

Frank M. Chapman,
Curator of Ornithology.
February, 1909.
Price.
15 cents.
No. 29.
THE INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND

Alanson Skinner, Department
of Anthropology.
VICINITY.
By
September, 1909.
Price, 10 cents.
No. 30. THE
STOKES PAINTIN( IS R EPRESENTIN<
November,
1)(M).
Price, 5 cents.
264
R EENLAND ESKIMO.

Natural History

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Natural History

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

r V'ft

AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY

MARY CYNTHIA DICKERSOX,

THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY

HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN

CLEVELAND II. DODGE

A SSIS TA N T-SEC RE TARY AND

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION.

Albert S. Bickmore, B. S., Ph.D., LL.D., Curator Emeritus.

DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY AND INVERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY

DEPARTMENT OF MAMMALOGY AND ORNITHOLOGY.

Allen, Ph.D., Curator.

Frank M. Chapman, Curator of Ornithology.

DEPARTMENT OF VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY.

Henry Fairfield Osborn,

A.B., Sc.D., LL.D., D.Sc, Curator.

W. D. Matthew, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Associate

DEPARTMENT OF ICHTHYOLOGY AND HERPETOLOGY.

Bashford Dean, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator

Louis Hussakof, B.S., Ph.D., Assistant Curator

Marshall H. Saville, Honorary Curator

DEPARTMENT OF BOOKS AND PUBLICATIONS

A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator.

DEPARTMENT OF INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY.

Ph.D., Assistant Curator.

Gratacap, Ph.B., A.P>., A.M., Curator of Mollusca.

William Morton Wheeler, Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Social Insects.

Ralph W. Tower, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator.

DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS.

Offk ERS AM) TRUSTE]

List of Illustb V.TIONS

The Duck Hawk, Hackensack Meadow

Two Noteworthy Foreign Museums

Museum News Notes

A SUMMEB WITH THE PACIFIC COAST WHALERS.

School Children at the Tuberculosis Exhib

Museum News Notes

New Habitat Groups oi North Amerk w

The Annual Meeting of the Trustees

Recent Purchases of Fossil Vertebrates

Scientific Publications i\ 1908

A Collection from the Andaman Islands.

The Oldest Land

Museum News Notes

The Seriesof Protozoan Models.

New Marine Habitat Group

Model of the Goblin Shark. (Illustrated)

The Earth and the Sun. (Illustrated)

Polak Exploration. (Illustrated)

Ancient Sharks. By Bashford Dean

The Mural Decorations

Manhattan Island and

The Enrichment of Our Collections from Arctic America

The Guffey, Colorado, Meteorite.

Recent Additions to the Meteorites

to Southern Mexico for Spiders.

Museum News Notes

Duck Hawk Habitat Group

Egret Habitat Group

General View of Ruins.

Rue Victor Hugo, Looking South-

ward. May, 1908

New Cone Looking S. 60 \\

Public School Children Approaching the North and South